JP6084051B2 - Game system - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming system that manages a plurality of gaming machines and the like installed in a gaming store.

  In a conventional gaming system, a gaming machine to be managed includes an inner frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the machine frame, and a glass frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame. . In addition, the gaming machine is provided with various control devices, as well as an inner frame opening detection switch and a glass frame opening detection switch for detecting the opening of the inner frame and the glass frame.

  When the inner frame or the glass frame is opened, it is detected by these opening detection switches, the detection result is input to the control device, and the control device indicates that the inner frame or the glass frame has been opened. The notification is made by sound from a speaker, light emission from a lamp, or the like. In addition, the information regarding the opening is transmitted to a higher-level management device by the control device, and is configured so that it can be grasped by a manager of a game store (for example, Patent Document 1).

  There is also a gaming machine that encloses a predetermined number of game balls and circulates the enclosed game balls to play a game. In this gaming machine, the gaming ball is made of a non-magnetic material such as stainless steel so that an illegal act of guiding with a magnet is not performed (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2002-320744 A JP 2012-217696 A

However, the game system as described above has the following problems.
That is, the power is not supplied to the control device at night, and in such a state, detection related to the opening of the inner frame and the glass frame cannot be performed.

  As an example of the fraudulent act, it is conceivable that an inner frame or a glass frame is opened at night, and a game ball made of a nonmagnetic material is replaced with a game ball that reacts to a magnet. As described above, since the frame opening at night cannot be monitored, it cannot be grasped if it is illegally opened during this period and the game ball is replaced. Therefore, the construction of the game ball with a non-magnetic material is not a perfect countermeasure against fraud.

  Therefore, the present invention was made to solve the above-described problems, and can grasp and notify that the frame has been opened even when the power to the gaming machine is not supplied. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming system that makes it easy to detect frauds caused by the opening of a frame.

The gist of the present invention for achieving the object described above resides in the inventions of the following items.
The invention described in claim 1
A plurality of gaming machines installed in a gaming store, installed corresponding to each game machine, respectively the corresponding gaming machine communicate possible plurality of terminals, it is possible signal passing each terminal gaming store A management system that is installed in and manages various information of the game store,
The gaming machine is
It is possible to play a game by repeatedly using a predetermined number of game media enclosed in advance in the gaming machine, the game media is made of a non-magnetic material,
An open / close member attached to the machine frame so as to be openable / closable, an open / close monitoring means for monitoring the open / close state of the open / close member, and a monitoring result of the open / close monitoring means can be transmitted to the outside including the terminal and the management device. Monitoring result transmission means,
The open / close monitoring means can monitor the open / closed state of the open / close member regardless of the presence or absence of power supply that can be played in the gaming machine,
A gaming machine in which the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means is a result indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed is illegally performed because a gaming medium made of a magnetic material is enclosed in the gaming machine and the viewing is difficult. It has a monitoring target setting means that can be set as a monitoring target gaming machine that may be present.

Here, the “gaming machine” refers to a game medium made of a non-magnetic material , such as a game ball pre-enclosed in the machine, with the game ball guided to a predetermined launch position being launched into the game area. An enclosed game machine that circulates and uses the game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position again is applicable.
In addition, an inner frame provided with a game board including a game area is normally attached to the machine frame of the gaming machine so that it can be opened and closed, and a glass frame is attached to be openable and closable so as to cover the front front of the game board. Such an inner frame or a glass frame corresponds to an “opening / closing member”.

Then, the gaming machine was a result indicating that there is the opening and closing of the closing member, there is a high possibility that configured game media is conducted are difficult to incorrect visual encapsulated by a magnetic material in the gaming machine, the By setting the gaming machine as a “monitoring target gaming machine”, it becomes possible to respond to the monitoring of the monitored gaming machine.

The invention according to claim 2
It has a notification means capable of performing a predetermined notification when the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means is a result indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed.
Here, the “predetermined notification” is not only a notification of a result indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed, but also a confirmation of whether or not a predetermined condition for setting the monitored gaming machine is satisfied. Such notification may be used.

The invention according to claim 3
The terminal includes storage means capable of storing various information,
The storage means is capable of storing at least the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means and information on fraud when receiving the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means.
Here, the “information about fraud” is confirmed by the gaming machine in which the opening / closing member is opened and closed, and it does not matter whether the type of fraud is visible.

The invention according to claim 4
And determinable fraud determining means based on the number of game media that exist whether the fraud before Symbol gaming machine in the gaming machine or the specific region,
Setting means capable of arbitrarily setting a prescribed number of game media as a determination criterion for the presence or absence of fraud,
The setting means is characterized in that the specified number related to the monitored game machine can be set to a value different from a game machine other than the monitored game machine.
Here, with respect to the prescribed number used as the threshold for fraud determination, generally, gaming machines with a high possibility of fraud should be stricter, and the prescribed number regarding the monitored gaming machine is a smaller value than other gaming machines. It becomes possible to set to.

  According to the gaming system of the present invention, it is possible to reliably grasp and notify that there is an open frame for a gaming machine to be managed, and to take more effective countermeasures against fraud.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of the game board of a gaming machine. It is a back view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows a circulation apparatus. It is a front view of a card unit (a) and a unit stocker. It is a system block diagram of an amusement store. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of a gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the control action in the manufacturing stage of a game system. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the control action in the installation stage of a game system. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a control operation subsequent to FIG. 9. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the control action in the operation | movement stage in the case of being in an online state in a game system. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the control action in the operation | movement stage in being in an offline state in a game system. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the control action in the replacement | exchange stage of a gaming machine in a game system. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the control action in the replacement | exchange stage of a card unit in a game system. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the control action in the confirmation stage of frame open | release information with a game system. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening switch monitoring process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display edit process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize display edit process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the error monitoring process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the main process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game machine information output edit process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit connection confirmation process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the switch monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the firing ball detection switch monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the foul ball detection switch monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the out ball | bowl detection switch monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the error monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the error cancellation switch monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the enclosed ball number monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the board surface ball number error monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the board surface ball number error monitoring process of a payout control apparatus, and a figure which shows an example of a regulation number. It is a flowchart which shows the frame open | release error monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge permission signal edit process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl feeding control process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment / rest control process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment control process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the break control process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment start monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment write completion ACK monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the payment completion | finish monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the break start monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the break start ACK monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the break end monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit reception analysis process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit reception analysis process 1 of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit reception analysis process 2 of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit reception analysis process 3 of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display edit process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ball polishing motor control process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit command transmission process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the count switch monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the internal mutual authentication process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud check process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the card | curd reception process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the break reception process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of frame release information command reception of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of RAM clear command reception of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows a card unit enclosure ball shortage error command reception process. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame open | release information log | history data storage part in a card unit. It is a figure which shows a control operation at the time of power activation (CU). It is a figure which shows a control operation at the time of power activation (P machine). It is a figure which shows a control operation at the time of reconnection (CU). It is a figure which shows control operation at the time of reconnection (P machine). It is a figure which shows control operation | movement at the time of waiting-card insertion (CU). It is a figure which shows a control operation | movement at the time of waiting-card insertion (P machine). It is a figure which shows a card balance consumption (CU) control operation. It is a figure showing a card balance consumption (P machine) control operation. It is a figure which shows (CU) control operation | movement at the time of subtraction (wagon service). It is a figure which shows control operation at the time of subtraction (wagon service) (P machine). It is a figure which shows the control operation | movement at the time of big hit / probability change generation | occurrence | production (CU). It is a figure which shows control operation at the time of big hit / probability change occurrence (P machine). It is a figure which shows a control operation | movement at the time of a no-sphere detection (CU). It is a figure which shows control operation at the time of a no-sphere detection (P machine). It is a figure which shows a card return (CU) control operation. It is a figure which shows a card return (P machine) control operation. It is a figure which shows a control operation at the time of a glass frame open | release (CU). It is a figure which shows a control operation at the time of glass frame opening (P machine). It is a figure which shows a control action at the time of the electric power interruption generation | occurrence | production after CU data arrival. It is a figure which shows control operation at the time of the power failure generation | occurrence | production after CU data arrival (P machine). It is a figure which shows control operation at the time of the power failure generation | occurrence | production before CU operation instruction arrival (CU). It is a figure which shows the control action at the time of the game interruption by a break (CU). It is a figure which shows the control action at the time of the game interruption by a break (P machine). It is a figure which shows the control operation | movement at the time of CU request | requirement operation no & addition request command not reaching. It is a figure which shows control operation at the time of P machine response unreachable. It is a figure which shows control operation at the time of P machine response unreachable. It is a figure which shows control operation at the time of CU subtraction request command P machine rejection. It is a figure which shows control operation at the time of CU game permission request command P machine rejection. It is a figure which shows control operation at the time of CU glass opening request command P machine rejection. It is a process state transition diagram which shows the flow of control operation in an installation stage. It is a process state transition diagram which shows the flow of control operation | movement in the case of being an online state in an operation | movement stage, or a replacement | exchange stage. It is a process state transition diagram which shows the flow of control operation | movement when it is an offline state in an operation | movement stage. It is a figure which shows an example of alerting | reporting (display) in a gaming machine and a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of alerting | reporting (display) in a hall computer and a remote control. It is a figure which shows an example of alerting | reporting (display) in a gaming machine and a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of alerting | reporting (display) in a hall computer. It is a front view of a game machine (modification). It is a block diagram which shows the control system of a game machine (modification). It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-balls display edit process of a game machine (modification). It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-balls display data setting process of a game machine (modification). It is a flowchart which shows the enclosed ball number monitoring process (modification) of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the board surface ball number error monitoring process (modification) of a payout control apparatus. It is a figure which shows a circulation apparatus (modification 1). It is a figure which shows a circulation apparatus (modification 2). It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the card reception of a card unit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the data regarding frame open | release information. It is a system block diagram of the amusement shop in another Example. It is a figure which shows the control operation of the installation stage of a unit stocker. It is a figure which shows the control operation of the replacement | exchange stage of a unit stocker. It is a figure which shows the control operation of the replacement | exchange stage of a unit stocker. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit starting process in another Example. It is a processing state transition diagram which shows the flow of control operation in the installation stage of the unit stocker in another Example.

Hereinafter, as an embodiment of the present invention, an embodiment in which a gaming machine constituting the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine that is an encapsulated ball type gaming machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, although the card unit 200 is installed so as to correspond to the gaming machine 10, the card unit 200 will be described later.

  A gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is called a so-called encapsulated gaming machine, and a card as a gaming medium lending device in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 20) of gaming balls as gaming media are encapsulated in advance. This is a pachinko machine that plays a game by firing encapsulated game balls based on the number of possessed balls (game value) corresponding to the valuable value information (ball lending number) input by the unit (CR unit) 200.

  In such a gaming machine 10, a game ball guided to a predetermined launch position can be launched into a game area 22 which will be described later, and a game can be played. By guiding it again to the position, the game ball is circulated and used. In the process of dropping the game area 22, the launched game balls are collected as safe balls if they win various winning holes, and are collected as out balls if they do not win any winning holes.

  The gaming machine 10 includes a machine frame 11 that is fixed to a gaming machine island on which the gaming machine 10 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 11 so as to be rotatable at one side end. An inner frame 12 is attached to the machine frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 20 shown in FIG. 2 is attached to the inner frame 12, and a glass frame 13 is attached so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the front front of the game board 20.

  The game area 22 of the game board 20 is visible from the front through a glass plate (which may be a transparent synthetic resin plate) held by the glass frame 13. The glass frame 13 is pivotally supported and attached to the inner frame 12 at one end portion thereof. That is, the glass frame 13 including the glass plate opens the front surface of the game board 20 from a normal use state (closed state) covering the front surface of the game board 20 (a front surface including a game area 22 described later) with a slight gap. It can be opened and closed in the open state.

  In the open state of the glass frame 13, for example, an operator inserts a hand into the front surface of the game board 20 to release a clogged ball in the game area 22 or to insert a missing game ball. Is possible. Here, in addition to the glass frame 13, the inner frame 12 corresponds to an “opening / closing member” attached to the machine frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. The inner frame 12 is also referred to as a game frame or a front frame, and the glass frame 13 is sometimes referred to as a front frame. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 will be described.

  The inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 are opened and closed manually by an operator (employee at a game shop, etc.). An opening / closing mechanism for automatically opening and closing the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 (Driving means: open / close solenoid, etc.), and the inner frame 12 and glass based on the operation of the remote controller 160 (shown in FIG. 102) of an operator (employee at an amusement shop, etc.) for an IR light emitting unit 205 of the card unit 200 described later. An opening / closing mechanism may be operated by inputting an opening / closing signal of the frame 13 so that the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 can be opened / closed.

  A lower panel 11a is provided below the glass frame 13, and an operation display device 30 is disposed on the lower panel 11a. The operation display device 30 is provided with a panel screen 31 and a production operation switch 32. The panel screen 31 is a touch panel type display screen, for example, for displaying the number of balls held, the number of balls lent, etc., and for performing operations such as renting a ball, and the operating status of the gaming machine 10 (big hit The number of times, the number of probability changes, the number of start of the variation display of the special figure, etc.) can be displayed. The production operation switch 32 includes up / down / left / right selection buttons and a center push button. The effect operation switch 32 is used for an effect operation, for example.

In addition, a counting switch 311, a break switch 312, a counting switch LED 313, and a break switch effective display LED 314 are arranged on the lower panel 11 a. Note that these switches 311, 312, 313, and 314 (particularly the break switch 312) may be displayed as touch panel switches on the panel screen 31 of the operation display device 30.
In addition to the operation display device 30, a ball number indicator 40 for displaying the number of balls in particular may be provided at an appropriate position such as the lower panel 11a. Such a modification will be described later.

  The counting switch 311 and the break switch 312 are turned on (or alternately turned on and off) when the player presses the operation unit (button) on the surface of these switches. The count switch 311 is operated when the player wants to count the number of balls, and the break switch 312 is operated when the player desires a break. The count switch LED 313 blinks when prompting the count switch 311 to be pressed, and the break switch valid display LED 314 is lit when a break is possible.

  Further, in the lower panel 11a, a key insertion portion 17 of a locking device (not shown) for the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 is formed at a side end portion which is an opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the inner frame 12. ing. In addition, on the lower panel 11a, on the right side of the operation display device 30, there is provided a launch handle 18 for the player to perform a game ball firing operation. Is provided. Further, around the glass frame 13, there are provided a decorative lamp 14 using an LED as a light source, a pair of moving lights 15 and 15 similarly using an LED as a light source, a pair of left and right speakers 16b and 16b, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 is made of a plate-like base material, and a guide rail 21 that divides a substantially circular game area 22 is provided on the front surface of the game board 20. Along the game area 22 is guided along. In the game area 22, in addition to a large number of game nails (not shown) that change the falling path of the game ball, the general winning ports 27a to 27d, the first starting winning port 25, the second starting winning port 26, the center A display device 35 housed in the case 24, a variable winning device 29, a general start gate 28, an out-ball inlet 23, and the like are provided. In addition, the 2nd start winning opening 26 is also called a normal electric accessory (common electric power), and is corresponded to a normal variable winning apparatus.

  The game area 22 is an area for performing a safe or out determination (determination of whether or not a prize has been won) while the launched game ball falls from above, and the game ball is awarded a safe ball by winning various winning holes. In this case, data of a predetermined number of game balls set in advance according to the type of winning opening is added to the number of balls held by the player as a prize ball. A collective display device 36 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. Hereinafter, main components on the game area 22 will be sequentially described in detail.

  Each of the start winning ports 25 and 26 is a winning port that functions as a start winning port for a special figure (special symbol) to be described later. In this embodiment, the start winning ports 25 and 26 are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 25 is always open, but the lower second start winning opening 26 is configured to be openable and closable. In other words, the second start winning opening 26 includes a pair of left and right opening / closing members 26a, 26a. When each opening / closing member 26a is opened on both sides, a winning can be made, and when closed as shown in FIG. Become. Each start winning opening 25, 26 is disposed below the center portion of the center case 24.

  The display device 35 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) and includes a display screen surrounded by the center case 24. The display device 35 (display screen thereof) is for variably displaying various images including identification information (referred to as special figures) such as numbers and characters related to the variable display game. The display device 35 is not limited to the LCD (liquid crystal display) and may be any device that can display various images. For example, a CRT (cathode ray tube) display, an organic EL display display, or the like is adopted. You can configure it.

  The variable display game is started based on the winning of game balls at the start winning ports 25 and 26. Basically, the display screen of the display device 35 has identification information in the left, right, center and three horizontal rows. A special figure is displayed, and the special figure is scroll-fluctuated for each column. When a predetermined time elapses, one special figure is stopped and confirmed for each column. During the execution of the variation display game, a character image, a background image, and the like are appropriately displayed on the display device 35 in accordance with the variation display of the special figure. Note that the special figure to be displayed in a variable manner is not limited to the horizontal three columns. For example, a plurality of special figures may be arranged in a vertical and horizontal manner and displayed in a matrix.

  With respect to the variation display game, a plurality of types of variation patterns having different variation times and display contents are prepared in advance in the effect display mode from the start to the determination of the display result. Each variation pattern is set such that the reliability with respect to the determination of the special result mode corresponding to the jackpot is different as the display result of the variation display game. Each variation pattern is set such that display control is performed by the effect control device 53 based on a control command transmitted from the game control device 54 shown in FIG.

  For any variation pattern of the effect display mode, the special figure that has been confirmed to stop as the display result of the variation display game becomes a predetermined specific combination (for example, a state where all the same types as “333” etc. are aligned). The case is defined as “special result mode (atari)”. In addition, before the special result mode is determined, among the combinations of special figures that become the special result mode, the other special charts except for one special map become the special result mode, and the one special map has not yet been determined. This state corresponds to the “reach display mode”.

  When the display result of the variable display game is finally determined to be in the special result mode, a special gaming state in which a special winning opening 29a described later is repeatedly opened and closed a predetermined number of times is set to occur. On the other hand, if the display result of the variable display game is not finally determined as the special result mode, it corresponds to the “out-of-range display result (losing)”, and the special game state does not occur. Note that the special figure used in the variable display game is not limited to simple symbols such as numbers and symbols, and for example, a figure imitating a specific character may be used.

  In addition, the display results of the variable display game are all of the same type in any of the probable symbols (eg, odd symbols “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”). When the special result mode (probability variation jackpot) is confirmed, a special gaming state with a high probability state is generated. In other words, when the special result mode (probability variation jackpot) arranged with probability variation symbols is confirmed, the display result of the variable display game is special until the next special game state occurs after the special game state generated based on this is completed. The jackpot probability determined in the result mode changes to a high probability.

  In this way, the gaming state having a higher probability of winning the jackpot determined in the special result mode is higher than the normal gaming state (low probability state) in a high probability state (also called “probability variation state” or “probability variation mode”). is there. The high probability state may be ended up to a predetermined number of times (so-called ST), and every time the variable display game in the high probability state started after the end of the special gaming state is executed. It may be determined whether the high probability state ends (so-called falling lottery). Further, during the high probability state, a time shortening state (or also referred to as “short time state” or “short time mode”) in which the variation time of the variable display game on the display device 35 is shortened is also generated. Yes. Furthermore, in the time shortening state in the present embodiment, it may be set so that the fluctuation time of the usual figure fluctuation display to be described later is shortened, and the pair of opening / closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 are opened. You may set so that time to become extended.

  On the other hand, the display result of the variable display game is the same type in any of the non-probable symbols (for example, even symbols “0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) among the special graphics. When it is determined to be a special result mode (non-probability variation jackpot), a special gaming state without a high probability state occurs. When the special result mode (non-probability variation jackpot) arranged in the non-probable variation pattern is confirmed here, even after the special gaming state generated based on this is completed, the variation after the next time is limited up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). A time shortening state (or also referred to as “time-short state” or “time-short mode”) in which the variation time of the display game is shortened is also set to occur. As described above, it may be set so that the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation display is shortened, or the time during which the pair of opening / closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 is opened is extended. May be set.

  When a game ball is won at each start winning opening 25, 26 during execution of the variable display game or the occurrence of the special game state, the right to execute the variable display game is acquired as a hold and is currently in progress. After the change display game or the like ends, the held rights are sequentially digested. The number of hold of the variable display game is set to 4 at the maximum, for example, and the actual number of hold is displayed by the collective display device 36 described later so that the player can visually confirm. Note that an upper limit may not be set for the number of reservations.

  Further, the display device 35 is configured to display an image related to a general drawing (ordinary symbol) separately from the special drawing, and the display device 35 corresponds to a general drawing display device. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the general figure starting gate 28, a general figure fluctuation display, which is a fluctuation display of the normal figure, is performed on a part of the display screen of the display device 35, and the display result of the normal figure fluctuation display is displayed. If it corresponds to a predetermined hit mode, a privilege referred to as “per hit” is granted. In other words, when it is normal, the pair of opening / closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 operate until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won from the normal closed state to the open state described above. . Therefore, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the start winning opening, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special variable display game increases.

  If a game ball further passes through the normal symbol start gate 28 during execution of the normal symbol display, the right to acquire the normal symbol display is put on hold, but after the normal symbol display currently in progress is terminated, The reserved rights will be digested in sequence. The number of reserved symbols for normal symbol display is set to a maximum of four, for example, and the actual number of reserved symbols is displayed by the collective display device 36 described below so that the player can visually confirm. The normal symbol display may be displayed by a universal display device provided separately from the display device 35. Note that an upper limit may not be set for the number of reservations.

  The collective display device 36 displays a special figure change display game to be displayed on the display device 35, a special figure or a general figure display that is the basis of the normal figure change display, and displays the number of hold and display of the game state. Is what you do. The collective display device 36 is configured by a plurality of displays using LEDs as light emission sources (for example, a display composed of one small lamp, or a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers as a special figure). What is displayed on the collective display device 36 is called a special figure or a general figure (formal special figure or common figure), whereas a special figure or a common figure is displayed on the display device 35. It can be said that the display is a dummy display for the player.

  Further, the display of the number of reservations in the collective display device 36 is generally displayed by turning on the display every time the start memory is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is three, it is performed by lighting up three indicators (in the case of using a smaller number of indicators, the number of holdings is displayed by combining lighting, extinguishing and blinking). As the display of the number of holds that can be easily recognized by the player, for example, it may be displayed on a part of the display screen of the display device 35 described above, or may be displayed by a plurality of lamps (light emitting units) provided on the game board 20. . The collective display device 36 is directly controlled by a game control device 54 described later.

  In addition, the winning display device 37 (see FIG. 7) notifies the player of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening. In an enclosed ball type gaming machine, when the number of balls held increases continuously, such as when winnings are made continuously at the winning opening, the game balls are not actually paid out as prize balls. It may be unclear whether or not the number is accurately added. Therefore, a winning display device 37 is provided to notify the player of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening as described above. The winning display device 37 may be provided as a part of the configuration of the collective display device 36, or a display device may be provided independently. Furthermore, you may make it provide in the vicinity of a corresponding winning opening.

  The variable winning device 29 is generally called an attacker and includes a large winning port 29a. The large winning port 29a is configured to open and close by a door tilting forward with the lower end as a swing center. The variable winning device 29 is controlled to open and close so as to generate a special game state when the display result of the variable display game is in a special result mode. Here, the special game state is an open state in which the door of the grand prize opening 29a is opened and the game ball is easy to win, and the door is passed by a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10). This is a state in which the closed state in which is closed and difficult to win is repeated up to a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds).

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main components of the back mechanism in the gaming machine 10 include an external information terminal board 51, a card unit connection terminal board 52, an effect control device 53, a game control device 54, a payout control device 80, and a circulation device. 55, polishing device 56, power supply device 58, glass frame opening switch 125, inner frame opening switch 126, and the like. In addition, you may provide the drive source (for example, solenoid etc.) for opening and closing each of the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 electrically.

  The external information terminal board 51 is a board for wiring connection between the gaming machine 10 side and the card unit 200 side, and only transmits information unilaterally from the gaming machine 10 side to the card unit 200 side. There is no input from the side to the gaming machine 10 side. In particular, the external information terminal board 51 is used for outputting game information from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 150 (described later) via the card unit 200.

  The game information includes, for example, a signal that informs the signal input to the game control device 54 to the outside, a jackpot signal that is generated in the course of the game, and the start winning holes 25 and 26 that are conditions for changing the symbols. A start signal for notifying the winning of the symbol, a symbol variation start signal for notifying the number of times the symbol variation has been triggered by the symbol variation start or symbol variation stop as a trigger, and the gaming state being in a state advantageous to the player (for example, There is a privilege status signal indicating a probable change state and a short time state).

  On the other hand, the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is also a board for wiring connection between the gaming machine 10 side and the card unit 200 side, but not only transmits information from the gaming machine 10 to the card unit 200 but also the card unit 200. This is a board for wiring connection that also allows input to the gaming machine 10. That is, it is a board for wiring connection that can transmit information from both the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200.

  The card unit connection terminal plate 52 is connected to wiring from a scaler substrate 320 (shown in FIG. 7), and the card unit 200 is connected to the scaler substrate 320 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52. It is possible to transmit information to and from the operation display device 30 via the. In the present embodiment, the external information terminal board 51 and the card unit connection terminal board 52 are separated from each other. However, they may be configured as a single board.

  For example, only the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is provided, and the card unit connection terminal plate 52 transmits / receives information between the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200, and each manages and stores necessary game information. Such game information is output to the hall computer 150. The game information may be output from the gaming machine to the hall computer 150 (not directly connected but via an information collection terminal device, a call lamp, or the like). In that case, game information is output to the hall computer 150 instead of the card unit 200 by the external information terminal board 51. Further, game information may be output from both the card unit 200 and the gaming machine 10, or the game information to be output may be distributed.

  The effect control device 53 drives and controls the display device 35 and the speakers 16a and 16b based on a control command output from the game control device 54, and a circuit board that realizes this control function is housed in a predetermined case. Has been configured.

  The game control device 54 electrically controls electrical components (electrical objects) such as various switches, solenoids, and lamps (LEDs, lamps, etc. used in the collective display device 36) disposed on the game board 20. At the same time, the control information is sent to other control devices to comprehensively manage and control the progress of the game. A circuit board on which a circuit including a microcomputer for performing these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case. It becomes the composition. On the back side of the game control device 54, a test firing test terminal 115 and an inspection device connection terminal 114 for the inspection device are arranged.

  As will be described in detail later, the payout control device 80 performs necessary control such as ball payout, and a circuit board for realizing this control function is housed in a predetermined case. In particular, the payout control device 80 includes a launch control circuit 86 that controls the launch of a ball, as will be described later. Further, on the back side of the dispensing control device 80, in addition to the test firing test terminal 84 and the inspection device connection terminal 85 for the inspection device, an error display LED 88 that is lit (or flashes) at a predetermined abnormality, and an error for canceling the error A release switch 87 is arranged.

The circulation device 55 is for circulating the game ball sealed inside the gaming machine 10, and a polishing device 56 described later is disposed in the middle of the circulation path.
The power supply device 58 supplies power necessary for each control device and each electronic component of the gaming machine 10.

The glass frame opening switch 125 is a switch that detects that the glass frame 13 is opened (or closed). The inner frame opening switch 126 is a switch that detects that the inner frame 12 is opened (or closed).
Here, the glass frame opening switch 125 and the inner frame opening switch 126 constitute “opening / closing monitoring means” for monitoring the open / closed states of the glass frame 13 and the inner frame 12 which are opening / closing members, respectively.
The glass frame opening switch 125 and the inner frame opening switch 126 may be configured to monitor the open / closed state by one switch.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the circulation device 55.
In FIG. 4, the circulation device 55 is formed in a flat plate structure having a predetermined thickness, and a flow path for circulating an enclosed ball (enclosed game ball) is formed therein. In the circulation device 55, a polishing device 56 is disposed in the middle of the flow path. The flow path in the circulation device 55 constitutes a circulation path for the encapsulated sphere. Note that a gaming ball inlet 71 is opened at the upper right end portion of the circulation device 55 in FIG. 4 as a merging path through which an out ball (including a safe ball) and a foul ball are merged and dropped.

  The polishing device 56 polishes the encapsulated ball while pumping it up, and is disposed inside the game ball that has flowed in from the lower inlet 75 while being pumped by a rotating screw 56a that is driven by the polishing device motor 59 to rotate. The game balls are polished with a polishing cloth and discharged from the upper outlet 76. The lower inlet 75 is provided with a lifting switch (lower) 75a for detecting game balls flowing in from the lower inlet 75, and the upper outlet 76 has a lifting switch (for detecting game balls discharged from the upper outlet 76). Upper) 76a is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the circulation device 55 causes an out ball (including a safe ball) and a foul ball to flow from the game ball inlet 71 and move the game ball downward by gravity, and thus from the game ball inlet 71. The game balls that have flowed down flow down the polishing feed flow path 72 and then flow into a lower inlet 75 provided on the lower right side of the polishing apparatus 56. The polishing feed flow path 72 has a meandering shape to reduce the momentum of the game ball flowing down.

  The game ball that has flowed into the lower inlet 75 of the polishing apparatus 56 is polished while being pumped by the polishing apparatus 56 and discharged from an upper outlet 76 provided on the upper left side of the polishing apparatus 56. Next, the game balls discharged from the upper outlet 76 of the polishing apparatus 56 are, by their own weight, the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 (enclosed ball detection 1SW in FIG. 7) and the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 (enclosed ball in FIG. 7). After passing through the sensor flow path 77 in which the detection 2SW) is disposed, the ball feed apparatus 79 (shown in FIG. 4) for launching a game ball is passed through a ball feed flow path 78 provided subsequent to the sensor flow path 77. To the device provided on the left end side).

  Here, the first encapsulated ball detection switch 164 is provided so as to detect a game ball at a position lower than the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 on the relatively downstream side of the sensor flow path 77. On the other hand, the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 165 is positioned higher than the first encapsulated sphere detection switch 164 on the relatively upstream side of the sensor flow channel 77 (upstream side of the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164). It is provided to detect game balls.

  The first enclosed ball detection switch 164 is a sensor that detects the lower limit of the number of balls enclosed as a game ball, and the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 detects the upper limit of the number of balls enclosed as a game ball. It is a sensor. This is because the enclosing balls need to be encapsulated in the gaming machine 10 without excess or deficiency, and the current number of encapsulating balls is checked to be at least the minimum and below the maximum, respectively. It is provided to confirm that there are encapsulated balls.

  The ball feeding device 79 uses the ball feeding solenoid 172 shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 7 as a drive source, and game balls flowing down the ball feeding flow path 78 one by one to the firing position of the launching device 60 (shown in FIG. 3). It is a sending device. The game ball sent to the launch position can be launched toward the game area 22 by the power of a launch solenoid 173, which will be described later, of the launch device 60. The ball feeder 79 is provided with a launch ball detection switch 161. The shot ball detection switch 161 is a sensor that detects the game balls to be shot one by one.

Next, a game ball that is a game medium used in the gaming machine 10 will be described.
The game ball of the present embodiment is a sphere made of a nonmagnetic material in order to prevent fraud due to magnets. Here, the nonmagnetic material may be stainless steel, aluminum, ceramic, or the like, but a nonmagnetic metal material such as stainless steel is suitable as a material that can be detected by a proximity switch for detecting a winning that will be described later. In particular, stainless steel is excellent in wear resistance and corrosion resistance.

  Conventional game balls are generally made of steel, but in a game ball made of a magnetic material such as steel, a magnet that illegally wins by guiding the flow of game balls launched into the game area 22 by a magnet. There was a risk of fraud. Therefore, by constituting the game ball with a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent improper magnets. Therefore, in this embodiment, a radio wave sensor 134 (shown in FIG. 7) and the like for monitoring a fraudulent act to be described later is provided, but a magnetic sensor for particularly monitoring the magnet fraud is not provided.

  However, there is a possibility that a game ball made of a non-magnetic material is replaced with a game ball made of a magnetic material by opening the glass frame 13 or the like. Therefore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, regarding the gaming machine 10 in which the glass frame 13 or the like is opened, if there is no visible fraud, it is assumed that the magnetic fraud may have been performed. A fraud check process (shown in FIG. 60) is performed in which the machine 10 is set as a monitored game machine and is monitored with priority.

  Further, the surface of the game ball made of a non-magnetic material may be covered with a thin film of another material. Here, the other material is a non-magnetic material similar to a game ball, and a material having high hardness and excellent lubricity, wear resistance and slipperiness is suitable. For example, diamond-like carbon, titanium nitride, nitride The surface of the game ball may be covered with a thin film of aluminum titanium. In this way, by covering the surface of the game ball with a thin film of another material, even if the game ball is repeatedly used in an enclosed game machine, the surface of the game ball is prevented from being deteriorated and dirt is prevented as much as possible. be able to.

Next, the card unit 200 attached to the gaming machine 10 will be described.
Here, the card unit 200 corresponds to a “terminal” that is installed corresponding to each gaming machine 10 and can communicate with the corresponding gaming machine 10.
As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the card unit 200 has a game card (game value storage medium) inserted into the card slot 201, and the player operates the ball lending button 212, which will be described later. A predetermined amount of ball lending (increase in the number of balls held) can be performed within the range of the valuable value recorded in (1). It should be noted that the operation such as ball lending may be performed in the operation display device 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 or the display input device 203 described later. In addition to ball rental, it may be in a mode in which operations such as breaks and drinks can be ordered.

  In addition, a cash slot 202, a display input device 203, a notification lamp 204, an IR light emitting unit 205, and various operation buttons (a replay button 211, a ball rental button 212, a return button 213) are provided on the front surface of the card unit 200. It has been. The cash input port 202 is capable of inputting cash. By inserting a predetermined banknote (for example, 1000 yen, 5000 yen, or 10,000 yen), the cash slot 202 falls within the range of the ball lending degree corresponding to the amount of the inserted banknote. This makes it possible to rent game balls (ie, lend a ball; increase the number of balls held). The banknote inserted into the cash slot 202 is taken into an internal banknote discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and type are identified.

  As game cards that can be used in the card unit 200, in addition to prepaid cards (hereinafter referred to as visitor cards) that can be used by non-member general players, it is also possible to use a unique membership card called a house card. Yes, in that case, a membership card as a game card is inserted into the card slot 201. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card slot 201 is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read. In the present embodiment, when a member card is inserted, the storage can be used on condition that the password of the member is input by the display input device 203.

The notification lamp 204 notifies an error that has occurred in the card unit 200.
The IR light emitting unit 205 is a unit for performing infrared communication, has a function of receiving infrared signals, converting them into electronic signals and outputting them, and a remote controller 160 (shown in FIG. 102) used by a game shop employee. And an infrared interface unit used for wireless communication of the card unit 200.

  The replay button 211 is an operation button for executing a replay game using the number of stored balls or the like. When the replay button 211 is operated and the number of possessed balls is recorded on the inserted game card, a part or all of the retained balls is converted into the number of game possessed balls, and the gaming machine 10 When the inserted card is a membership card and the number of stored balls is recorded in the hall computer 150 or the like, a part or all of the stored number of balls can be played. The game can be played by the gaming machine 10 by converting it into a number. Note that the number of stored balls may be converted into the number of game balls once converted into the number of balls held.

  Here, “stored ball” is a game value (for example, the number of game balls) deposited in a game store so that it can be used at a later date, and is generally managed by a hall computer 150 or the like installed in the game store. The On the other hand, the “held ball” is a game value (for example, the number of game balls) possessed by the player at the game store, and is a game value that has not been entrusted to the game store yet. In general, the number of game balls acquired by the player on the day at the game store is referred to as the `` number of possessed balls '', and the number of game balls acquired by the player before the previous day and stored in the game store is `` Say "Number of stored balls".

  The number of balls may be managed by a ball management device (not shown) for managing the number of balls set in the game store. In this embodiment, the stored data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but stored in the management device such as the hall computer 150 in association with the card ID, so that the corresponding number of stored balls can be read based on the card ID. It is configured. On the other hand, the number of possessed balls is directly recorded on the game card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the management device in association with the card ID.

The ball lending button 212 is a button for performing an operation to withdraw the balance recorded on the inserted game card and use it in a game by the gaming machine 10.
The return button 213 is operated when the player ends the game, and is an operation button for causing the inserted game card to record the number of game balls determined at the end of the game as the number of possessed balls and eject it. is there. That is, the return button 213 also functions as a settlement button for ending the game and performing settlement. However, when the return button 213 is operated in a state before the game is started, the game is simply returned.

Buttons having the same functions as the operation buttons (replay button 211, ball lending button 212, return button 213) can be displayed on the screen of the display input device 203, for example, and the same operation can be realized by a touch operation. It may be configured.
The lower part of the card unit 200 is configured as a lower unit 214 combined as a separate body, and a lower control device 215 described later is mounted inside the lower unit 214.

  On the other hand, referring back to FIG. 3, an external information terminal board 216 and a gaming machine connection terminal board 217 are provided on the back surface of the card unit 200. The external information terminal board 216 is a terminal board for connecting the card unit 200 to the hall computer 150 as an external management device. The gaming machine connection terminal plate 217 is a terminal plate for connection to the gaming machine 10 corresponding to the card unit 200.

  Note that the card unit 200 may be provided with a break button for temporarily interrupting the game and taking a break. Further, the card unit 200 is capable of operations such as ball lending, return (settlement), and break (permission). For example, display may be performed by the display input device 203, or a display unit (such as an LED lamp) for such notification may be provided individually.

  Further, for example, the operation display device 30 on the gaming machine 10 side may be provided with operation buttons for settlement and breaks, so that the player can perform settlement and break operations also on the gaming machine 10 side. In order to interrupt and take a break, the IR light emitting unit 205 receives an interruption signal based on the operation of the remote controller 160 (shown in FIG. 102) by an amusement shop employee, and performs processing for setting the gaming machine to an interruption state. You may make it.

  Returning to FIG. 5, as shown in FIG. 5B, the card unit 200 is usually a card unit 200 that is actually installed for each gaming machine 10 in a game store, as well as a spare card unit 200. Several are available. The spare card unit 200 is stored in the unit stocker 230 which is a “storage device”, and is replaced when the card unit 200 in operation fails. In the unit stocker 230, each card unit 200 is stored in each installation location in a state where it can be individually identified, and it is set in advance to which storage location in the unit stocker 230 is stored. Being managed.

  Since the unit stocker 230 communicates the information related to the stored spare card unit 200 (including individual identification information and storage location data) with the hall computer 150, the usage information (sales information, etc.) before the replacement is stored. Managed continuously without interruption. The unit stocker 230 displays a checker for simply diagnosing the cause of the failure of the card unit 200 that has been replaced, and the status of each spare card unit 200 stored in the unit stocker 230. A device or the like is provided.

Next, an overall outline of the gaming system 1 including the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200 of this embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 6, the gaming system 1 is constructed so as to include an in-store network in a plurality of gaming stores A and B. Each gaming store A and B includes a plurality of gaming machines 10 and a card unit 200. In addition, a hall computer 150 or the like which is a “management device” for managing these is installed.

  The hall computers 150 installed in the game stores A and B are respectively connected to an external gaming machine manufacturer 91, a card unit manufacturer 92, a card company 93, a chip manufacturer 94, a gaming machine information management company 95, and a gaming system information management company 96. An installed management server (not shown) is communicably connected to each other via a telephone line (for example, a digital line such as ISDN) or a communication line 90 such as the Internet.

  Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a gaming machine manufacturer 91, a card unit manufacturer 92, a card company 93, a chip manufacturer 94, a gaming machine information management company 95, and a gaming system information management company 96, a management server (not shown) installed in each of them. ) May also be indicated. Further, all or a part of the functions as the management server in the hall computer 150 may be shared by the management servers of the gaming machine information management company 95 and the gaming system information management company 96. The communication line 90 may be configured as a dedicated line for improving security.

  Although FIG. 6 shows an example in which there are two game stores A and B, the system may be constructed to include only one game store or three or more game stores. Further, although only two sets of gaming machines 10 and card units 200 are shown for each of the game stores A and B, in practice, a large number of sets are generally installed. Further, the system configuration is not limited to this mode. For example, there may be a mode in which a card management device and a ball management device are installed in each of the game stores A and B.

  In the game stores A and B, the gaming machines 10 are connected to the corresponding card units 200 via a card unit connection terminal plate 52 (shown in FIG. 7) described later. Are configured to periodically receive the number of balls held, various game information, and frame opening information described later, from the respective gaming machines 10. The card unit 200 is connected to the hall computer 150 via a communication line 90a constructed in the game stores A and B, and various game information collected from each gaming machine 10 is sent to the hall via the communication line 90a. It is configured to transmit to the computer 150.

  Here, the gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 54 and a payout control device 80 as will be described later. The game control device 54 mainly manages a game such as a special figure, and the payout control device 80 mainly manages the enclosed balls and the number of balls held. These are manufactured as chip-like integrated circuits. On the other hand, the card unit 200 includes a main control device 221 and a communication control device 222 as a control system. The main control device 221 mainly performs control related to ball lending, and the communication control device 222 performs control related to communication with the gaming machine 10 and the like. These are also manufactured as chip-like integrated circuits.

The hall computer 150 is usually installed in the management room of the game stores A and B, collects various data from each gaming machine 10 via each card unit 200, and externally via the communication line 90. It is connected to a management server such as a gaming machine maker 91, collects necessary data from the outside, organizes data corresponding to various gaming states, and performs business management of the gaming stores A and B.
Although different from the embodiment, various game information transmitted to the hall computer 150 via the card unit 200 may be directly transmitted from each gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 150.

  Thus, the hall computer 150 is a device that can communicate with each card unit 200 and is installed in the game stores A and B to manage various information of the game stores A and B. The hall computer 150 manages the correspondence relationship between the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200 installed corresponding to the gaming machine 10, and based on the information related to the correspondence relationship transmitted from the card unit 200, It is configured to determine whether or not the correspondence relationship between the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200 is valid and to transmit the determination result to the card unit 200.

The gaming machine manufacturer 91 is a manufacturer that manufactures the gaming machine 10. The management server installed in this gaming machine manufacturer 91 has a function of outputting predetermined information regarding the gaming machine 10.
The card unit manufacturer 92 is a manufacturer that manufactures the card unit 200. The management server installed in the card unit manufacturer 92 has a function of outputting predetermined information regarding the card unit 200.

The card company 93 is a manufacturer that manufactures the aforementioned game cards. The management server installed in the card company 93 has a function of outputting predetermined information related to the game card.
The chip manufacturer 94 is a manufacturer that manufactures various control boards (IC chips) to be mounted on the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200. The management server installed in the chip manufacturer 94 has a function of transmitting predetermined information about various control boards, writing, and the like.

  The gaming machine information management company 95 is installed outside the gaming stores A and B and is operated by an organization established by the gaming machine manufacturer 91, for example, shipping, setting, moving, discarding, etc. of the gaming machine 10 It is a “third party organization” responsible for monitoring The management server installed in this gaming machine information management company 95 is connected to the gaming system information management company 96 described below, and transmits the encrypted machine base information to the gaming system information management company 96 and after transmission. Receives the encrypted authentication result information and installation information of the gaming machine 10 from the gaming system information management company 96.

  The gaming system information management company 96 is a “third party organization” installed outside the gaming stores A and B and operated by, for example, the card unit manufacturer 92. The management server installed in the gaming system information management company 96 has a function of receiving installation information of a plurality of gaming machines 10 installed in the gaming stores A and B and confirming the authentication thereof. Management and distribution of authentication keys to encrypt the information.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine 10 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch, and “SOL” means a solenoid. Also, in the drawings, when the name of a member is long, it is difficult to show the name, and therefore it may be written (illustrated) with an appropriately short name.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 54, an effect control device 53, a power supply device 58, and a payout control device 80 as main components of the control system. Necessary power is supplied from the power supply 58 to each of these devices and each electronic component shown in FIG.

  First, the configuration of the game control device 54 of the gaming machine 10 and the devices connected to the game control device 54 will be described. The game control device 54 is a main control device (main board) for managing games such as special drawings, and includes a CPU 111, a ROM 112, a RAM 113, a test firing test terminal 115 for an inspection device, and an inspection device connection terminal 114. Yes.

  The CPU 111 executes a game program for managing a game such as a special figure and performs arithmetic processing necessary for game control. The ROM 112 stores a game program, and the RAM 113 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the game program. Note that the RAM 113 is supplied with a backup power supply that supplies power even when a power failure occurs (not shown, for example, consisting of a large-capacitance capacitor), and even if there is a power failure, the necessary power continues to be supplied. The data in the RAM 113 is configured to be held for a predetermined time (a predetermined number of days), so that the game control can be performed from the state when the power failure occurs even when the power failure is restored.

The test firing test terminal 115 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the CPU 111 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 115 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted in the game control device 54 used in the game store.
The inspection device connection terminal 114 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the gaming machine 10 is connected after the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming store.

The game control device 54 receives detection signals from the radio wave sensor 134 and the vibration sensor 135.
The radio wave sensor 134 is a sensor for monitoring radio fraud, and the vibration sensor 135 is a sensor for monitoring vibration fraud. Since each sensor here has a general configuration, detailed description is omitted.

The game control device 54 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1SW in FIG. 7), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2SW in FIG. 7), a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, and a count switch 124. The detection signal is input.
The first start port switch 120 is a sensor for detecting winning balls one by one for detecting the game balls won in the first start winning port 25, and the second start port switch 121 is the second start winning port 26. This is a sensor for detecting a winning ball, which detects one game ball at a time.

The gate switch 122 is a sensor that detects the game balls passing through the usual start gate 28 one by one.
The winning port switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general winning ports 27a to 27d. When there are n general winning ports, n is provided as a whole, one for each. Instead of providing one sensor for each of the general winning ports 27a to 27d, one sensor may be provided for the plurality of general winning ports 27a to 27d as a whole.

The count switch 124 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball that has won a prize winning opening 29 a of the variable prize winning device 29.
The sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, and 124 for detecting these game balls are proximity switches in this embodiment, and output a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. The circuit is configured.

  In addition, when there is a winning at the winning opening, the game control device 54 sends a winning ball number command corresponding to the winning to the payout control device 80. The payout control device 80 performs a process of adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the number of held balls based on the winning ball number command corresponding to the winning sent from the game control device 54. Information regarding the number of winning balls is also output to the card unit 200 at a predetermined timing, and is output from the card unit 200 to the hall computer 150 for management.

Here, winning a prize opening means all winning a prize outlets with a winning ball discharge (a process of actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). , 26, a large winning opening 29a of the variable winning apparatus 29, and general winning openings 27a to 27d.
In the game control device 54, the number of prize balls associated with winning a prize is set as follows, for example.
Grand prize opening 29a = 13 pieces. First start winning opening 25 = 3. 2nd start prize opening 26 (Fuden) = 1. General winning ports 27a-27d = 10. Note that the number of winning balls associated with each winning is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  In addition, in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, when the number of held balls continuously increases, such as when winning a prize at the winning opening continuously, the gaming balls are not actually paid out as winning balls. It may be unclear whether the number of balls has been accurately added. Therefore, a winning display device 37 is provided to notify the player of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening as described above. The winning display device 37 may be provided as a part of the configuration of the collective display device, or may be provided with a display alone. Furthermore, you may make it provide in the vicinity of a corresponding winning opening. If the player can understand the correspondence between the winning mouth and the number of winning balls, and can display (notify) so that it can be recognized that the number of winning balls is added to the number of balls held It ’s good.

  Furthermore, the game control device 54 is connected to the general-purpose solenoid 131, the big prize opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 36 in addition to the effect control device 53 as necessary devices for the progress and effect of the game. When game information is output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 150 as described above, the game control device 54 is also connected to the external information terminal board 51 and is controlled by the game control device 54. It is configured to output predetermined game information (for example, information related to jackpots, information related to symbol variation, etc.) to the external information terminal board 51.

The general electric solenoid 131 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 26 a of the second start winning opening 26, and the large winning opening solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member 29 a of the variable winning device 29. The game control device 54 outputs necessary control signals to the ordinary electric solenoid 131, the special prize opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 36, respectively.
In addition, data (for example, an effect control command) is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by parallel communication (or serial communication).

  Next, the configuration of the effect control device 53 and devices connected to the effect control device 53 will be described. The effect control device 53 includes a main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that performs video control exclusively under the control of the main control microcomputer, and a VDP as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 35. And a sound source LSI that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, etc., but a detailed configuration is omitted.

  The effect control device 53 analyzes the effect control command from the CPU 111 of the game control device 54, determines the contents of the effect, controls the content of the output video of the display device 35, and instructs the sound source LSI of the reproduced sound. The speakers 16a and 16b are driven to produce sound effects, etc., and the process such as the drive control of the decoration lamp 14 and the moving light 15 (corresponding to the decoration display LED 141 in FIG. 7) is executed. The contents of the effect are determined according to the signal from the switch 32 (see FIG. 1) and the effect is controlled.

  The effect control device 53 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 30 via the scaler substrate 320. The effect control device 53 receives information about the effect screen from the scaler substrate 320. The operation display device 30 transmits operation information of various buttons arranged on the screen to the effect control device 53 via the scaler substrate 320. Here, the effect control device 53 determines the effect contents of the display device 35 based on operation information of various effect buttons received from the operation display device 30 via the scaler substrate 320 and controls the effect.

  In this embodiment, the production control device 53 transmits and receives information (input / output of signals and the like) to and from the operation display device 30 via the scaler board 320. A display switching circuit capable of switching between a display process based on a signal input via the card unit connection terminal board 52 and a display process based on a signal input from the effect control device 54 when it is disabled. It may be provided to display any information.

  Next, the configuration of the payout control device 80 and devices connected to the payout control device 80 will be described. The payout control device 80 manages the number of encapsulated balls and the number of balls held (payout control board), and includes a CPU 81, a ROM 82, a RAM 83, an inspection device connection terminal 84 for an inspection device, a test firing test terminal 85, A launch control circuit 86, an error release switch (error release SW) 87, and an error display LED 88 are provided.

  The payout control device 80 performs control for paying out a prize ball in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 54 (the payout of the prize ball is added to the number of balls held). On the other hand, the payout control device 80 can transmit frame opening information (information indicating whether the glass frame opening switch 125 or the inner frame opening switch 126 has detected opening) to the card unit 200. As described above, the glass frame opening switch 125 and the inner frame opening switch 126 each constitute “opening / closing monitoring means”, but only one of them (for example, only the inner frame opening switch 126) is set as “opening / closing monitoring means”. It is also good.

  The CPU 81 executes a predetermined program to perform calculation processing necessary for enclosing ball control, game ball payout (prize ball payout or ball payout) and management of the number of balls held. The ROM 82 stores the program, and the RAM 83 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the program.

  Here, the RAM 83 stores the number of balls that are the game value. Specifically, the RAM 83 stores the change in the player's game value. For this, subtracting the fired ball and adding the number of prize balls is repeated. The number of balls held by the player is updated and stored in real time. Since the subtraction of the fired balls and the addition of the number of prize balls are performed by processing based on the program, the RAM 83 stores real-time changes in the number of balls held.

  In addition, the RAM 83 is supplied with a backup power supply that supplies power even when a power failure occurs (not shown, for example, a capacitor having a large capacity), so that even if there is a power failure, the necessary power continues to be supplied. The data in the RAM 83 is configured to be held for a predetermined time (a predetermined number of days), so that the game control can be performed from the state when the power failure occurs even when the power failure is restored.

  In addition, the payout control device 80 performs processing from launching and collection of the encapsulated ball mainly as control necessary for the encapsulated ball game, and the number of balls held according to the award ball number command from the game control device 54. An addition process, a ball lending control (ball lending addition process), a counting process of the number of balls, and the like are also performed, and the update result is displayed on the operation display device 30.

  The payout control device 80 receives a winning ball number command corresponding to the winning prize from the game control device 54 when there is a winning at the winning opening, so that the payout control device 80 responds to winning based on the winning ball number command. The number of winning balls to be added is added to the number of balls held. For example, when the player's number of balls held (game value) changes continuously, the memory of the number of balls held in the RAM 83 is immediately updated. When the operation display device 30 displays the number of balls held by the player, the number of balls held is controlled to be updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). Specifically, the RAM 83 as an internal memory stores a change in the number of balls held by the player, and this is repeated by subtracting the fired balls, adding the number of prize balls, and adding the foul balls. It will be updated and stored in real time how much the number of balls the person will have.

The test firing test terminal 85 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information in the control of the enclosed ball and the game ball payout control obtained from the CPU 81 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 85 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted on the payout control device 80 used in the amusement store.
The inspection device connection terminal 84 includes, for example, a photocoupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information related to payout obtained from the CPU 81 to the inspection device is connected.

  The launch control circuit 86 is built in the payout control device 80, and is supplied with necessary power from the payout control device 80 and receives a fire permission signal. The launch control circuit 86 is a launch solenoid that launches the game ball at the launch position in accordance with the operation of the launch volume 171 (that is, the rotation operation of the launch handle 18) on the condition that the on-data of the launch permission signal has been received. 173 is controlled. The firing drive source may be constituted by a motor instead of the solenoid. In that case, an origin sensor for detecting the rotational position of the motor is attached.

  In addition, the payout control device 80 receives signals from the touch sensor 174 and the firing stop switch 175. Here, the touch sensor 174 detects whether or not the player is touching the launch handle 18 that operates the launch volume 171, and the launch stop switch 175 temporarily stops the launch of the game ball. Therefore, it is operated by the player. Note that the ball feed solenoid 172 that sends the game ball to the launch position is directly controlled by the payout control device 80. For the control process, a signal from the touch sensor 174 is input to the payout control device 80.

  A device that includes the firing solenoid 173 and launches a game ball at a launch position (not shown) to the game area 22 is referred to as a launch device 60 (shown in FIG. 3). This launching device 60 is controlled by a payout control device 80 including a firing control circuit 86, and a state where launching of a game ball is permitted by a control process of these control devices (a state where on data of a launch permission signal is set) ) Can only launch game balls.

  In this embodiment, the launch position is set to the lower right side toward the gaming machine 10, that is, near the launch handle 18. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper left side toward the gaming machine 10 is set as the launch position. May be. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the generation of a foul ball (a game ball that has returned to a weak launching force and has been fired), and furthermore, a complicated number addition / subtraction process based on the generation of a foul ball from the launch ( Even though the number of held balls is set to -1 by firing, it is no longer necessary to perform a process of immediately adding +1 to the number of held balls by fouling.

  In a state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited (a state where the off data of the launch permission signal is set), for example, there is a game ball at the launch position, and the game ball is not fired even if the player operates the launch handle 18. . In addition, the launching device 60 has a member called a spear for hitting a game ball in order to launch, and the launch position is at the tip of the spear (tip). Since the number of game balls fired by operating the firing handle 18 is regulated to be 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, the payout control device 80 and the launch control circuit 86 control the ball feed solenoid 172, It is set to be within a range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one ball fired in 0.6 seconds (s)).

The error cancel switch (error cancel SW) 87 outputs a signal for canceling the error when operated when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.
The error display LED 88 lights a specific number according to the content of the error when there is an error in the payout control process.

  The payout control device 80 receives detection signals from the counting switch 311 and the break switch 312, and outputs necessary control signals to the operation display device 30, the counting switch LED 313, and the break switch valid display LED 314. . For example, a control signal is output to the operation display device 30 to display the number of balls held. For the count switch LED 313 and the break switch effective display LED 314, when a condition for lighting each LED is satisfied, a drive signal capable of lighting each LED is output.

  The payout control device 80 is connected to the card unit 200 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and can transmit bidirectional information to and from the card unit 200 (details will be described later). The card unit connection terminal plate 52 is connected to the scaler board 320, and the card unit 200 communicates with the operation display device 30 via the scaler board 320 and includes various information and signals including information from the payout control device 80. Etc. are possible.

Accordingly, the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is mainly used for input / output of information, signals, and the like between the card unit 200 and the gaming machine 10 side and between the card unit 200 and the operation display device 30 side. On the other hand, the payout control device 80 is connected to the card unit 200 via the external information terminal board 51, and game information can be transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200.
The card unit 200 is connected to the hall computer 150. Therefore, the external information terminal board 51 is mainly used for transmitting game information to the hall computer 150 from the gaming machine 10 side via the card unit 200.

  From the payout control device 80, various game information from the game control device 54 and various information in the control of the enclosed ball and the payout control of the game ball are output to the card unit 200 via the external information terminal board 51. At the same time, various information in the control of the enclosed ball and the payout control of the game ball in the payout control device 80, information on the number of balls held (game value information), and the like are output from the card unit 200 to the hall computer 150. Is output.

  Next, the payout control device 80 includes a polishing device motor 59, a ball removal motor 136, a ball removal motor origin sensor 137, a ball removal switch 138 ( In FIG. 7, it is connected to the ball removal SW) and the card unit connection terminal plate 52.

  Here, the transmission of information will be described. As described above, the payout control device 80 is connected to the card unit 200 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and the payout control device 80 and the card unit 200 are enclosed. Various information in the ball game (for example, various information including the number of possessed balls and the updated number of possessed balls), input information from the outside to the card unit 200 (for example, by the operation of the remote controller 160 such as a ball lending signal, a replay signal, and interruption) Signal, etc.) are transmitted and received at a predetermined interval (for example, 200 ms). In the card unit 200, control of the operation display device 30 is managed based on various information from the payout control device 80, and control for displaying the number of balls held (game value) of the player on the panel screen 31 can be performed. It is possible.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the payout control device 80 and the card unit 200 allow the various game information from the game control device 54 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various numbers including the number of possessed balls and the number of updated possessed balls). Information), input information from the outside to the card unit (for example, a ball rental signal, a replay signal, a signal by an operation of the remote controller 160 such as interruption, etc.) is transmitted and received at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). However, when there is a request from the card unit 200, necessary information may be transmitted from the payout control device 80. Further, the various information may be transmitted from the game control device 54 to the card unit 200 instead of from the payout control device 80. In this case, the game control device 54 and the external information terminal board 51 are connected, and various information is transmitted to the card unit 200 via the external information terminal board 51.

  In addition, as a signal from various switches necessary for the enclosed ball control, the payout control device 80 includes a firing ball detection switch 161, a foul ball detection switch 162, an out ball detection switch 163, and a first enclosed ball detection switch 164 ( In FIG. 7, detection signals from the enclosed sphere detection 1SW) and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 (in FIG. 7, the enclosed sphere detection 2SW) are input.

  The shot ball detection switch 161 is a sensor that detects one ball at a time, which is shot into the game area 22 by operating a shot volume 171 (details will be described later). The foul ball detection switch 162 is a sensor that detects each ball that has been fired but does not reach the game area 22 and has become a foul. The out ball detection switch 163 is a sensor that detects the balls collected from the game area 22 (including both out balls and safe balls) one by one. As described above, the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 are arranged in the sensor flow path 77 of the circulation device 55 (see FIG. 4), and are for checking the number of enclosed spheres. .

  The payout control device 80 receives the detection signals from the respective switches 161 to 165, monitors the behavior of the sphere from launching to collection of the encapsulated sphere, checks for the presence or absence of a foul sphere, and checks the maximum and minimum encapsulated sphere numbers. In addition to the above processing, control is performed such as processing to add to the number of balls held based on the ball lending information (the number of balls lent / the number of balls used) sent from the card unit 200.

In addition, the payout control device 80 outputs a signal in the case of a predetermined abnormality with respect to the error display LED 88, and a number corresponding to the abnormality is turned on (or flashes) on the error display LED 88 according to the error.
Further, a control signal is appropriately outputted from the payout control device 80 to the polishing device motor 59. Upon receiving this control signal, the polishing device motor 59 polishes the enclosing ball enclosed in the gaming machine 10. 56 (actuate forward or backward).

  Further, a glass frame opening switch 125 (glass frame opening SW in FIG. 7) and an inner frame opening switch 126 (inner frame opening SW (night monitoring means in FIG. 7)) are connected to the dispensing control device 80. As described above, the glass frame opening switch 125 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 13 is opened, and the inner frame opening switch 126 is a sensor that detects that the inner frame 12 is opened. .

  Each of these sensors is configured to hold the respective frame opening information even when the gaming machine 10 is powered off. Here, the frame opening information corresponds to the “monitoring result” by the opening / closing monitoring means such as the glass frame opening switch 125 or the inner frame opening switch 126, and the dispensing control device 80 can transmit the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means to the outside. This corresponds to “monitoring result transmission means”.

  In addition, there are amusement stores that do not turn off the power of the gaming machine even when the store is closed for crime prevention, but even in such a case, the hall computer 150 is turned off. It ’s gone. Therefore, for example, frame opening detection is stored when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the customer waiting state, and the frame opening detection information stored and held when the hall computer 150 is turned on, that is, when communication is started. (Regardless of whether the frame is opened or not) may be output to the payout control device 80.

  Further, the glass frame opening switch 125 and the inner frame opening switch 126 are supplied with backup power from the power supply device 58 via the payout control device 80. As this backup power supply, for example, as in the RAM 83 described above, backup power supply means (not shown, for example comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure is used, and the gaming machine 10 is turned off at night. Even in the case of power failure (or during a power failure), the backup power supply means continues to supply necessary power. As a result, when the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 is opened at night when the game store is closed, information (for example, opening ON data) that detects that the inner frame 12 is opened is displayed at night. Can also be retained.

  Then, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on the next morning, the frame opening information (regardless of whether the frame is opened or not) held by the inner frame opening switch 126 is input to the payout control device 80 and stored in the RAM 83. It is stored and transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. A similar configuration may be adopted for the glass frame opening switch 125. By doing this, it is possible to identify the gaming machine 10 that has been opened at night, that is, that may have been cheating, the game is started while cheating, and the game store It is possible to prevent damage and a difference in profit between players.

  Next, the power supply device 58 generates DC voltages such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V from the AC power supply. The game control device 54, the effect control device 53, the payout control device 80, and the electronic components shown in FIG. In addition to supplying necessary power, a power switch 181 and a RAM clear switch 182 are provided. Here, the power supplied from the power supply device 58 in the gaming machine 10 at normal times (when power is supplied to the gaming machine 10) is referred to as a main power supply. The main power supply is the power supply of the gaming machine 10 including the game control device 54. It refers to the power supplied to each device, electronic equipment, sensor, etc.

  In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 58 is supplied to the RAM 113 and the inner frame opening switch 126 of the game control device 54 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is cut off (that is, when the main power supply is cut off). A backup power supply means is provided. As described above, this backup power source is composed of a large capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. This backup power source includes the RAM 113 of the game control device 54, the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80, etc. Data supplied to the opening switch 126 is stored in the RAM 113, RAM 83, etc. (including the inner frame opening switch 126) even during a power failure or after the power is cut off.

Next, control in the card unit 200 of the present embodiment will be described.
At the start of the game, when the player inserts a banknote of, for example, 1000 yen into the cash slot 202 of the card unit 200, the ball lending number corresponding to the amount of the inserted banknote is displayed on the operation display device 30. When the player presses the ball lending button 212, ball lending addition processing is performed within the range of the displayed ball lending number, and the number of balls increased as a result of this ball lending addition processing is displayed on the operation display device 30 (display input). The device 203 may also be displayed.

  Here, for example, when the ball lending button 212 is pressed once, the ball lending is performed five times, the number of balls held is increased by 125, for example, and the number of balls held displayed on the operation display device 30 is also increased by 125. In this case, the operation information indicating that the ball lending button 212 has been pressed is configured to issue a ball lending instruction (instruction to add to the number of balls) from the card unit 200 to the gaming machine (that is, the payout control device 80). Various operation buttons (replay button 211, ball rental button 212, return button 213) of the card unit 200 may be configured to be displayed as touch panel switches on the panel screen 31 of the operation display device 30. .

  On the other hand, if the player wishes to lend a ball within the frequency range of a game card (including a prepaid card (eg, a visitor card)), the player inserts the game card into the card slot 201 of the card unit 200. The number of ball lending remaining on the game card is displayed on the operation display device 30 (or the display input device 203). Next, when the player operates the ball lending button 212, a predetermined number of ball lending (increase in the number of balls held) is performed within the range of valuable value information (ball lending number) recorded on the game card, The number of balls lending is displayed on the operation display device 30. In this case, not only the pure ball lending number is displayed, but the total ball number is displayed in a form in which the ball lending number is added to the previous number of balls held. Therefore, if the previous number of balls held = 0, only the number of balls lending is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the player desires to use the stored balls within the range of the number of stored balls recorded on the game card, the player inserts the game card into the card slot 201 of the card unit 200, and the display input device 203 When the member's personal identification number is entered on the screen, the number of stored balls remaining in the game card is displayed on the operation display device 30. Next, by operating the replay button 211, within a range of the number of stored balls recorded in the game card, a predetermined number of stored balls are used (increasing the number of held balls), and the number of stored balls is displayed. Displayed on the device 30. In this case, the total number of balls is displayed in a form in which the number of used balls from the stored balls is added to the previous number of balls held.

In the case of the end of the game, by operating the counting switch 311, the gaming card in which the number of balls possessed (here, the number of counting balls) is discharged from the card unit 200. The player holds the ejected game card and inserts it into a card settlement machine (not shown) installed in the game store, so that the card is settled by this card settlement machine. For example, a prize exchange receipt is discharged. Can be exchanged for prizes at the hall counter.
In addition, when the break switch 312 is pressed, the game card is ejected, and the gaming machine becomes in a state where the game cannot be performed. The break switch valid display LED 314 is lit when a break is possible.

Next, an outline of the game in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
The gaming machine 10 is in a customer waiting state (during demonstration) at the beginning of the game (or before the game starts), and a command for instructing display of the customer waiting screen is sent from the game control device 54 to the effect control device. 53, and a waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed on the display unit of the display device 35.

  Then, when a player inserts a game card or banknote to lend a ball and operates the launch handle 18 in a state where the number of possessed balls is present, the game ball at the launch position enters the game area 22 via the guide rail 21. Be driven in. The game ball that falls in the game area 22 becomes out or safe, passes through the game area 22, flows into the game ball inlet 71 of the circulation device 55, is collected and circulated by the circulation device 55, and is again launched. Led to. In this manner, the pachinko game is performed by circulating the enclosed game balls.

  When it is determined that the game ball falling in the game area 22 is safe, that is, when the game ball wins various winning ports (including the general winning ports 27a to 27d or the start winning ports 25, 26, etc.). The data of a predetermined number of game balls set according to the type of winning opening is added to the number of balls held by the player as a prize ball. Here, in the form of increasing the number of balls held by the player, in addition to the prize balls being added to the number of balls held based on the determination of safety, a bonus game (a special gaming state) described later occurs and the variable winning device 29 In some cases, a large number of winning balls are added to the number of balls held when the winning ball 29a is opened and a game ball wins the winning ball 29a.

  Further, the number of possessed balls is added in accordance with the game result, while being subtracted by the number of game balls fired. That is, when the number of possessed balls corresponding to the number of game balls is used as the game value, the number of possessed balls is decremented by “1” every time the game ball is launched. If the game ball falling in the game area 22 is determined to be out, that is, if it has not won any prize opening, it flows into the out ball inflow port 23 as an out ball and is a safe ball. Recovered in the same manner.

  In addition to updating the number of balls held, in this embodiment, the number of game balls flowing down the game area 22 (out, no safe results), so-called floating balls, are counted. Although details will be described later, the number of board balls is incremented by +1 when a game ball is launched and detected as a launch ball, and the number of board balls is decremented by -1 by being detected as an out ball (including a safe ball). ing. This is because there are excessive game balls in the game area 22 (game board surface), for example, the game balls are stagnated in the vicinity of the winning opening with a magnet or the like, and thereby the subsequent gaming balls are guided to the winning opening. This is to detect fraud early. Specifically, when the number of board balls reaches a predetermined number, it is determined that an error has occurred, and fraud is prevented and detected by performing notification and external output.

  When the game ball falling in the game area 22 wins one of the start winning ports 25 and 26 among the various winning ports (that is, when there is a start winning of the special drawing), the collective display device 36 displays the special drawing 1 in FIG. Or, the special display of the special figure 2 is displayed and a command for commanding the variable display of the special figure is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the display device 35 displays the special decoration figure (numbers, characters, symbols). , A pattern or the like) is changed (for example, scrolled) (so-called change display) is performed, and a special figure change display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure change display game) is executed.

  And, if the stop result mode of the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation display game (a combination of special figures derived by the fluctuation display) is a special result aspect (for example, a double eye such as “3, 3, 3”, etc.) A privilege to be called is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a jackpot random number is extracted and stored on the condition that there has been a start winning, and the extracted and stored random number value is compared with a predetermined determination value at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, whether or not to win a jackpot is determined in advance, and the variable display game is started in response to this determination.

  Further, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result mode (for example, “7, 7, 7”), it will be the jackpot and after the jackpot game (a special prize described later) After the period), the game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode. In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the special figure big hit probability). Further, depending on the case, the control for setting the short time state as described above is also performed.

  When the jackpot is changed to the jackpot state, after a fanfare period (a period in which an output of a sound effect that produces a jackpot is executed), the jackpot 29a of the variable winning device 29 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, within a range not exceeding 30 seconds), an opening operation (a jackpot round) that is temporarily released for a period of up to, for example, 10 winnings is performed. This opening operation is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this jackpot state, a command for instructing display of a jackpot screen for directing the jackpot state or informing the player of the number of jackpot rounds is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and displayed. In the device 35, such a big hit display is executed.

  This jackpot period (the fanfare period, the jackpot round period in which the jackpot is open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) corresponds to the special prize period. To do. In addition, as the number of rounds per jackpot, for example, a big jackpot of 15 rounds is usually the main jackpot, but a configuration of generating 16 rounds of jackpot as a premium may be used, or other configurations may be used. In addition, there may be a two-round jackpot as so-called surprise (a sudden probability change in which the jackpot probability changes via a jackpot with a small number of balls).

  Further, when a game ball is further won in the start winning opening 25 or 26 during the special figure change display game or the big hit, the special figure start memory is suspended and stored, for example, up to four. After the change display game or the jackpot state is over, the special figure change display game is repeated or returned to the customer waiting state based on the start-up memory.

  That is, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, the game shifts to a big hit state, and if the variable display game ends with a miss and starts memory, the variable display game is executed again, and the variable display game ends with a lose and starts memory If there is not, the game returns to the customer waiting state, and if the jackpot ends and the start memory is stored, the variable display game is executed again, and if the jackpot ends and there is no start memory, the flow returns to the customer waiting state. .

  In this embodiment, for example, two kinds of special chart start memory (special figure start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display), and two kinds of special figure variable display games are displayed. The first variation display game (first variation display game and second variation display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening 25 occurs, the display device 35 plays the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1. When a game ball wins the first start winning opening 25 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one first start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored. Thus, after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished, the first fluctuation display game by the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 35.

  Further, when a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the second start prize opening 26 occurs, a second variation display game based on the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 35. Then, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 26 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one second start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is stored. Thus, after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished, the second fluctuation display game by the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 35.

  When both the first start memory and the second start memory exist, either the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed first in accordance with a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variation display game corresponding to the second start winning port 26 is preferentially performed (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially consumed, a second corresponding to the second start winning port 26). When the game value given by the jackpot based on the variable display game is higher than the game value given by the jackpot based on the first variable display game corresponding to the first start winning opening 25, the special figure 2 priority digestion is made. Or a variation display game may be performed according to the winning order of the first start memory and the second start memory, or two types of variation display games may be alternately performed. When the game ball passes through the usual figure starting gate 28 during the game, a usual figure change display game is performed.

Next, the operation of the inner frame opening switch 126 of this embodiment will be described.
As described above, the inner frame opening switch 126 is a sensor that detects that the inner frame 12 has been opened, and holds information that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 even when the gaming machine 10 is powered off. be able to. The operation of the glass frame opening switch 125 for detecting the opening of the glass frame 13 may be the same, and the operation of the inner frame opening switch 126 will be described below as a representative.

  When the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 is opened at night when the game store is closed, the frame opening information (for example, opening ON data) that detects that the inner frame 12 has been opened is retained even at night. doing. The inner frame opening switch 126 can detect both the state where the inner frame 12 is opened and the state where the inner frame 12 is not opened. As described above, the inner frame opening switch 126 detects the detection signal of the inner frame opening switch 126 as a frame. Open information. Moreover, it is good also as detection of the frequency | count of opening, time information, etc. is possible.

  Next, in the next morning, when the gaming machine 10 is activated by turning on the power, the payout control device 80 uses the frame opening information from the inner frame opening switch 126 (regardless of whether or not it is detected that the inner frame 12 is opened at night). By reading the signal, it is taken into the payout control device 80. Thereby, the frame opening information of the inner frame opening switch 126 is output to the outside, is input to the payout control device 80, is taken into the payout control device 80 and stored in the RAM 83, and then the inner frame 12 stored in the RAM 83 is stored. The frame opening information is transmitted to the card unit 200, and it is possible to reliably acquire the frame opening information and lead to fraudulent detection.

  By the way, in the payout control device 80, it takes a certain amount of time to prepare for start-up (for example, prohibition of all interrupts, initial setting of CPU peripheral circuits (including serial ports), etc.) from the time when the main power is turned on. Although sufficient time is secured as a start-up preparation period so that a signal from the payout control device 80 can be received, when the frame open information is input from the inner frame open switch 126 to the payout control device 80, the frame open. There is a possibility that an unexpected situation may occur in which information cannot be captured.

  Therefore, when the main power supplied from the power supply 58 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the dispensing control device 80, but the main power supply is supplied to the inner frame opening switch 126 for a predetermined time (for example, 5). By providing a switch power supply delay circuit that delays only the second power), the main power is supplied to the inner frame opening switch 126 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the main power supply to the payout control device 80 was turned on. The inner frame opening switch 126 may be configured to output the frame opening information of the inner frame 12 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside after the supply of the main power is started.

  Further, means for delaying the output of frame opening information from the inner frame opening switch 126 to the payout control device 80 is performed to the dispensing control device 80 and the inner frame opening switch 126 without delaying the supply of main power. You may make it provide in the open switch 126 side. By doing so, there is no change in starting the power supply from the power supply device 58 to the respective control devices at the same time, and it is possible to improve the reliability of receiving the frame opening information only by providing the delay means only in the inner frame opening switch 126. be able to.

Thereby, after the start-up preparation period in the payout control device 80 elapses, the frame opening information of the inner frame opening switch 126 is output to the outside, input to the payout control device 80, and taken into the payout control device 80. The frame opening information of the inner frame 12 stored in the RAM 83 and then stored in the RAM 83 is transmitted to the card unit 200.
Therefore, since the frame opening information of the inner frame opening switch 126 is taken into the payout control device 80 after the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 80 elapses, there is no possibility that the frame opening information cannot be taken in, and the more reliable. The frame opening information can be taken in to improve the security against fraud.

  On the other hand, when an employee of the game store turns on the RAM clear switch 182 in the power supply device 58 to return the gaming machine 10 to the initial state in preparation for opening the store, the RAM 83 and the like inside the payout control device 80 are initialized. However, in the payout control device 80, the RAM 83 is cleared (initialized) even when the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, that is, when the gaming machine 10 is returned to the initial state. After this is done, the frame release information of the inner frame 12 is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  Therefore, the frame opening information of the inner frame 12 is not cleared by the process of clearing (initializing) the RAM 83. In addition, since the payout control device 80 receives and stores the frame release information after the process of clearing (initializing) the RAM 83, the game machine 10 can be used at night until the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on next time. The fact that the frame has been released is stored and held. As will be described later, based on this information, it is set as a monitoring target gaming machine and is monitored with priority.

  Further, in the dispensing control device 80, the frame opening information of the inner frame 12 is not transmitted to the card unit 200 (there is no notification that the frame opening information has been received from the card unit within a predetermined time set as a transmission control timer). ), Error information is output. As output of error information, for example, a frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted to the game control device 54.

  When the game control device 54 receives the frame opening information transmission error command from the payout control device 80, it transmits a frame opening information transmission error command to the effect control device 53. Thereby, in the production | presentation control apparatus 53, based on the frame open | release information transmission error command, control, such as displaying the error message which shows that the command regarding frame open | release information is not transmitted to the card unit 200, for example, is performed. Notify employees. It should be noted that an error signal may be output from the payout control device 80 to the error display LED 88 so that the error display LED 88 is turned on (or flashes).

  Thus, at night when the game store is closed, for example, when a suspicious person opens the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and attaches an illegal board or the like, the inner frame opening switch 126 causes the inner frame 12 to be closed. Is detected, and the release information is retained even when the gaming machine 10 is powered off.

  The next morning, when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the payout control device 80 reads the detection signal (frame opening information) from the inner frame opening switch 126, so that it is stored in the RAM 83, and the inner frame 12 stored in the RAM 83 is stored. The frame opening information is transmitted to the card unit 200, and for example, the card unit 200 takes an error notification or outputs error information to the hall computer 150 (further, the ball lending may not be performed).

  Further, when the inner frame 12 is illegally opened and the frame opening information is generated, the error state is displayed on the display device 35 or the error display LED 88. Therefore, when the employee watches the error notification of the display device 35 or the error display LED 88, the gaming machine 10 is inspected, and for example, an appropriate measure for the attachment of the illegal board or the like (for example, removal of the illegal board or the like and normal operation). Inspection) and security against fraud can be improved.

  Further, if the main power is supplied to the inner frame opening switch 126 after a predetermined time delay from turning on the main power to the payout control device 80, the inner frame opening switch 126 is set to the main frame opening switch 126 after the delay time elapses. The frame opening information of the inner frame 12 stored when the power is shut off can be output to the outside, and the reliability is further improved.

  Thus, in the display device 35 and the error display LED 88, the monitoring result of the inner frame opening switch 126 (or the glass frame opening switch 125) is a result (frame opening information) indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed. In this case, it corresponds to “notification means” capable of notifying that the inner frame 12 (or the glass frame 13) has been opened / closed regardless of the result of the later-described validity determination. The “notification means” here is not limited to the display device 35 and the error display LED 88, but may be realized by the operation display device 30, the display input device 203, or the speakers 16a and 16b as a sound notification. . Of course, you may implement | achieve not only the component of the game machine 10 and the card unit 200 but the incidental installation of the hall computer 150. FIG.

Next, the control operation of the gaming system 1 is mainly based on FIG. 8 to FIG. 15 centering on the control relating to the validity determination of whether or not the correspondence relationship between the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200 is valid. explain.
8 is a control operation at the manufacturing stage, FIGS. 9 and 10 are control operations at the installation stage, FIGS. 11 and 12 are control operations at the operation stage, FIG. 13 is a control operation at the replacement stage of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 14 shows the control operation in the replacement stage of the card unit 200, and FIG. 15 shows the control operation in the confirmation stage of the frame opening information.

  First, the control operation in the manufacturing stage of the gaming system 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The former stage of FIG. 8 is a manufacturing stage of the card unit 200, and the latter stage of FIG. 8 shows the manufacturing stage of the gaming machine 10. Note that in the drawings and the following description, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 of the gaming machine 10 may be collectively referred to as “IC chip” (illustrated).

  As shown in the previous stage of FIG. 8, the above-described communication control device 222 (see FIG. 6) mounted on the card unit 200 is manufactured in the chip maker 94 (step A11). In the communication control device 222 manufactured here, IC information including a communication control serial ID determined for each communication control device 222 and a manufacturer code determined for each chip manufacturer 94 is written. This IC information is information for identifying each communication control device 222.

Then, the chip maker 94 ships the communication control device 222 in which the IC information is already written to the card unit maker 92. At this time, the chip maker 94 registers the IC information written in the communication control device 222 with the gaming system information management company 96.
Next, in the card unit manufacturer 92 in which the communication control device 222 has arrived, after newly writing unit information in the communication control device 222 and reading the IC information, the card unit 200 on which the communication control device 222 is mounted. Is manufactured (step A12). Here, the unit information is information for identifying each card unit 200, and corresponds to a unit serial ID or the like determined for each card unit 200.

  The card unit 200 manufactured in this way is shipped from the card unit manufacturer 92 to each of the game stores A and B. Subsequently, the card unit manufacturer 92 associates the unit information of the card unit 200 in addition to the IC information of the communication control device 222 mounted on the manufactured card unit 200 with each other as shipping information to the gaming system information management company 96. Register for it.

  The gaming system information management company 96 collates the IC information already included in the shipping information registered by the card unit manufacturer 92 with the IC information already registered by the chip manufacturer 94 (step A13). As a result of this collation, when both pieces of IC information are the same, for example, when both pieces of information identify the same communication control device 222, it is determined that the communication control device 222 is valid. judge. At this time, the gaming system information management company 96 registers the shipping information registered by the card unit manufacturer 92 as temporary management information for authentication described later (step A13).

Subsequently, as shown in the subsequent stage of FIG. 8, the above-described game control device 54 and payout control device 80 mounted on the gaming machine 10 are manufactured by the chip maker 94. Each IC information is written in the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 manufactured here (step A14).
Here, the IC information of the game control device 54 includes a chip ID determined for each game control device 54, a maker code determined for each chip maker 94, and the like to identify the individual game control device 54. It becomes information of. Similarly, the IC information of the payout control device 80 includes a chip ID determined for each payout control device 80, a manufacturer code determined for each chip maker 94, and the like to identify each payout control device 80. It becomes information of.

  Then, the chip manufacturer 94 ships the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 in which the IC information has already been written to the game machine manufacturer 91. The chip manufacturer 94 registers the IC information written in the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 with the gaming machine information management company 95.

  Next, in the gaming machine manufacturer 91 in which the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 are received, after newly adding game machine information and the like to the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80, the IC information is read. Then, the gaming machine 10 equipped with the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 is manufactured (step A15). Here, the gaming machine information is information for identifying the gaming machine 10, and corresponds to the respective model codes of the gaming control device 54 and the payout control device 80.

  The gaming machine 10 manufactured in this way is shipped from the gaming machine manufacturer 91 to each of the gaming stores A and B. Subsequently, the gaming machine manufacturer 91 associates the gaming machine information and the like of the gaming machine 10 in addition to the IC information of the gaming control apparatus 54 and the payout controlling apparatus 80 mounted on the manufactured gaming machine 10 as shipping information. Register with the machine information management company 95.

  The gaming machine information management company 95 collates the IC information included in the shipping information already registered by the gaming machine manufacturer 91 with the IC information already registered by the chip manufacturer 94 (step A16). As a result of this collation, when both IC information is the same, for example, when both are information for identifying the same game control device 54 and the payout control device 80, the game control device 54 and the payout It is determined that the control device 80 is valid. At this time, the gaming machine information management company 95 registers the shipping information registered by the gaming machine manufacturer 91 with the gaming system information management company 96 for verification in the installation stage and the replacement stage of the gaming machine 10 (step A17). ).

  Next, the control operation in the installation stage of the gaming system 1 will be described based on FIG. 9 and FIG. FIG. 9 shows the first half of the control operation in the installation stage, and FIG. 10 shows the second half of the control operation in the installation stage. In the drawings and the following description, when two pieces of information to be “collated” are recognized as the same information, the collation result is “collation result = OK”, and conversely, it is not recognized as the same information. Indicates the collation result as “collation result = NG” (illustrated).

  In FIG. 9, when the card unit 200 is powered on, the main control device 221 (see FIG. 6) performs connection confirmation as to whether or not communication with the hall computer 150 is possible. The connection here is performed via the communication line 90a described above. Then, the main controller 221 includes a unit serial ID (one of unit information) included in the temporary management information registered in advance, together with information (this authentication request) for requesting transmission of actual management information to be described later. Send to hall computer 150. Note that the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 of the gaming machine 10 also start operating when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and are in a state where normal gaming is possible.

  When the hall computer 150 receives the main authentication request and the unit serial ID transmitted from the main controller 221, the unit serial ID identical to the received unit serial ID is already registered in the hall computer 150. It is searched whether it is what is contained in (step A21). If the unit serial ID is not registered as a result of the temporary management information search (NO in step A22), the hall computer 150 newly registers this unit serial ID as temporary management information (step S22). A23). At this time, the hall computer 150 transmits the unit serial ID and the authentication request received from the main control device 221 to the gaming system information management company 96.

  In the installation stage, since the card unit 200 is first installed in the game stores A and B, the unit serial ID described above is usually still registered in the hall computer 150. Therefore, as a result of the search for the temporary management information described above, the unit serial ID has not been registered yet. On the other hand, if the unit serial ID is already registered in the hall computer 150 (YES in step A22), the online processing shown in FIG. 11 described later is executed (step A24).

  Subsequently, when the gaming system information management company 96 receives the unit serial ID transmitted from the hall computer 150 and this authentication request, temporary management information including the same unit serial ID as the content of the unit serial ID is stored in its own storage system. It is searched whether it has already been registered in the area (step A25). If the temporary management information to be searched has already been registered as a result of the search for temporary management information here (YES in step A26), the key version of the authentication key used for encryption communication to be described later or already registered. The unit serial ID or the like in the temporary management information is registered as actual management information (step A27).

  Further, in the gaming system information management company 96, if the temporary management information is not registered in the search for the temporary management information described above (NO in step A26), the game system information management company 96 is predetermined on the display of the server of the gaming system information management company 96. (Step A28). Further, as the notification process in this case, when the gaming system information management company 96 transmits information indicating that the temporary management information is not registered to the hall computer 150, the hall computer 150 notifies the fact by the notification means. For example, the notification is made through a display 151 of the hall computer 150, a speaker, or the like.

In addition, when notification (display or the like) is also made by the notification means 204 such as the notification lamp 204 of the card unit 200, the display input device 203, the display device 35 of the gaming machine 10, the error display LED 88, or the like, information to that effect. Is transmitted to the card unit 200.
As a result of the above temporary management information search, the unit serial ID of the card unit 200 is collated, and the replacement of the main control device 221 at the stage before the card unit 200 is installed in the game stores A and B is detected. It becomes possible.

  Thereafter, the gaming system information management company 96 transmits the registered real management information to the hall computer 150 together with the temporary management information search result (verification result = OK). When the hall computer 150 receives the actual management information and the search result (collation result = OK), the hall computer 150 registers the hall computer 150 (step A29). Then, the hall computer 150 transmits the registered actual management information to the main control device 221 of the card unit 200.

  Then, when the main control device 221 receives the actual management information from the hall computer 150, the main control device 221 performs an internal mutual matching process for collating the temporary management information already registered with the communication control device 222 (step A30). In this internal cross-checking process, the details of the unit serial ID, maker code, key version, etc. included in the received actual management information are stored in the already registered unit serial ID, maker code, key. It will be checked against the version etc.

  Thereafter, the main control device 221 starts communication with the communication control device 222. Then, main controller 221 requests communication controller 222 to transmit management information in this communication. Then, the communication control device 222 requests the gaming machine 10 to transmit management information. When the gaming machine 10 receives a request for transmission of management information from the communication control device 222, the gaming machine 10 transmits the unit serial ID, key version, etc. of the management information already registered in its own storage area to the communication control device 222. To do.

  Further, when the gaming machine 10 receives the frame opening information indicating whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 is detected by the aforementioned inner frame opening switch 126 after transmitting the management information, the game machine 10 Regardless, the frame opening information is also transmitted to the communication control device 222 (step A31). Although the transmission process here will be described in detail later, the gaming machine 10 (the payout control device 80) sends a fraud occurrence command (the gaming control device 54 of the gaming machine 10) when the frame opening information indicates that the frame is open. To the effect control device 53). Further, when the gaming machine 10 (the payout control device 80) can transmit the frame opening information, it transmits a frame opening information transmission normal command (to the game control device 54 of the gaming machine 10). If the transmission fails, a frame release information transmission error command is transmitted (to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54 of the gaming machine 10).

In addition, when the communication control device 222 receives the management information transmitted from the gaming machine 10, the communication control device 222 registers the management information (step A32). Then, the management information is transmitted to the main controller 221. When receiving the management information transmitted from the communication control device 222, the main control device 221 registers this management information in its own storage area (step A33). Further, main controller 221 transmits the received management information to hall computer 150.
Further, the communication control device 222 transmits the frame opening information received from the gaming machine 10 to the main control device 221, and the main control device 221 that has received the frame opening information stores this frame opening information in its own storage area. Further, the frame opening information is transmitted to the hall computer 150.

  When the hall computer 150 receives the management information transmitted from the main control device 221, it adds game shop information to these (step A34). Furthermore, the hall computer 150 determines whether management information including these has already been registered in its own storage area (step A35). If the management information described above is already registered in the hall computer 150 (YES in step A36), the online processing of FIG. 11 described later is executed (step A24). On the other hand, if the management information is not registered in the hall computer 150 and the collation result is NG (NO in step A36), the management information is transmitted to the gaming system information management company 96.

  In FIG. 10, when the gaming system information management company 96 receives the management information transmitted from the hall computer 150, the management information collation for collating the received management information with the management information registered in its own storage area. (Step A37). In the management information collation, the management information registered in the gaming system information management company 96 and the management information transmitted from the hall computer 150 are collated with each other. Sent to. In addition, the hall computer 150 similarly transmits a verification result to the main control device 221.

  Then, the hall computer 150 determines the collation result (step A38), and if the collation result in which all the management information matches each other = OK (YES in step A38), the management information is used for the later collation. It registers in its own storage area as management information (step A41). On the other hand, if any one of the collated information does not match as the collation result (NO in step A38), the hall computer 150 deletes the management information (step A39), and then the collation result = The fact that it was NG is notified by the display means 151 or the speaker of the hall computer 150 which is a notification means (step A40).

  In the main control device 221 that has received the collation result transmitted from the hall computer 150, if the collation result is determined (step A42) and the collation result is OK (YES in step A42), the main control device. 221 transmits a request for a communication key used for encrypted communication to the communication control apparatus 222. The communication control device 222 that has received the communication key request from the main control device 221 creates and registers a communication key (step A43).

Then, the communication control device 222 transmits a communication key to the main control device 221. When main controller 221 receives the communication key transmitted from communication controller 222, main controller 221 registers the communication key (step A44).
On the other hand, when the collation result is NG in the main controller 221 described above (NO in step A42), for example, a notification lamp 204 of the card unit 200 or a display input device 203 serving as notification means. (Step A45). Further, in the case where notification is also made using the display device 35 or the error display LED 88 of the gaming machine 10, which is a notification means, information to that effect is transmitted to the payout control device 80.

Next, the control operation in the operation stage of the gaming system 1 will be described based on FIG. 11 when the hall computer 150 is in an online state.
In FIG. 11, when the card unit 200 is powered on, the main control device 221 (see FIG. 6) performs connection confirmation as to whether or not communication with the hall computer 150 is possible. By checking the connection here, it is confirmed whether or not the hall computer 150 is online with the card unit 200.

  If the main controller 221 and the hall computer 150 can communicate with each other (YES in A51), the main controller 221 uses the unit serial ID included in the temporary management information already registered as the actual management information. Is transmitted to the hall computer 150 together with information requesting transmission of this (this authentication request). On the other hand, if the main controller 221 and the hall computer 150 are not in a communicable state (NO in step A51), the offline processing of FIG. 12 described later is executed (step A52).

  Next, when the hall computer 150 receives the unit serial ID and the authentication request transmitted from the main control device 221, the unit serial ID identical to the received unit serial ID is already registered in the hall computer 150. It is searched whether it is included in the management information (step A53). If the above-described unit serial ID has not yet been registered as a result of the search of the actual management information here (NO in step A54), that fact is notified by, for example, the display display 151 of the hall computer 150 or a speaker. Notification is made (step A55). In addition, when notification (display or the like) is also made by the notification means 204 such as the notification lamp 204 of the card unit 200, the display input device 203, the display device 35 of the gaming machine 10, the error display LED 88, or the like, information to that effect. Is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  On the other hand, if the above-described unit serial ID has already been registered as a result of the actual management information search (YES in step A54), the hall computer 150 displays the above-described actual management information search result (verification result = OK). It is transmitted to the main controller 221 together with the actual management information. When the main control device 221 receives the actual management information transmitted from the hall computer 150, the main control device 221 collates with the actual management information already registered in the card unit 200 (step A56). In the actual management information collation here, it is confirmed whether or not the unit serial ID, the communication control serial ID, and the like included in the received actual management information match with those already registered.

  Then, in the actual management information collation, if the collation result in which all pieces of information coincide with each other = OK (YES in step A57), in the state as it is, any one of the information does not coincide (step A57). NO), and the main control device 221 collates with the communication control device 222 and the actual management information registered with each other in a state where the information included in the actual management information registered in the hall computer 150 is overwritten. Processing is performed (step A59). In this internal mutual verification process, the contents such as the unit serial ID included in the actual management information registered with each other are verified.

  Thereafter, the main controller 221 and the communication controller 222 start communication with each other. Then, main controller 221 requests communication controller 222 to transmit management information in this communication. Then, the communication control device 222 requests the payout control device 80 of the gaming machine 10 to transmit management information.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the payout control device 80 receives a request for transmission of management information from the communication control device 222, it requests the game control device 54 to transmit management information. When the game control device 54 receives a request for transmission of management information from the payout control device 80, the game control device 54 transmits the unit serial ID, the key version, etc. of the management information already registered in the RAM 113 to the payout control device 80. Next, the payout control device 80 transmits the management information received from the game control device 54 to the communication control device 222.

  Further, after transmitting the management information, the payout control device 80 receives the frame opening information indicating whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 is detected by the inner frame opening switch 126 described above, regardless of the result. The frame opening information is transmitted to the communication control device 222 (step A60).

  When the payout control device 80 receives a notification that the frame opening information has been received from the card unit 200 within a predetermined time after transmitting the frame opening information, the payout control device 80 sends a frame opening information transmission completion command to the game control device 54. However, if the card unit 200 fails to receive this command within a predetermined time (a notification that the frame opening information has been received from the card unit 200 within a predetermined time after transmitting the frame opening information is received. If not, a frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted to the game control device 54, and this frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to another board such as the effect control device 53. This is notified (displayed or the like) by, for example, the display device 35 or the error display LED 88 as notification means.

  At this time, the payout control device 80 is notified by the error display LED 88. Further, some notification may be made by the game control device 54 (for example, the corresponding LED of the collective display device 36 is turned on or blinked). In addition, when the frame opening information received from the payout control device 80 indicates that the frame is open, the game control device 54 transmits a fraud occurrence command regarding the frame opening to the effect control device 53 (step A61). .

  When the communication control device 222 of the card unit 200 receives the management information and the frame release information transmitted from the payout control device 80, the communication control device 222 registers the information at the received timing (step A62). Then, the communication control device 222 transmits management information and frame opening information to the main control device 221. Further, when receiving the management information and the frame opening information transmitted from the communication control device 222, the main control device 221 registers these information (step A63) and further transmits them to the hall computer 150.

  If the information transmitted from the main control device 221 is management information, the hall computer 150 adds game shop information to the information (step A64). Furthermore, the hall computer 150 performs management information collation to determine whether management information including these has already been registered in its own storage area (step A65). Here, when the management information is not already registered in the hall computer 150 and the collation result is NG, the fact is notified (display or the like) by the notification device such as the display device 35 or the error display LED 88. ) Good.

  On the other hand, if the above-described management information is already registered in the hall computer 150, the fact that the collation result is OK is transmitted to the main controller 221. Then, main controller 221 that has received the collation result transmitted from hall computer 150 transmits a request for a communication key used for encrypted communication to communication controller 222. The communication control device 222 that has received the communication key request from the main control device 221 creates and registers a communication key (step A66).

  Further, the communication control device 222 transmits a communication key to the main control device 221. When main controller 221 receives the communication key transmitted from communication controller 222, main controller 221 registers the communication key (step A67). Thereafter, the main control device 221 and the communication control device 222 start encryption communication using a communication key.

Next, the control operation in the operation stage of the gaming system 1 will be described based on FIG. 12 when the hall computer 150 is in an offline state.
When the hall computer 150 is in an offline state incapable of communicating with the card unit 200, the main control device 221 of the card unit 200 determines whether or not actual management information has already been registered in its own storage area (step) A71). If the actual management information is not registered in this determination (NO in step A72), the process waits until the card unit 200 enters an online state in which communication with the hall computer 150 is possible (step A73).

  On the other hand, if the actual management information has already been registered in main controller 221 (YES in step A72), main controller 221 and communication controller 222 will perform internal mutual verification processing for verifying the mutually registered actual management information. (Step A74). In this internal mutual verification process, the contents such as the unit serial ID included in the actual management information registered with each other are verified. Then, main controller 221 confirms whether the management information included in the actual management information is registered (step A75).

  If the registration of the management information cannot be confirmed (NO in step A76), the fact is notified by the notification lamp 204 or the display input device 203 of the card unit 200 which is a notification means (step A77). Further, in the case where notification (display or the like) is also performed by the display device 35 or the error display LED 88 of the gaming machine 10 which is a notification means, information to that effect is transmitted to the payout control device 80. In this case, control is performed so that the game in the gaming machine 10 cannot be started.

  If registration of the management information can be confirmed by main controller 221 (YES in step A76), main controller 221 requests communication controller 222 to transmit management information. Then, the communication control device 222 requests the payout control device 80 of the gaming machine 10 to transmit management information. Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the payout control device 80 receives a request for transmission of management information from the communication control device 222, it requests the game control device 54 to transmit management information. When the game control device 54 receives a request for transmission of management information from the payout control device 80, the game control device 54 transmits the unit serial ID, the key version, etc. of the management information already registered in the RAM 113 to the payout control device 80. Next, the payout control device 80 transmits the management information received from the game control device 54 to the communication control device 222.

  Further, when the payout control device 80 that has transmitted the management information receives the frame opening information indicating whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 is detected by the inner frame opening switch 126 described above, regardless of the result, The frame opening information is transmitted to the communication control device 222. Further, when the frame opening information can be transmitted to the card unit 200, the payout control device 80 transmits a frame opening information transmission normal command to the game control device 54. Here, when the frame opening information received from the payout control device 80 indicates that the frame has been opened, the game control device 54 transmits a fraud occurrence command related to the frame opening.

  When the communication control device 222 receives the management information and the frame release information transmitted from the payout control device 80, the communication control device 222 registers the information at the received timing (step A78). Then, the communication control device 222 transmits the management information and the frame release information to the main control device 221. When the main control device 221 receives the management information transmitted from the communication control device 222, the main control device 221 performs management information collation to determine whether or not the management information is already registered in its own storage area (step A79).

  Here, if the management information is not already registered in the main control device 221, the collation result = NG (NO in step A80), and a notification means 204 such as the card unit 200 or a display indicating that fact. This is notified by the input device 203 (step A81). Further, when notification (display or the like) is also performed by the display device 35 or the error display LED 88 of the gaming machine 10, which is a notification means, information to that effect is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 (the payout control device 80). Like that.

  On the other hand, in the management information collation, if the management information is already registered in the main control device 221, the collation result = OK (YES in step A80), and the main control device 221 uses the communication key used for encrypted communication. Is transmitted to the communication control apparatus 222. Here, when the frame opening information received in the offline state indicates that the frame is open, the main control device 221 determines that the game in the gaming machine 10 is not performed even if the collation result = OK in the management information collation. Control so that it cannot start.

Upon receiving the communication key request transmitted from the main control device 221, the communication control device 222 creates and registers a communication key (step A82). Further, the communication control device 222 transmits the communication key to the main control device 221. When main controller 221 receives the communication key transmitted from communication controller 222, main controller 221 registers the communication key (step A83). Thereafter, the main control device 221 and the communication control device 222 start encryption communication using a communication key.
Note that if the frame opening information received from the communication control device 222 indicates that the frame is open, the main control device 221 does not start the game even if the above-described collation result = OK.

Next, the control operation in the replacement stage of the gaming machine 10 in the gaming system 1 will be described based on FIG.
In FIG. 13, first, the main control device 221 requests the communication control device 222 to transmit management information. Then, the communication control device 222 requests the gaming machine 10 (the payout control device 80) to transmit management information. Further, when the gaming machine 10 receives a management information transmission request from the communication control device 222, the gaming machine 10 transmits the management information already registered in its own storage area to the communication control device 222.

  Upon receiving the management information transmitted from the gaming machine 10, the communication control device 222 registers the management information (step A91). Then, the communication control device 222 transmits the registered management information to the main control device 221. When the main control device 221 receives the management information transmitted from the communication control device 222, the main control device 221 registers the management information (step A92) and further transmits it to the hall computer 150.

  Next, when the hall computer 150 receives the management information transmitted from the main controller 221, it adds game shop information to them (step A93). Furthermore, the hall computer 150 performs management information collation to determine whether or not the management information is already registered in its own storage area (step A94). If the management information has already been registered in the hall computer 150 and the collation result is OK (YES in step A95), the process proceeds to the operation stage (online) shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if the management information is not already registered in the hall computer 150 and the collation result is NG (NO in step A95), the management information received from the gaming machine 10 side is used as the gaming system. It transmits to the information management company 96.
Then, when the gaming system information management company 96 receives the management information transmitted from the hall computer 150, the gaming system information management company 96 performs management information collation to collate the received management information with the management information registered in its own storage area ( Step A96).

  In this management information collation, the management information registered in the gaming system information management company 96 and the hall computer 150 are collated with each other. Then, the verification result by the management information verification is transmitted from the gaming system information management company 96 to the hall computer 150. Further, the hall computer 150 similarly transmits the collation result to the main controller 221.

  Then, the hall computer 150 determines the collation result (step A97), and if the collation result in which all the management information matches each other = OK (YES in step A97), the management information is used as the collation management information. Is registered in its own storage area (step A100). On the other hand, if any one of the collated information does not match as the collation result (NO in step A97), the hall computer 150 deletes the management information (step A98), and then the collation result = The fact that it was NG is notified by means of notification means such as the display display 151 of the hall computer 150 or a speaker (step A99). Further, in the case where notification is also made by the notification means, for example, the notification lamp 204 of the card unit 200, the display input device 203, the display device 35 of the gaming machine 10, the error display LED 88, or the like, information to that effect is sent to the card unit 200. To send to.

  Also, in the main controller 221 that has received the collation result transmitted from the hall computer 150, if the collation result is determined (step A101) and the collation result is OK (YES in step A101), the main controller 221 transmits a request for a communication key used for encrypted communication to the communication control apparatus 222. The communication control device 222 that has received the communication key request from the main control device 221 creates and registers a communication key (step A102).

Then, the communication control device 222 transmits a communication key to the main control device 221. When main controller 221 receives the communication key transmitted from communication controller 222, main controller 221 registers the communication key (step A103).
On the other hand, when the collation result is NG in the main control device 221 described above (NO in step A101), for example, the notification lamp 204 of the card unit 200 or the display input device 203 serving as notification means. (Step A104). In addition, for example, when notification is also made by the display means 35 or the error display LED 88 of the gaming machine 10, which is a notification means, information to that effect is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 (the payout control device 80). .

Next, the control operation of the replacement stage of the card unit 200 in the gaming system 1 will be described based on FIG.
In FIG. 14, first, a connection confirmation is made as to whether or not communication is possible between the hall computer 150 and the main controller 221 of the card unit 200. The connection here is performed via the communication line 90a described above. Then, the main control device 221 uses a unit serial ID (one of unit information) included in the temporary management information stored in advance together with information (this authentication request) for requesting transmission of actual management information to be described later. Send to hall computer 150.

  When the hall computer 150 receives the main authentication request and the unit serial ID transmitted from the main controller 221, the unit serial ID identical to the received unit serial ID is already registered in the hall computer 150. It is searched whether it is what is contained in (step A111). If the above-described unit serial ID is not yet registered as a result of the search for temporary management information here (NO in step A112), the hall computer 150 newly registers this unit serial ID as temporary management information ( Step A113). At this time, the hall computer 150 transmits the unit serial ID and the authentication request received from the main control device 221 to the gaming system information management company 96.

  In the replacement stage of the card unit 200, since the card unit 200 is normally installed in the game stores A and B for the first time, the unit serial ID described above is usually not registered in the hall computer 150 yet. It is. Therefore, in many cases, the unit serial ID has not been registered as a result of the above-described temporary management information search. On the other hand, if the unit serial ID is already registered in the hall computer 150 (YES in step A112), the operation stage processing described above is executed.

  Subsequently, when the gaming system information management company 96 receives the authentication request and the unit serial ID transmitted from the hall computer 150, the temporary management information including the unit serial ID identical to the content of the unit serial ID has already been registered. (Step A114). If the temporary management information to be searched is already registered as a result of the search for temporary management information here (YES in step A115), the key version of the authentication key used for encrypted communication or the temporary management already registered Of the information, the unit serial ID and the like are registered as actual management information (step A116).

  In the game system information management company 96, if the temporary management information is not registered in the search for the temporary management information described above (NO in step A115), a predetermined notification is given (step A117). That is, when the gaming system information management company 96 transmits information indicating that the temporary management information is not registered to the hall computer 150, the hall computer 150 is a notification means, for example, a display display of the hall computer 150. 151 or a speaker.

In addition, when notification (display or the like) is also made by the notification means 204 such as the notification lamp 204 of the card unit 200, the display input device 203, the display device 35 of the gaming machine 10, the error display LED 88, or the like, information to that effect. Is transmitted to the card unit 200.
By searching for temporary management information as described above, the unit serial ID of the card unit 200 is collated, and when the card unit 200 is replaced, it is possible to detect the replacement of the main controller 221 and the like.

  Next, the gaming system information management company 96 transmits the registered actual management information to the hall computer 150 together with the temporary management information search result (verification result = OK). When the hall computer 150 receives the actual management information and the search result (collation result = OK), the hall computer 150 registers the hall computer 150 (step A118). Note that the management information collation of the gaming machine 10 is the same as described above.

  Thereafter, main controller 221 transmits a request for a communication key used for encrypted communication to communication controller 222. The communication control device 222 that has received the communication key request from the main control device 221 creates and registers a communication key (step A102). Then, the communication control device 222 transmits a communication key to the main control device 221. When main controller 221 receives the communication key transmitted from communication controller 222, main controller 221 registers the communication key (step A120).

Next, the control operation at the confirmation stage of the frame opening information will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 15, it is first determined whether or not it is the timing of frame opening confirmation (A131). Here, if it is not yet the timing for checking the frame opening (NO in step A131), the process proceeds to the operation stage shown in FIG. 11 (A132). On the other hand, if it is the frame opening confirmation timing (YES in step A131), the main control device 221 confirms connection as to whether or not communication with the hall computer 150 is possible (A51).

  If the main controller 221 and the hall computer 150 can communicate with each other (YES in A51), the main controller 221 uses the unit serial ID included in the temporary management information already registered as the actual management information. Is transmitted to the hall computer 150 together with information requesting transmission of this (this authentication request). On the other hand, if main controller 221 and hall computer 150 are not in a communicable state (NO in step A51), the above-described offline processing of FIG. 12 is executed (step A52). In FIG. 15 as well, the processing after step A51 is the same as the processing after step A51 in FIG.

  Since the game store may remain powered after closing, as shown in FIG. 15, the card unit 200 has a predetermined frame release confirmation timing (change in game information) regardless of power-on. May be performed at the specified time after the predetermined time elapses or every time a frame opening confirmation instruction is received from the hall computer 150) or the like, as in the operation stage (FIG. 11) described above.

Next, the control contents of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, the main process of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main process is started based on the fact that the CPU 111 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 that supplies power to the game control device 54 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the power supply 58 at a predetermined timing (in a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the CPU 111 is turned on by being input to the control device 54 and this reset signal is subsequently released, the CPU 111 is activated.

  Similarly, when the power is restored from the power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released and the CPU 111 is activated. When the worker wants to initialize the RAM 113 and the like of the game control device 54, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 182 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 58. There is. Note that the RAM 113 is denoted as RWM in FIG.

  When the CPU 111 is started, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuits (including the serial port) built in the CPU 111 are initially set, and access to the RAM 113 is permitted. Then, an off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”) is output to all output ports (steps S1 to S4). Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S4 is provided here just in case. .

  In step S5, the other board activation waiting timer is set. This is a timer that sets a time sufficient for starting another control device (for example, the production control device 53) other than the game control device 54, so that the game control device 54 is more than the production control device 53. This is to prevent the production control device 53 from being activated when it is activated first and a command related to notification of an error or the like is transmitted to the production control device 53. By setting the activation waiting timer, when the command from the payout control device 80 is received and the corresponding command is transmitted to the effect control device 53, the effect control device 53 can be surely received. Subsequently, the reception interruption of the payout control device 80 is permitted in step S6. The activation waiting timer is also set in the payout control device 80, but the timer value set in the game control device 54 is shorter as the timer value.

  Then, it progresses to step S7 and it is determined whether a power failure has occurred. Here, the determination is made using, for example, a power failure detection signal, and if the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. If it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has not occurred, the other board activation wait timer is updated (decremented) by "-1" in step S8. Next, in step S9, it is determined whether or not the other board activation wait timer has reached "0". If not, the process returns to step S7 to repeat the loop.

Then, the loop is repeated, and if the other board activation waiting timer becomes “0”, the determination result of step S9 becomes YES, and the process proceeds to step S1001 and subsequent steps. Accordingly, at this time, the respective units of the gaming machine 10 are sequentially activated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S27 shown in FIG. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later).

  If no power failure has occurred and the process proceeds from step S9 to step S1001, it is determined in step S1001 whether there is a management information transmission request. By this determination, the payout control device 80 is in a standby state until it receives a management information transmission request from the game control device 54. If there is a management information transmission request, the determination result in step S1001 is YES, and the process proceeds to step S1002. In step S1002, information transmission processing of the game control device 54 is performed. Note that after the management information is transmitted, the game control device 54 does not operate until the following nighttime frame opening information (same as the frame opening information) is received.

  Subsequently, in step S1003, it is determined whether or not nighttime frame opening information has been received. Here, the night frame opening information is information indicating whether or not the opening of the glass frame opening switch 125 or the inner frame opening switch 126 is detected as described above. Based on the determination in step S <b> 1003, the standby state is kept until nighttime frame opening information is received from the payout control device 80. Here, if the night frame opening information is received, the process proceeds to step S1004 to determine whether or not the received information is a frame opening information transmission error command.

  If the received information is not a frame opening information transmission error command, the process jumps to step S1007. On the other hand, if the received information is a frame opening information transmission error command, the process advances to step S1005 to set a frame opening information transmission error flag. When the frame opening information transmission error flag is set, the game control device 54 also performs some kind of notification, or stores information related to the frame opening information transmission error.

  Here, the frame opening information transmission error flag is set in the game control device 54. However, the flag may not be set in particular by transmitting a command to another board and notifying for a predetermined time. As will be described later, even when the frame opening information can be transmitted normally, a predetermined command (frame opening information transmission normal command) is received from the payout control device 80. In this case, Then, the flag is not set based on the command, and the command transmission to the effect control device 53 is not performed, and the process proceeds as it is.

  Next, a frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 in step S1006. As a result, the production control device 53 performs control such as displaying an error message on the display device 35 based on the frame opening information transmission error command, for example, indicating that a command related to frame opening information has not been transmitted to the card unit 200. It is also possible to notify employees.

  After step S1006, the process proceeds to step S1007 and subsequent steps. In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the received information is a night frame opening fraud occurrence error command (same as the frame opening fraud occurrence command). Here, the night frame opening fraud error command indicates that the command corresponding to the night frame opening information indicates that the night frame opening occurred. If the received information is not a night frame opening fraud error command, the process jumps to step S10.

  On the other hand, if the received information is a night frame opening fraud occurrence error command, the process advances to step S1008 to set a night frame opening fraud occurrence flag. When this nighttime frame opening fraud occurrence error flag is set, the game control device 54 also performs some kind of notification, or stores information related to the nighttime frame opening fraud occurrence error. In this example, the game control device 54 sets the nighttime frame opening fraud occurrence flag, but it is also possible to send a command to another board to notify it for a predetermined time and not set the flag in particular.

  Next, a night frame opening fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 in step S1009. Thereby, in the production control device 53, information indicating that the inner frame 12 (which may be the glass frame 13; the same applies hereinafter) is opened at night is displayed on the display device 35, and the gaming machine 10 is inspected by the employee. Prompt. This is because when the frame opening information is ON data, frame opening information due to unauthorized opening of the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 is generated at night, and there is a possibility that the frame opening information is illegal. This is because the purpose is to notify the employee of the opening of the frame and to prompt the employee to check.

In addition, when the frame opening information due to unauthorized opening of the inner frame 12 or the glass frame 13 occurs at night, the game control device 54 may be in a launch non-permitted state in which a game ball cannot be launched. In such a case, when the inner frame 12 is illegally opened at night, the gaming machine 10 is not operated, and the gaming machine 10 is fraudulent (nail bending, mixing of small-diameter balls, replacement of the control device, etc.). Employees can check for what happened to prevent damage to the amusement store.
In addition, information indicating that a command relating to frame opening information has not been transmitted to the card unit 200, information indicating that the inner frame 12 or the glass frame 13 has been opened at night is performed on the display device 35, and LEDs other than the display device 35 are used. An error may be notified, or a sound or the like may be notified.

Subsequently, in step S10, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed. If the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, the process proceeds to step S1010. If the power is not turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, the process jumps to step S11.
In step S1010, it is determined whether or not it is in the nighttime frame opening error state. If it is not in the nighttime frame opening error state, the process jumps to step S15 to be described later. On the other hand, if it is in the nighttime frame opening error state, the process proceeds to step S11 and subsequent steps. Here, during the nighttime frame opening error state, the above-mentioned frame opening information transmission error flag or the nighttime frame opening fraud flag is set.

  In step S11, it is determined whether or not all values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 113 are normal power failure inspection area check data, and if normal, it is determined that the power failure is restored (when the power failure is restored). If it is abnormal (if not normally stored), the process jumps to step S15. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step S29 described later. In this step S11, since it is determined whether or not it is a normal power failure recovery time based on a plurality of check data in this way, it is highly reliable to determine whether or not it is a normal power failure recovery time.

  Next, in step S12, a checksum of the data in the RAM 113 (RWM) is calculated, and in step S13, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 113 is corrupted), the process jumps to step S15, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In step S14, processing (initial value setting) for power failure recovery is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) corresponding to the state of the gaming machine 10 is transmitted to the effect control device 53 in step S1011. After step S1011, the process proceeds to step S19 shown in FIG.

  The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, if there is a power outage during a break, information indicating that it was during a break is included in this power outage recovery command, and the presentation control device 53 that received this command during the power outage recovery executes, for example, during a power outage The display on the display device 35 that informs the user that the break has been made is resumed after the power failure is restored.

  In addition, when there is a power failure during settlement, information indicating that settlement is in progress is included in this power failure recovery command, and the presentation control device 53 that has received this command at the time of power recovery recovers, for example, at the time of power failure The display on the display device 35 or the like for informing the settlement being performed is resumed as it is after the power failure recovery. Accordingly, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 113 and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.

  When the processing proceeds to step S15 and subsequent steps, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access-prohibited area) in the RAM 113 of the game control device 54 is performed. That is, in step S15, all areas of the RAM 113 to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 113, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. Even when the RAM clear switch 182 is operated, an area (access prohibited area) in which information relating to frame release information is stored is not cleared.

  Next, in step S16, an initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized, and a process of transmitting a power-on command (power-on command) to the effect control device 53 is performed in step S17. As described above, even when the RAM clear switch 182 is operated, the area storing the information related to frame opening (access prohibition area) is not cleared. Security is high without loss.

  When the process proceeds to step S19 following FIG. 17 through step S17 or when the process jumps from step S1011 to step S19, in step S19 shown in FIG. 17, for example, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit provided in the CPU 111 is provided. ). Here, CTC is a circuit for timer interruption.

  Next, in step S20, activation setting of a random number generation circuit provided in a CPU peripheral circuit built in the CPU 111 is performed. This random number generation circuit generates a part of each special figure or ordinary random number in hardware. However, the initial values of some of these random numbers are set in software by the process of step S22 described later. Note that the random numbers to be generated by the hard random numbers and the soft random numbers are arbitrary, and the specifications are changed as appropriate.

  The random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether or not to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbol), fluctuation pattern random numbers (reach of reach) Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to a common figure include a random number per common figure (a random number for determining whether or not per common figure). Among these, the random numbers targeted in steps S20 and S22 are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, and jackpot symbol random numbers 1,2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

  Next, in step S21, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted, and the process proceeds to the next step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether or not the night frame opening fraud notification is in progress. This is determined, for example, based on whether or not the night frame opening fraud occurrence flag is set in step S1008, whether or not the night frame opening fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 in step S1009, and the like.

  If it is determined in step S1012 that the night frame opening fraud notification is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1013, and it is determined whether or not the fraud notification end condition is satisfied. Here, the fraud notification end condition refers to the case where the employee confirms opening of a new frame, the case where the employee operates the RAM clear switch 182, or the case where a predetermined time elapses, or the card unit 200. It is conceivable that a predetermined command is received from. Here, regarding the confirmation of the frame opening and the operation of the RAM clear switch 182, an employee who can perform the operation or the like is registered in advance (face authentication, a dedicated card, operation of the remote control 160, etc.), and the registered employee It is set so that the fraud notification can be terminated only when an operation is performed by an employee.

  If the fraud notification end condition is satisfied in step S1013, the process proceeds to step S1014, where a command to end the nighttime frame fraud is transmitted to the effect control device 53, and the set flag is cleared. Thereby, the production control device 53 controls the display device 35 to end the display of the information that the inner frame 12 is opened at night. This is because there is a possibility of fraud when the frame opening information is ON data, so the gaming machine 10 notifies the frame opening and prompts the employee to check. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the possibility of fraud is low, and the notification of opening the frame is ended. After step S1014, the process proceeds to step S22.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the nighttime frame opening fraud notification in step S1012, the process jumps to step S1013 and step S1014 and proceeds to step S22. Also, if the fraud notification end condition is not satisfied in step S1013, the process returns to NO and jumps to step S22 to repeat the routine. When the fraud notification end condition is satisfied, the process returns to YES and step S1014. The process proceeds to step S22, after which a command for illegal termination of nighttime frame opening is transmitted to the effect control device 53, and then the process proceeds to step S22.

When the process proceeds from step S1014 or step S1012, or step S1013 to step S22, an initial value random number update process is performed in step S22. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the initial value of the random number so that it is difficult to deliberately hit the game ball at a desired timing.
Next, in step S23, the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, 2 times) is set, and in the next step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. In step S25, if it is not turned on, the process returns to step S1012. During normal operation, steps S1012 to S24 are repeated.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step S25, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks. If the determination result is affirmative, it is finally determined that a power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S26. If the determination result is negative, it is determined that a power failure has not occurred and the process returns to step S24.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the process being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing from step S26. However, in the case of the configuration of this embodiment, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on multiple times in step S25, so that the power failure monitoring signal is temporarily and instantaneously caused by noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred. There is an advantage that when it is turned on, it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In step S26, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, and then all outputs are turned off in the next step S27 (off data is output to all output ports), and then in step S28. Execute power failure information setting processing. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 described above is saved in the power failure inspection area 1, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.

After step S28, in the next step S29, a checksum of the data in the RAM 113 is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area. Next, in step S30, access to the RAM 113 is prohibited, and the process waits.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps S26-S30 is performed before a power supply voltage falls below the operating voltage of CPU111 by a power failure (a normal power supply interruption is included).
Further, as described above, when it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S27, performs the processing after step S27 described above, and finally prohibits access to the RAM 113 in step S30 and then waits. Will do.

Next, timer interrupt processing of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps S19 and S20 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle.
In this timer interrupt process, first, in step S31, register saving or interrupt prohibition is executed as necessary, and then the input process in step S32 is executed.

  In this input process, the detection signals of the above-described sensors (including the start port switches 120 and 121, the gate switch 122, the winning port switch 123, the count switch 124, etc.) are read.

  Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for a specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.

  Next, in step S33, output processing for setting and outputting the output data set in each output processing described later to the corresponding output port is executed, and then in steps S34 and S35, the random number update processing 1 and 2 are performed. Run. Here, the soft random number related to the special drawing and the soft random number related to the general drawing are updated. As soft random numbers related to special figures, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random number for determining jackpot stop symbol), variation pattern random number (random number for determining variation pattern including presence / absence of reach action), stop symbol random number ( Random number for determining a stop symbol for detachment). Here, the update of the random number is executed by increasing the random number by, for example, “1”. Therefore, each time this timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, the random number changes, and the extracted value of the soft random number keeps atrandomness.

  In this embodiment, there are three types of variation pattern random numbers: variation pattern random numbers 1-3. Among these, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the second half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a detailed presentation distribution (for example, plus one frame) from the reach system. The special pattern stops or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the variation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation (variation before the start of reach). is there. In addition, the variation pattern random number may directly determine all of the variation modes, but in the present embodiment, a specific mode is determined by the effect control device 53. For example, only the variation time and reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the production control device 53 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and reach system.

  Next, timer update processing is performed in step S36. Thereby, the update of various timers handled by the processing in the game program is performed in an integrated manner. For example, the initial value setting, value determination, and processing based on the determination result are performed by another routine. However, if the initial value is set, the update may be performed by the timer update processing.

Next, an error monitoring process is executed in step S37. This is a process for monitoring an abnormality of the switch, fraud to the gaming machine 10, and the like. It should be noted that illegal winnings other than when the special winning opening 29a and the public power supply 26 are not open are monitored by the process of step S39 described later.
For example, the types of errors monitored by this error monitoring process include switch abnormality (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.), vibration fraud, and radio wave fraud. Other errors include a card unit unconnected error, which is monitored by card unit connection confirmation processing (details will be described later).

  Next, the process proceeds to step S38, and it is determined whether the account is being settled or rested based on the later-described settlement control process number or break control process number. For example, if the settlement control process number is any of 2 to 4, it is determined that settlement is in progress, and if the break control process number is any of 2 to 3, it is determined that a break is in progress. If the settlement control process number is 1, it is determined that the settlement is not being performed, and if the break control process number is 1, it is determined that the rest is not being performed.

  If the payment is being made or during a break, the process jumps from step S39 to step S41 and proceeds to step S42. This is to jump to step S42 without executing steps S39 to S41 related to the progress of the game in order to prevent the enclosed ball game from being performed during settlement or rest.

  If it is not being settled or resting, the process proceeds to step S39, and a winning mouth switch monitoring process is executed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors the input flags (the start opening switches 120 and 121, the winning opening switch 123, and the count switch 124 in the special figure) set as described above. For example, the input flag of the count switch 124 is set. If so, processing such as addition of the number of balls of 15 prize balls (prize grant) is executed.

  Next, in step S40, special figure game processing is performed. In the special figure game process, overall control of the special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (start condition of the change display game) is established, processing for determining a jackpot random number, setting a combination of special symbols to stop (result form), and setting a change form of the special figure Is done.

  Here, when the variation start condition is satisfied, when the start-up prize is received in the waiting state and the variation display game is started, the variation display game ends with losing, the start memory is stored, and the variation display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the jackpot is over, the start-up memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.

  In this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 53 is set in accordance with the game state of the special display variable display game.

  Next, in step S41, processing for the usual variable display game is performed. That is, processing for setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 53 or the like according to the state of the usual variable display game is performed.

  After step S41, the process proceeds to step S42. The process proceeds to step S42 in addition to the case where the process proceeds through step S41, as described above, sometimes the determination result in step S38 is YES. In step S42, external information editing processing is executed. This is to edit data transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 80 in order to output various game information controlled by the game control device 54 to external devices such as the hall computer 150 and the card unit 200. It is.

Next, display editing processing is performed in step S43. This performs processing related to various displays (for example, various displays of the collective display device 36, winning display device 37, and LED display). In this display editing process, the collective display device 36 is configured with the special figure symbol determined in the special figure game process in step S40, the regular figure symbol determined in the normal figure game process in step S41, and other information. Processing for displaying on various indicators and LEDs is also included. Also included is a process for the winning display device 37 to notify the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening (turn on the corresponding LED, display the number, etc.).
Thereafter, in order to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared at step S44, the register saved at step S45 is restored, the interrupt is permitted at step S46, and the process is interrupted at the interruption (returned). .

Next, the winning opening switch monitoring process S39 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the start opening switch winning monitoring process (step S51), the other hole switch winning monitoring process (step S52), the large winning opening switch fraud & winning monitoring process (step S53), and the general electric winning switch The fraud & winning prize monitoring process (step S54) is sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

Here, in the start port switch winning monitoring process, the input flag of the first start port switch 120 is monitored, and when this input flag is set, the first start winning port 2 is set for winning. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 80 in order to execute an award grant process for increasing the number of possessed balls by a predetermined number of prize balls.
In the other hole switch winning monitoring process, the input flag of the winning opening switch 123 is monitored, and when this input flag is set, a predetermined number of winning balls set for winning in the general winning openings 27a to 27d. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 80 in order to execute an award grant process for increasing the number of balls possessed by that amount.

  In the big prize opening switch fraud & prize monitoring process, the input flag of the count switch 124 is monitored, and when this input flag is set, a predetermined number of winning balls set for winning in the big prize opening 29a. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 80 in order to execute an award grant process for increasing the number of balls possessed by that amount. Further, in this big prize opening switch fraud & winning monitoring process, although details are omitted, a process for detecting fraud with respect to the big prize opening 29a (for example, if there is an input to the count switch 124 when the big prize opening is not open). Also, a process for determining that a winning prize fraud has occurred is executed.

  Further, in the power transmission prize opening switch fraud & prize winning monitoring process, the input flag of the second start opening switch 121 is monitored, and if this input flag is set, the winning for the second start opening 26 is set. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 80 in order to execute a prize granting process for increasing the number of possessed balls by a predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, although the details are omitted in this power transmission prize opening switch fraud & winning monitoring process, a process for detecting fraud with respect to the second start opening 26 (the general power winning opening) (for example, the state where the second start opening 26 is not open). Then, when the second start port switch 121 is input, the process of causing the occurrence of unauthorized power transmission is also executed.

  In this routine, if the fraud verification flag such as the nighttime frame opening fraud flag described above is set, the winning of the ball for each winning mouth is detected, but the number of winning balls or balls held based on the winning In order not to perform the addition of the command, it is set not to transmit the command to the payout control device 80 (even if the command is transmitted, the payout control device 80 does not pay out the winning ball). good). If fraud is detected, this detection is valid, and a command is transmitted to the production control device 53 for notification, or a command indicating that fraud has been detected is transmitted to the card unit 200. You may make it do.

Next, the display editing process S43 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a winning display editing process (step S55) and a special figure / general chart / game state display editing process (step S56) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

In the winning display editing process, processing related to the display of the winning display device 37 is executed.
In the special chart / general chart / game state display editing process, display data is set for performing various displays on each display unit constituting the collective display device 36.

Next, the winning display editing process in step S55 of the display editing process (FIG. 20) of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, if the winning display control timer is not “0” in step S61, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and the winning display control timer is “0” in step S62. It is determined whether or not. This is because the winning display control timer is set to an initial value (for example, 1500 ms in the normal mode) in step S71, which will be described later, and "-1" is updated (decremented) from the initial value. It is determined whether or not “0” has been reached.

  If the decision result in the step S62 is YES, the process advances to a succeeding step S63 to judge whether or not the winning display read counter is equal to the winning display light counter. This is to determine whether or not the current number of winning balls has been read out from the winning display number storage area storing the number of winnings. When the determination result in step S63 is NO, it is determined that the winning display read counter is not equal to the winning display light counter and the current winning ball number has not been read from the winning display number storage area, and the process proceeds to step S64.

  On the other hand, when the determination result in step S63 is YES, it is determined that the winning display read counter is equal to the winning display light counter and the current winning ball number has been read from the winning display number storage area, and the process branches to step S75. In step S75, the turn-off data is saved in the winning display output data area, and then the process returns. As a result of the processing in step S75, the winning ball display on the winning display device 37 disappears.

  When the process proceeds to step S64, first, the winning display lead counter is updated (incremented) by "+1" in step S64, and then in step S65, the current winning ball from the winning display number storage area corresponding to the winning display lead counter is updated. Load a number. Next, in step S66, winning display pattern data corresponding to the number of prize balls loaded in step S65 is set.

The winning display pattern data is data for determining which one of the seven segments is to be lit (or blinked) because the winning display device 37 is composed of two seven-segment LEDs. For example, when displaying the number of winning balls = 10, the lighting data of each segment is set so that “10” of two digits is displayed by two LEDs.
In step S67, the winning display pattern data set in step S66 is saved in the winning display pattern data area, and then the process proceeds to step S68.

In step S68, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the special mode.
The special mode means that the jackpot, the probability change, the short time (medium power support: low probability support). On the other hand, the normal mode is a normal gaming state other than the special mode.
If it is not in the special mode in step S68, the process proceeds to step S69, "1" is saved as the winning display lighting time number, and then the process proceeds to step S71. When the winning display lighting time number = “1”, the winning display by the winning display device 37 is controlled at a timing of 1 second ON (lighted) and 0.5 seconds OFF (lighted off).

  In this case, the winning display control timer is set to “375” as an initial value. This is because the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, so “375” × 4 ms = 1500 ms, and from 1500 ms to 500 ms (“250” × 4 ms = 1000 ms) is ON, and the subsequent 500 ms (“125” × 4 ms = This is because the winning display can be controlled at the timing of 1 second ON (lighted) and 0.5 seconds OFF (lighted off) by turning OFF the (500 ms). Accordingly, the winning display is ON (lit) for 1 second while this routine is repeated “250” times from the initial value 1500 ms, and then the winning display is 0.5 seconds while this routine is repeated “125” times. Control is performed at the timing of OFF (light-off).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S68 that the special mode is in effect, the process proceeds to step S70, where “2” is saved as the winning display lighting time number, and then the process proceeds to step S71. When the winning display lighting time number = “2”, the winning display by the winning display device 37 is controlled at a timing of 0.5 seconds ON (lights on) and 0.1 seconds OFF (lights off).

  In this case, the winning display control timer is set to “150” as an initial value. This is because the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, so that “150” × 4 ms = 600 ms, from 600 ms to 100 ms (“125” × 4 ms = 500 ms) is ON, and the subsequent 100 ms (“25” × 4 ms = This is because the winning display can be controlled at the timing of 0.5 seconds ON (lights on) and 0.1 seconds OFF (lights off).

Accordingly, while the routine is repeated “125” times from the initial value of 600 ms, the winning display is turned on (lit) for 0.5 seconds, and thereafter, the winning display is 0. 0 while the routine is repeated “25” times. Control is performed at a timing of OFF (extinguishment) for 1 second.
In the special mode, the winning display time by the winning display device 37 is set to ON (lighted) for 0.5 seconds, so that it is shorter than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds).

  That is, the number of game balls fired by operating the firing handle 18 is regulated to be 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, so the firing control circuit 86 controls the ball feed solenoid 172 to set 100 shots / minute ( It is designed to be within the range of approximately one second in 0.6 seconds (s), but the winning display time by the winning display device 37 is 0.5 seconds, compared to the firing interval of 0.6 seconds. Since the ON (lighted) is shorter, the number of winning balls displayed by the winning display device 37 does not stagnate even if the winning balls associated with winning a prize continue in a big hit or the like.

  As described above, when the process proceeds from step S69 or step S70 to step S71, the timer initial value corresponding to the winning display lighting time number is saved in the winning display control timer area in step S71. As described above, in the normal mode, since the winning display lighting time number = “1”, the winning display control timer is saved to “375” as an initial value. Accordingly, since the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, “375” × 4 ms = 1500 ms, and the winning display is ON (lit) for 1 second while this routine is repeated “250” times from the initial value 1500 ms. Thereafter, while this routine is repeated “125” times, the winning display is controlled at a timing of 0.5 seconds OFF (lights off).

  In the special mode, since the winning display lighting time number is “2”, the winning display control timer is saved to “150” as an initial value. Thus, since the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, “150” × 4 ms = 600 ms, and the winning display is ON for 0.5 seconds while this routine is repeated “125” times from the initial value 600 ms ( After that, while the routine is repeated “25” times, the winning display is controlled at the timing of OFF (extinguish) for 0.1 seconds.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S72, in which the winning display pattern data corresponding to the number of winning balls set in step S66 is loaded, and in step S73, the winning display pattern data loaded in step S72 is saved in the winning display output data area. Then return. Thereby, the display of the winning display device 37 is controlled according to the winning display pattern data set in step S66 at the control timing of either the winning display lighting time number = “1” or “2”. The fact that there was a win and the number of winning balls corresponding to the win are notified.

  On the other hand, if the winning display output control timer is not “0” in step S62, the process branches to step S74 to determine whether the winning display control timer is in the lighting section. This is to determine whether the winning display is an ON (lighted) section (period), and the determination value in step S74 differs depending on the value of the lighting time number. If the determination result of step S74 is an ON section, the process proceeds to step S72, and win display pattern data corresponding to the number of winning balls is loaded, and then the process of step S73 is performed. Thereby, the section where the winning display is ON (lighted) continues. If the winning display control timer is not in the lighting section in step S74, the process proceeds to step S75, the extinction data is saved in the winning display output data area, and the process returns. As a result, the winning ball display on the winning display device 37 disappears.

Next, the error monitoring process S37 in the timer interrupt process (shown in FIG. 18) of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the routine returns after executing the switch abnormality monitoring process in step S81, the radio wave fraud monitoring process in step S82, and the vibration fraud monitoring process in step S83. The switch abnormality monitoring process is a process for monitoring an abnormality such as a connector disconnection or a switch failure. The radio fraud monitoring process and the vibration fraud monitoring process are processes for monitoring radio wave fraud and vibration fraud, respectively.

Next, the control contents of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIGS.
23 and 24 are flowcharts showing main processing of the payout control device 80.
This main process starts based on the fact that the CPU 81 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 that supplies power to the payout control device 80 is turned on, a reset signal is issued from the power supply 58 at a predetermined timing (in a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When input to the control device 80 and the reset terminal of the CPU 81 is turned on, and then the reset signal is released, the CPU 81 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released, and the CPU 81 is activated.

  Similarly, when the power is restored from the power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released, and the CPU 81 is activated. Further, when the operator wants to initialize the RAM 83 and the like of the payout control device 80, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 182 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 58. There is. Note that the RAM 83 is denoted as RWM in FIGS.

  When the CPU 81 is started, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuits (including the serial port) built in the CPU 81 are initialized, and access to the RAM 83 is permitted. Then, an off signal (a signal corresponding to “0” of the binary signal) is output to all output ports (steps S101 to S104). Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S104 is provided here just in case. .

  Next, another board activation waiting timer is set in step S104a. This is a timer that sets a time sufficient for starting another control device (for example, the game control device 54) other than the payout control device 80, so that the payout control device 80 is more than the game control device 54. This is to prevent the game control device 54 from being activated when the command relating to the management information transmission request is transmitted to the game control device 54 first. If the management information transmission request command is transmitted to the game control device 54 due to the setting of the activation waiting timer, the game control device 54 can be surely received.

  The activation waiting timer is also set in the game control device 54 as described above, but the timer value is set in the payout control device 80 rather than the timer value set in the game control device 54. Is longer. This is due to the order to be activated, that is, the order in which the commands are transmitted. When the power to the gaming machine is turned on, the payout control device 80, which is the starting point of processing between the control devices, starts up lastly, This is because the game control device 54 and the effect control device 53 are in a state in which they can be surely activated and receive necessary commands.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S104b to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. Here, the determination is made using, for example, a power failure detection signal, and if the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. If it is determined in step S104b that no power failure has occurred, the other board activation wait timer is updated (decremented) by "-1" in step S104c. Next, in step S104d, it is determined whether or not the other substrate activation wait timer has become "0". If not, the process returns to step S104b to repeat the loop. Then, the loop is repeated, and if the other board activation waiting timer becomes “0”, the determination result of step S104d becomes YES, and the process proceeds to step S105 and subsequent steps. Accordingly, at this time, the respective units of the gaming machine 10 are sequentially activated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S104b that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S145 shown in FIG. 24, and the processes after step S145 are performed. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later). If no power failure has occurred and the process proceeds to step S105, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed. If the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, the process jumps to step S111. If the power is not turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, it is determined whether or not all values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 83 are normal power failure inspection area check data, and if normal, it is determined that the power failure is restored (when the power failure is restored). If it is abnormal (if not normally stored), the process jumps to step S111. In this step S106, since it is determined whether or not a normal power failure is restored based on a plurality of check data in this way, the determination as to whether or not a normal power failure is restored is highly reliable.

  Next, in step S107, a checksum of data in the RAM 83 (RWM) is calculated, and in step S108, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 83 is corrupted), the process jumps to step S111, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S110.

In step S110, a process for power failure recovery (initial value setting) is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. After step S110, the process proceeds to step S113.
If the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 182 in step S105, or if the process jumps from step S106 or S108 to step S111, the processing from step S111 including step S111 is performed.

  In step S111, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access-prohibited area) in the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80 is performed. That is, in step S111, all areas of the RAM 113 to be used are cleared. At this time, processing related to frame opening information is executed in processing after step S113 described later. However, when the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, processing related to RAM clearing is performed before processing related to this frame opening information. In any case, the frame opening information is not cleared even when the power is turned on.

In step S112, the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized. In step S113, the frame opening information is read and saved as state comparison data. The frame opening information may be stored in the RAM 83 or a register of the CPU 81.
Thus, by reading the frame opening information after the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, the frame opening information is not cleared after reading.

  That is, in this embodiment, since the output signal of the inner frame opening switch 126 is read by the payout control device 80, the frame open information is stored in the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80 or the like. Since the RAM clear is performed before the frame opening information is stored in the RAM 83 or the like, or before the frame opening information is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200, the RAM clear switch 182 is temporarily set. Even if it is turned on, the frame opening information can be reliably read, stored and transmitted.

  In step S114, the number of frame opening information checks is set. This is because the reliability may be lowered if the frame opening information is read only once. Therefore, the reliability of the frame opening information is obtained by executing the reading a plurality of times and comparing it with the state comparison data. It is what raises. The number of checks for frame opening information is set to 2 or 3, but it may be more than that.

  Subsequently, the frame opening information is read in step S115, and the read frame opening information is compared with the state comparison data in step S116. This is because the first frame opening information read in advance is stored as the state comparison data, so that the frame opening information is compared with the state comparison data stored in step S115. This is for checking whether there is an error in the information (for example, the read frame opening information is not correct due to the influence of noise or the like).

  In step S116, if the read frame opening information is not equal to the state comparison data, the process returns to step S113 to repeat the loop. When the loop is repeated and it is determined that the read frame opening information is equal to the state comparison data, it is determined whether or not the process goes from step S116 to step S117 and the same state continues for the number of times of frame opening information check. Here, the number of checks is the number set in step S114. If the decision result in the step S117 is NO, the process returns to the step S115 to repeat the loop, and if the same state is continued as many times as the number of frame opening information checks, the decision result in the step S117 becomes YES and the frame opening information is fixed. The process proceeds to step S118.

  Whether or not a power failure has occurred in step S121, which will be described later, is determined using a power failure detection signal. If the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. On the other hand, the frame opening information read in step S115 is repeatedly obtained as described above until the frame is turned on (opened) or the frame is turned off (closed), so that the frame opening information is accurately obtained. Yes. In addition, regarding the power failure detection here, as described above, from step S23 to step S25 in FIG. 17, the loop may be repeated as described above until the power failure detection is continued for the number of checks, and the determination may be made more accurately. .

  In step S118, the confirmed frame opening information is saved. Next, in step S119, the reception interrupt of the game control device 54 is permitted, and the reception interrupt of the card unit 200 is also permitted. Furthermore, in step S120, a management information transmission request command is transmitted to the game control device 54.

Next, in step S121, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred. Here, the determination is made using, for example, a power failure detection signal, and if the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. If it is determined in step S121 that no power failure has occurred, it is determined in step S122 whether or not management information has been received. If not, the process returns to step S121 and the loop is repeated. If the loop is repeated and received, the determination result in step S122 is YES, and the process proceeds to step S123.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S121 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S145 shown in FIG. 24, and the processes in and after step S145 are performed. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later).

In subsequent step S123, it is determined again whether or not a power failure has occurred. If it is determined in step S123 that no power failure has occurred, it is determined in step S124 whether or not management information has been received from the card unit 200. If not received, the process returns to step S123 to repeat the loop. If the loop is repeated and received, the determination result in step S124 is YES, and the process proceeds to step S125 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S123 that a power failure has occurred, as in the case where the determination result in step S121 is NO, the process jumps to step S145 shown in FIG. 24 and performs the processes in and after step S145.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S125, and gaming machine information output editing processing is performed (details will be described later). Thereafter, in step S126, it is determined whether or not the RAM is cleared. For this determination, a flag is set when the RAM is cleared in step S111 described above. If the RAM is cleared, the process proceeds to step S127, a command related to RAM clear is transmitted to the card unit 200, and the process proceeds to step S128 following FIG. On the other hand, if the RAM is not cleared, the process jumps to step S127 and proceeds to step S128 following FIG.

  The command related to RAM clear in step S127 is a command for enabling the main controller 221 to clear the RAM when there is a RAM clear instruction. Based on this command, the game history stored in the card unit 200 is cleared by clearing the RAM on the gaming machine 10 side. However, the frame opening information is not cleared even on the card unit 200 side. In the above-described processing, when the frame opening information is read first, the frame opening information storage area should not be cleared when the RAM is cleared.

  Then, in step S128 following FIG. 24, a command related to the frame opening information is transmitted to the card unit 200. The command related to the frame opening information is to determine the frame opening information, and when there is evidence that the inner frame 12 or the glass frame 13 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud. Command for notifying the card unit 200 of errors and issuing an instruction to output error information to the hall computer 150 (moreover, it may be possible not to lend a ball). If the inner frame 12 is not opened, it is determined that there is no possibility of fraud and that a command is issued to the effect that there is no problem even if the ball lending to the card unit 200 is performed.

  In the card unit 200, the command related to the frame opening information received from the payout control device 80 indicates that there is evidence that the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 are opened (for example, the frame is opened at night) (incorrect If there is a possibility of error), as described above, the error may be notified by voice or the like in addition to the error notification by the notification lamp 204, the display input device 203, or the like. In the gaming machine 10, the payout control device 80 may flash the error display LED 88, the operation display device 30, the count switch LED 313, the break switch effective display LED 314, etc., or notify the error. You may do it.

  Next, after setting the transmission control timer in step S129, the process proceeds to step S130 to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. Here, the determination is made using, for example, a power failure detection signal, and if the power failure detection signal is on, the determination that a power failure has occurred is confirmed. If it is determined in step S130 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S145, and the processes in and after step S145 are performed. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S130 that no power failure has occurred, the process proceeds to step S131, and in step S131, it is determined whether there is a frame opening information reception notification from the card unit 200. Here, not only the frame opening information reception notification but also the management information reception notification may be received. If the reception notification indicating that the frame opening information has been normally received is received in step S131, the process jumps to step S136, and the processes after step S136 are performed. On the other hand, if the reception notification indicating that the frame opening information has been normally received is not received, the transmission control timer is updated (decremented) by “−1” in step S132, and the timer is set to “0” in step S133. It is determined whether it has been typed up.

When the transmission control timer expires, the determination result in step S133 is YES, and the process proceeds to step S134 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, if the time is not up, the determination result in step S133 is NO, the process returns to step S130, and the loop is repeated.
After proceeding to step S134, a frame release information transmission error flag is set. This frame opening information transmission error flag indicates that the frame opening information could not be transmitted by the time set by the transmission control timer (the reception notification indicating that the card unit 200 frame opening information has been normally received is received). This flag is used for notifying the error by the payout control device 80 itself. The error notification here may be performed by turning on or blinking the notification lamp 204.

Then, after setting the frame release information transmission error flag in step S134, a frame release information transmission error command is transmitted to the game control device 54 in step S135. Here, the frame opening information transmission error command is a command transmitted from the game control device 54 to the game control device 54 in order to transmit a frame opening information transmission error notification command to the effect control device 53 to perform notification. is there.
Thereafter, the process jumps to step S136, and in step S137, a command corresponding to the frame opening information is transmitted to the game control device 54, and the processes after step S138 are performed.

  On the other hand, if the reception notification indicating that the frame opening information has been normally received from the card unit 200 is received in step S131, a frame opening information transmission normal command is transmitted to the game control device 54 in step S136. If a command related to the frame opening information is transmitted to the card unit 200 and a command indicating that the command is normally received is transmitted from the card unit 200, it is determined that the transmission of the frame opening information has been completed normally. .

  Thereafter, in step S137, a command corresponding to the frame opening information is transmitted to the game control device 54, and the processes after step S138 are performed. The command corresponding to the frame opening information is a command indicating the same content as that transmitted to the card unit 200 in step S128 described above, and the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 are opened (for example, the frame is opened at night). The determination result is transmitted regardless of whether or not.

  Next, in step S138, a ball polishing motor operation timer is set in step S138. Next, in step S139, for example, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) provided in the CPU 81 is activated. Here, CTC is a circuit for timer interruption.

  Next, in step S140, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted, and in the next step S141, the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, 2 times) is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on in the next step S142. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S143 for final determination of power failure, and if it is not on, the process returns to step S141. During normal operation, steps S141 to S142 are repeated.

  And when it progresses to step S143, it will determine whether the ON state of a power failure monitoring signal is continued by the number of times of the check, and if this determination result is affirmative, it will finally determine that a power failure has occurred, and proceed to step S144. If negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step S142.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the process being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing from step S144. However, with the configuration of the present embodiment, since the power failure monitoring signal is checked for the ON state a plurality of times in step S143, the power failure monitoring signal is temporarily and instantaneously caused by noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred. There is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred when the power is turned on.

In step S144, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited. Then, in next step S145, all outputs are turned off (off data is output to all output ports), and then in step S146. Execute power failure information setting processing. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 described above is saved in the power failure inspection area 1, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.
After step S146, in the next step S147, a checksum of the data in the RAM 83 is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area. Then, in step S148, access to the RAM 83 is prohibited, and the process waits.

Next, the gaming machine information output editing process S125 of the main process (FIG. 23) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, a start code is written in the serial transmission buffer in step S151. The start code is a code for causing the receiving card unit 200 or the like to specify that serial communication is started.

Next, in step S152, the chip identification code of the game control device 54 is written into the serial transmission buffer.
In step S153, the chip code (chip ID) of the game control device 54 is read and written to the serial transmission buffer. The chip code (chip ID) is a code indicating individual identification information (unique ID) of the IC chip constituting the CPU 111.

Next, in step S154, the manufacturer identification code of the game control device 54 is written in the serial transmission buffer.
In step S155, the maker code of the game control device 54 is read and written to the serial transmission buffer.

Next, in step S156, the model identification code of the game control device 54 is written in the serial transmission buffer.
In step S157, the model code of the game control device 54 is read and written to the serial transmission buffer.

Next, in step S158, the chip identification code of the payout control device 80 is written in the serial transmission buffer.
In step S159, the chip code of the payout control device 80 is read out and written into the serial transmission buffer.

Next, in step S160, the manufacturer identification code of the payout control device 80 is written in the serial transmission buffer.
In step S161, the manufacturer code of the payout control device 80 is read and written to the serial transmission buffer.

Finally, in step S162, the type identification code of the payout control device 80 is written into the serial transmission buffer.
In step S163, the type identification code of the payout control device 80 is read, written in the serial transmission buffer, and the process returns.

  Through the above gaming machine information output editing process, the unique ID is acquired and output to the card unit 200 or the like. Of the above-described codes, “XX identification code” is a code indicating which information (code) is to be transmitted from now on, and is not specific to a solid but a common code. After writing this code, information specific to the corresponding piece is written.

  In FIG. 25, all the codes output at the output timing are the same. However, if the codes to be output differ depending on the timing, it is difficult to determine what code is output if there is no identification code. Such a configuration is adopted. Therefore, even if a code is output at different timings, it is possible to determine whether the code belongs to the game control device 54, the payout control device 80, a chip code, or a manufacturer code. It has become.

Next, timer interruption processing of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
In this timer interrupt process, first, in step S171, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary, and then the input process in step S172 is executed. In this input process, the detection signals of the aforementioned sensors are read. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for a specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.

  Next, in step S173, an output process for setting and outputting output data set in each process described later to the corresponding output port is executed, and then a card unit connection confirmation process is performed in step S174. The card unit connection confirmation process is for confirming whether the card unit 200 is turned on, whether communication between the card unit 200 and the gaming machine 10 can be normally performed (details will be described later).

  Next, timer update processing is performed in step S175. Thereby, the update of various timers handled by the processing in the payout program is performed in an integrated manner. For example, the initial value setting, value determination, and processing based on the determination result are performed by another routine. However, if the initial value is set, the update may be performed by the timer update processing.

Next, switch monitoring processing is performed in step S176. In this method, the input flag set as described above is monitored, and processing for enclosing ball control such as subtraction of the number of held balls and increase / decrease of the number of surface balls accompanying launching is performed (details will be described later).
Next, an error monitoring process is executed in step S177. This is a process for monitoring an undetected error of each sensor described above, the open state of the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13, and the like.

  Next, a firing permission signal editing process is performed in step S178. This sets the firing permission signal on data when the firing is possible, and sets the firing permission signal off data (cannot be fired) when the card unit 200 is not connected. This includes, for example, a forced firing process in which a ball remaining at the launch tip (the launch rod is actuated by the launch solenoid 173) at the time of a power failure is fired when the power is turned on (details will be described later).

  Next, in step S179, it is determined whether or not all card unit communication line confirmations in step S174 are OK. This is because the board (card unit connection terminal plate 52) for wiring connection between the gaming machine 10 side (payout control device 80 side) and the card unit 200 side is connected, and the confirmation result of the communication line is OK. The process branches depending on whether or not. If the card unit communication line confirmation is OK, step S180, step S181, step S182, and step S183 are executed in sequence, and the process proceeds to step S184. If not OK, the process jumps to step S184 without executing steps S180 to S183. .

  Since steps S180 to S183 are processes for substantially starting and progressing the game, as will be described later, if the determination in step S179 is negative, the game is not started and does not proceed. means. That is, in this embodiment, the game is not substantially advanced unless the communication line between the game control device 54 and the card unit 200 is normally connected. As a result, it becomes difficult to illegally acquire the number of balls by illegal input to the game control device 54 using this communication line, and the effect of improving security can be obtained.

  If all card unit communication line confirmations are OK in step S179, a ball feed control process is performed in step S180. This includes setting the ON data of the ball feed solenoid 172 when the conditions for sending the ball to the launch position are complete, and processing to send the ball to the launch position, as well as powering the ball remaining at the launch pad during a power failure A process of turning off the ball feed solenoid 172 in order to cope with an empty shot at the time of charging is also included.

  Next, in step S181, settlement / rest control processing is performed. This is to monitor the behavior of the break switch 312 and the payment instruction from the card unit 200 and perform processing related to payment and break (details will be described later). Next, card unit reception analysis processing is performed in step S182. This is to analyze the signal received from the card unit 200 by the payout control device 80.

  In step S183, a card unit command transmission process is performed. This is to transmit a command for displaying the number of balls to the card unit 200 from the gaming machine 10 side, a gaming machine information command corresponding to various gaming information, a gaming machine error information command corresponding to various error information, and the like. Is for. Accordingly, the number of balls held can be displayed on the operation display device 30 controlled by the card unit 200, or necessary information can be transmitted to the hall computer 150 or the like via the card unit 200.

Thereafter, external information editing processing is performed in step S184. This is a process of editing various game information in order to send commands to the card unit 200.
Next, display editing processing is performed in step S185. This performs processing related to various displays (for example, error display LED 88, counting switch LED 313, break switch effective display LED 314, etc.).

Next, a ball polishing motor control process is performed in step S186. This is a process for operating and inactivating the ball polishing motor (that is, the polishing apparatus motor 59).
After step S186, in order to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step S187, the saved register is restored in step S188, the interrupt is permitted in step S189, and the process interrupted at the time of interruption Return to (Return).

Next, the card unit connection confirmation processing S174 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 26) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, connection confirmation processing is first performed in step S191. In this connection confirmation process, the voltage of the input (VL input) connected to the power supply line of the card unit 200 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is turned on (that is, the voltage is higher than the specified value). Whether or not) is determined. If the voltage of the VL input is on as a result of this determination, for example, a card unit connection confirmation flag indicating that the card unit 200 is powered on and connected to the game control device 54 is set.

Next, in step S192, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine 10 is turned on. If the power is turned on, steps S193 to S195 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step S196. The process returns without executing S193 and subsequent steps.
Note that the power-on period may be, for example, the period until it can be determined normal in steps S193 to S195, or a period other than that may be set.
In step S193, the communication line confirmation process 1 is executed, in step S194, the communication line confirmation process 2 is executed, and in step S195, the communication line confirmation process 3 is executed.

  Here, the communication line confirmation process 1 is a process for confirming whether or not communication is properly possible in the communication line of the communication method 1. The communication line confirmation process 2 is a process for confirming whether or not communication is properly possible in the communication line of the communication method 2. The communication line confirmation process 3 is a process for confirming whether or not communication is properly possible in the communication line of the communication method 3.

Each communication method is as follows.
The first communication method is a communication method for transmitting / receiving unencrypted data (so-called plaintext) (a method that does not perform at least hardware encryption and decryption).
The second communication method is a communication method for transmitting and receiving hardware-encrypted data. The data transmitted after being encrypted on the game control device 54 side can be decrypted on the card unit 200 side, and on the card unit 200 side. This is a communication method that allows the game control device 54 to decrypt the data transmitted after encryption. The ID-related communication includes transmission / reception of a card ID of a game card and the like.
The third communication method is a communication method in which only data transmitted on the game control device 54 side can be encrypted, and only data received on the game control device 54 side can be decrypted, and the encryption circuit is also decrypted on the card unit 200 side. This is a communication method in which neither encryption nor decryption is possible because there is no encryption circuit.

  In addition, each confirmation process of step S193 thru | or S195 determines whether communication is possible appropriately, for example by actually transmitting / receiving the information for confirmation. Further, the confirmation processes in steps S193 to S195 are all the same and can be shared. Although the three types of communication methods 1 to 3 are different in terminal, since encryption and decryption are performed by hardware (not performed by software), it is not necessary to change the confirmation processing method and can be shared. .

  In step S196, if the confirmation results of all the card unit communication lines (communication lines 1 to 3 of communication methods 1 to 3) in steps S193 to S195 are OK (that is, communication is possible properly), the process proceeds to step S197. In step S197, the process returns after transmitting the activation notification command to the card unit 200. If any one of these card unit communication line confirmation results is not OK, the process returns without executing step S197. As a result, if any one of the card unit communication line confirmation results is not OK, steps S180 to S183 (FIG. 26) are controlled not to be executed by the processing of step S179 described above, and the game control device The activation notification command is not transmitted from 54 to the card unit 200.

If this activation notification command is not transmitted to the card unit 200, the card unit 200 basically does not operate (for example, processing for lending a ball is not performed).
Further, the game control device 54 receives the card unit 200 from the card unit 200 in this card unit connection confirmation process (that is, step S174 of the timer interrupt process) until the communication with the card unit 200 is confirmed to be normal in the steps S193 to S195. If the command is received and it is confirmed that the command is normal, the command is received from the card unit 200 in the card unit reception analysis process (that is, step S182 of the timer interrupt process).

Next, the switch monitoring process S176 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 26) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, a launch ball detection switch monitoring process is performed in step S201, and then a foul ball detection switch monitoring process is performed in step S202. Next, an out ball detection switch monitoring process is executed in step S203, a count switch monitoring process is executed in step S204, and then the process returns. Details of each process will be described later.

Next, the shot ball detection switch monitoring process S201 in the switch monitoring process (FIG. 28) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S211 whether or not there has been an input to the fired ball detection switch 161 (that is, whether or not a game ball to be fired has been detected). If there is an input, the process proceeds to step S212, and the value of the number of balls held is updated (decremented) by “−1”. The number of balls held here is total ball number information managed inside the payout control device 80. The process of step S212 is performed because it is necessary to subtract one from the number of balls as the ball is launched.

Next, the process proceeds to step S213, and the updated number of possessed balls is updated (decremented) by “−1”. The updated number of balls is information on the number of balls that has changed within a transmission interval (for example, 200 ms) for transmission to the card unit 200, and this is displayed on the operation display device 30 under the control of the card unit 200. Will be. As the ball is launched, the number of updated balls is subtracted by one.
Next, in step S214, the value of the board ball number is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the process proceeds to step S215.

  According to the routine from step S211 to step S214, each time one game ball is fired, the number of board balls is incremented by 1, and the number of balls held is decremented by one. The number of board balls is the number of game balls that have been launched and not collected, that is, game balls that are falling mainly on the game board 20 (in the game area 22). Here, the process of step S212 constitutes a firing subtraction process for reducing the number of possessed balls (game value) in response to the game balls being launched into the game area.

  Next, in step S215, the number-of-balls display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step S216, “−1” is saved in the display-based updated ball number storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls that accompanies the launch of the ball on the operation display device 30, so that the value of the ball number display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1” and advanced. “−1” associated with the launch of the ball is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area corresponding to the light counter, and the stored “−1” is subtracted from the display possession ball number, To do.

That is, the change amount for displaying the number of balls for display on the operation display device 30 for each change event is stored in the display updated ball number storage area. Since the number decreases, “−1” is stored in the display updated number-of-balls storage area.
After step S216, the process returns. As a result, the number of balls held is updated by subtraction by “1”, the result is transmitted to the card unit 200 every predetermined time, and the display of the operation display device 30 is updated under the control of the card unit 200.

  In this routine, between step S212 and step S213, it is determined whether or not the above-described fraud verification flag such as the nighttime frame opening fraud occurrence flag is set, and this fraud verification flag is set. In such a case, it may be set so that the process returns without going through the processing after step S213. Thereby, when the fraud verification flag such as the nighttime frame opening fraud occurrence flag is set, it is possible not to add the number of balls.

Next, the foul ball detection switch monitoring process S202 in the switch monitoring process (FIG. 28) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S221 whether there is an input to the foul ball detection switch 162 (that is, whether a foul ball has been detected). If there is no input, the process returns. If there is an input, the process proceeds to step S222 to update (increment) the value of the number of possessed balls by “+1”, and update (increment) the number of retained balls by “+1” in the next step S223.

  Here, the foul ball is a game ball that has been launched but has not reached the game area 22, so that one ball is collected, and one is added to the updated number of possessed balls. As a result, the number of updated balls is increased by “1” corresponding to the foul ball, and the display of the operation display device 30 is updated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S224, and the value of the board ball number is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
According to the routine from step S221 to step S224, each time a foul ball (a game ball that has been launched but has not reached the game area 22) is collected, the number of board balls is decremented by one, One number is added. The reason for adding the number of balls is because it was a foul, so that there was no fire so as not to lose the player.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S225, where the number-of-balls-displaying light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. In step S226, “+1” is saved in the display-based updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls that accompanies the foul of the ball on the operation display device 30, so that the value of the ball count display light counter is updated (incremented) by "+1" and advanced. “+1” associated with the ball foul is stored in the display updated ball count storage area corresponding to the light counter, and the stored “+1” is added to the display ball count to obtain the display updated ball count. It is.

  That is, every time one foul ball is collected, it is necessary to add one ball number, so the value of the display updated ball number storage area is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the operation display device This is because one is added to 30 and displayed. Accordingly, the number of balls held is updated by adding “1” corresponding to the foul ball, and the result is transmitted to the card unit 200 every predetermined time, and the display of the operation display device 30 is updated by the control of the card unit 200. Will be. Note that after step S226, the process returns.

  In this routine, between step S221 and step S222, it is determined whether or not the above-described fraud verification flag such as the nighttime frame opening fraud flag is set, and this fraud verification flag is set. In such a case, it may be set to return without performing the processing from step S222. Thereby, when the fraud verification flag such as the nighttime frame opening fraud occurrence flag is set, it is possible not to add the number of balls.

Next, the out ball detection switch monitoring process S203 in the switch monitoring process (FIG. 28) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S231 whether or not there is an input to the out sphere detection switch 163 (that is, whether or not an out sphere has been detected).

  If there is an input, the process proceeds to step S232, and the value of the number of outs is updated (incremented) by "+1". In the next step S233, it is determined whether the number of outs is 10 or more. The process proceeds to step S236. If the out number is 10 or more, the value of the out number signal output count is updated (incremented) by “+1” in step S234, and the out number value is set to zero (cleared to 0) in the next step S235. The process proceeds to step S236.

  In step S236, it is determined whether or not a board surface ball number error is in progress. If a board surface ball number error is in progress (specifically, first and second board surface ball number error flags in FIG. 35 described later are set). If so, the process proceeds to step S237, and if the board surface ball number error is not in progress (specifically, if the first and second board surface ball number error flags in FIG. 35 described later are cleared), the process proceeds to step S238.

In step S237, it is determined whether or not a glass frame open error is in progress. If a glass frame open error is in progress (specifically, if a glass frame open error flag in FIG. 37 described later is set), the process returns. If the glass frame opening error is not in progress (specifically, if a glass frame opening error flag in FIG. 37 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step S238.
In step S238, the value of the board ball number is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and the process returns.

  According to this routine, every time one out ball is collected, one board ball number is subtracted. However, since it is considered that it is in the process of opening the glass frame 13 and solving the board surface ball number error (ball clogging etc. in the game area 22) when the glass frame opening error is in the board surface ball number error, The subtraction of the number of board balls in step S238 is not executed. When the operation for eliminating the board surface ball number error (ball jam in the game area 22 and the like) is completed and the glass frame 13 is closed, the board surface ball number is cleared by an error release switch monitoring process of FIG.

  Note that the out balls detected in step S231 include both game balls that have been fired and have become safe (winning) and game balls that have been out (no winning). That is, the number of outs means the number of all game balls discharged from the game area 22 and collected. The out number signal is one piece of external information output to the hall computer 150. As the out number signal, one pulse signal is output for ten out balls.

For this reason, in steps S232 to S235, the number of out balls is counted as the number of outs, and every time the number of outs reaches 10, the number of out signal output is incremented by 1, and the number of outs is cleared to zero. As a result, the number of times (the number of pulses) of outputting the out number signal (the signal for 10 out balls) is counted as the out number signal output number.
When editing of the out number signal is completed in an out number signal editing process to be described later, the out number signal output count is decremented by 1, and the edited out number signal is output in the above-described output process (step S173).

  Also, even if a board surface ball number error occurs due to the steps S236 and S237, if the glass frame 13 is not opened, step S238 is executed and the board surface ball number is updated. In other words, when the player hits the front surface of the glass frame 13 or when the game ball is resolved by the collision of the game balls, the error is released without operating the error release switch 87. Therefore, there is no trouble for both the player and the employee.

Next, the error monitoring process S177 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 26) of the payout controller 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the error release switch monitoring process in step S241, the enclosed ball number monitoring process in step S242, the board ball number error monitoring process in step S243, and the frame opening error monitoring process in step S244 are sequentially executed. Return.
Details of these processes will be described later.

Next, the error release switch monitoring process S241 in the error monitoring process (FIG. 32) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S251 whether or not the error release switch 87 has been turned on. If it has been turned on, the process proceeds to step S252, and if it has not been turned on, the process returns.

  In step S252, the operation of changing the glass frame 13 from the open state to the closed state (opening / closing operation of the glass frame 13) is performed before the error release switch 87 is turned on based on the output of the glass frame opening switch 125. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (that is, the opening / closing history of the glass frame 13 is confirmed based on the opening / closing information set in step S312 of FIG. 37 described later, for example). And when this operation | movement (opening / closing operation | movement of the glass frame 13) has been detected, it progresses to step S253, and when not detected, it returns.

  Here, as a method for canceling the error, it is possible to validate the input of the error cancel switch 87 on condition that there is a history that the glass frame 13 is in the closed state from the open state, and simply operating the error cancel switch 87 causes an error. Cannot be released. However, structurally, in order to actually operate the error release switch 87 after the glass frame 13 is closed, the inner frame 12 needs to be opened, but the opening and closing of the inner frame 12 is not described in detail. . To operate the error release switch 87 to the last, on the condition that there is a history that the glass frame 13 is opened to eliminate the error (for example, clogged balls, etc.) and then the glass frame 13 is closed, The error cancel switch 87 operation in this state is made valid so that the error can be cancelled. In order to manage more strictly, not only the error release switch 87 operation from the opening and closing of the glass frame 13 but also the completion to the subsequent opening and closing of the inner frame 12 may be used as the error cancellation condition.

  Proceeding to step S253, the information that the opening / closing operation of the glass frame 13 has been detected is cleared (that is, returned to the state where there is no such information), and then the number of board balls is cleared in step S254 (that is, Then, the data on the number of board balls is returned to zero), then the ball polishing motor operation timer is set in step S255, and then an error recovery command is transmitted to the game control device 54 in step S256, and then the process returns. The game control device 54 that has received the error recovery command indicates that the error is being recovered (that is, that it is being worked on to eliminate a board ball number error, which will be described later). The presentation control device 53 that has transmitted the command to 53 and received the command is configured to execute, for example, the display device 35 or the like on the display device 35 or the like.

  Here, the ball polishing motor operation timer is a timer for operating the polishing apparatus motor 59 to operate the polishing apparatus 56 during a predetermined period even when the game ball is not being fired. In a state where the value of the value (the value corresponding to the remaining time until the time is up) is not zero, the polishing apparatus motor 59 is controlled so as to operate as long as no clogging occurs (ball polishing in FIG. 54 described later). Refer to the motor control process).

  To set the ball polishing motor operation timer, set the specified time (ball polishing operation time; for example, 10 seconds) as the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer, and set the specified time (ball polishing operation time) by the ball polishing motor operation timer. This means that the timekeeping operation is started from the beginning. Therefore, when the ball polishing motor operation timer is set, unless the ball clogging occurs, the polishing apparatus motor 59 is started and operates until the ball polishing motor operation timer expires (that is, the ball polishing operation time). The polishing apparatus 56 is activated only during the period of time).

  According to the routine of FIG. 33, the glass frame 13 is closed after being opened, and then the error release switch 87 is turned on (for example, by opening the inner frame 12), whereby the number of board balls is cleared. The release of the board ball number error flag and the like are executed. Further, after the polishing device 56 has been operated for a specified ball polishing operation time, a process of checking the number of encapsulated balls is executed. As a result, an error that the number of board balls is more than the specified number due to clogging of game balls (board board ball number error), or an enclosed ball number error (enclosed ball number error, enclosed ball number error, enclosed path error error) If this occurs, an employee of the amusement store opens the glass frame 13 and manually closes the glass frame 13 after clearing the clogged ball (or shortage of balls), and then turns on the error release switch 87. The error detection state (the state where the error flag is set) is automatically canceled. Therefore, there is an effect that the error can be canceled accurately and smoothly.

  In other words, the error detection state cannot be canceled simply by turning on the error cancel switch 87, and it is not possible to cancel unless the ball clogging is actually resolved. Further, in order to improve the accuracy, it is not necessary to perform another operation, but an additional condition is to open and close the glass frame 13 which is an operation that is absolutely necessary for releasing the ball clogging. Error cancellation can be realized. In the processing of FIG. 33, the error flag (for example, the excessive number of encapsulated balls error flag or the error error flag of the board surface balls) is not cleared, but the number of board surfaces is cleared in step S254, and the number of encapsulated balls is confirmed in step S255. By setting the conditions for executing the processing, the above-described various error detection states relating to the encapsulated sphere are substantially canceled.

  For this reason, the error detection status cancellation process for a large number of error flags (enclosed ball count error, encapsulated ball count error, encapsulated path error error, board ball count error flags) is substantially realized with a small number of steps. As a result, the processing is simplified. In addition, after the error release operation is performed, the process of confirming the number of encapsulated spheres is executed and the number of encapsulated spheres is normal. Since the error flag is canceled after confirmation, there is an effect that the accuracy of error cancellation can be further improved.

  Also, if a board ball number error occurs and the glass frame 13 is opened and an attempt is made to resolve it manually, the game ball that has been clogged will collide with a game nail in the game area and jump out of the game area. May end up. Thus, even when the game ball is lost without being collected from the out-ball inlet 23, the number of board balls is cleared in step S254, so that the number of board balls is not determined to be greater than or equal to the specified number. Since the game can be resumed unless it is determined that the enclosed ball number shortage error, problems such as the player feeling dissatisfied are avoided.

  When the glass frame 13 is open, even if it passes through the out ball detection switch 163, the number of board balls is not updated. Therefore, when the glass frame 13 is opened, the error cancel switch 87 is operated to cancel the error. You need to do. Further, by clearing the board ball number in step S254, the board ball number error is resolved, so the board ball number is in a positive state even though there is no game ball in the game area 22. Since it does not operate with a certain contradiction, it does not develop into a problem that the board ball number error occurs frequently even though it is in a normal state.

  In addition, the work for eliminating the cause of the board surface ball number error and the enclosed ball number error (ball clogging, ball shortage, ball excess) can be performed as follows, for example. First, for example, a clogged ball (a so-called grape or the like) on the board surface (the front surface of the game board 20 including the game area 22) applies a shock by pushing, pulling or pulling a ball clogged manually by opening the glass frame 13. It can be resolved by letting it flow down.

  Further, when the number of encapsulated balls is excessive, the inner frame 12 is opened in addition to the glass frame 13 as necessary, and the above-described ball feeding device 79 is manually operated to send the ball to the firing position, and is sent to the firing position. By removing the balls by hand, it can be resolved by discharging the balls one by one out of the machine. If the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient, the glass frame 13 is opened, and a ball from outside the machine (supplemented ball) is inserted into the game area 22 from the board side to flow down (for example, flow into the out ball inlet 23). Can be eliminated.

Next, the enclosed ball number monitoring process S242 in the error monitoring process (FIG. 32) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S261 whether or not the board ball number is less than zero. If it is less than zero, the process proceeds to step S263, and if not less than zero (the board ball number in step S254 of FIG. 33 described above). (If is cleared), go to step S262. In step S262, since the number of board balls is not less than zero, the enclosed ball number excess error flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S262a. On the other hand, in step S263, since there is an abnormal state such as the number of balls on the board being less than zero and the balls being illegally thrown into the board, an encapsulated ball number excess error flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S263a.

  Proceeding to step S262a, it is determined whether or not the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is the same as in the previous process, and if it is the same as in the previous process (that is, already cleared in the sequence before the previous process, cleared in the previous step S262). If it has already been cleared before being performed), the process proceeds to step S264, and if not the same as the previous process (that is, if it has been cleared from the state set in the immediately preceding step S262), the process proceeds to step S262b. . In step S262b, an encapsulated ball number excess error cancel command is transmitted to the game control device 54, and the process proceeds to step S264. Here, step S262a is provided in order not to execute the step S262b unnecessarily and to repeatedly transmit the encapsulated ball number excessive error cancel command.

  Proceeding to step S263a, it is determined whether or not the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is the same as in the previous process. If it has already been set before the process, the process proceeds to step S264, and if it is not the same as the previous process (that is, if it was set from the state cleared in the immediately preceding step S263), the process proceeds to step S263b. . In step S263b, an encapsulated ball number excess error command is transmitted to the game control device 54, and the process proceeds to step S264.

Here, step S263a is provided in order not to execute step S263b unnecessarily and to repeatedly transmit the enclosed ball number excess error command.
In addition, the presentation control device 53 that has received the enclosed ball number excess error command from the game control device 54 performs, for example, an error notification that “excess balls are mixed” on the display device 35, the speakers 16a, b, and the like. The effect control device 53 that has received the above-described enclosed ball number excessive error cancel command from the game control device 54 is configured to cancel this error notification.

  In step S264, it is determined whether or not there is a request for confirmation of the number of encapsulated balls (that is, whether or not the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set). If so, the process proceeds to step S265. Jumps (ie, does not execute) the process and returns. It should be noted that the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag needs to be canceled by the error cancel switch 87 when the power is turned on, when the glass frame 13 is opened / closed when an error that needs to be cancelled by the error cancel switch 87 has not occurred. When the glass frame 13 is opened and closed and the error release switch 87 is turned on when an error occurs, the above-described ball polishing operation time elapses (that is, the remaining time of the above-described ball polishing motor operation timer is zero). When the time is up and the time is up), the flag is set in step S549 of a ball polishing motor control process in FIG.

  In step S265, the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is cleared, and then in step S266, whether or not the first enclosing ball detection switch 164 for detecting the minimum enclosing ball number (encapsulated ball detection 1SW in FIG. 7) is turned on. If it is determined to be on, the process proceeds to step S267; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S270.

  Then, when proceeding to step S267, it is determined whether or not the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 165 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW in FIG. 7) for detecting the maximum encapsulated sphere number is turned on. If it is turned on, the process proceeds to step S268. If not, the process proceeds to step S269. When the process proceeds to step S268, both the switches 164 and 165 are turned on and it is an enclosed ball number excess error, so the enclosed ball number excess error flag is set. In the next step S268a, an enclosed ball number excess error command is issued. It transmits to the game control apparatus 54, and returns after that.

  When the process proceeds to step S269, the number of encapsulated spheres is in the normal range (that is, the minimum and maximum and less than or equal to the maximum). The enclosing ball number shortage error flag and the enclosing path abnormality error flag) are cleared, and the enclosing ball number shortage error cancel command is transmitted to the game control device 54 in the next step S269a, and then the process returns.

  In addition, to cancel the state where the overfilled ball number error flag is set (error detection state of overfilled ball number error), as described in FIG. 33, the glass frame 13 is opened to eliminate the cause of the error. However, it is necessary to close the glass frame 13 and then press the error release switch 87 (for example, take out an extra ball). The same applies to other enclosing ball number errors (encapsulated ball number shortage error and enclosing path error error).

  Even if the glass frame 13 is simply opened and closed and the error cancel switch 87 is pressed, the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is cleared by step S254 in FIG. 33 and steps S261 and S262 in this routine (FIG. 34). If the cause of this has not been resolved (when the number of encapsulated balls is excessive), the operation of the polishing apparatus motor 59 started in step S255 is stopped thereafter (that is, the above-described ball polishing operation time has elapsed). ), The processing from step S265 onward in this routine (FIG. 34) is executed, and the enclosed ball number excess error flag is set again in step S268.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S270, it is determined whether or not the maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch (that is, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165) is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S271. Proceed to step S272. When the process proceeds to step S271, the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 is turned on even though the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 is not turned on. Therefore, the enclosed route abnormality error flag is set, and the enclosed route abnormality error command is transmitted to the game control device 54 in the next step S271a, and then the process returns. If the process proceeds to step S272, the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient (that is, less than the minimum), and therefore an encapsulated ball number insufficient error flag is set, and in the next step S272a, an encapsulated ball number insufficient error command is issued. 54 and then return.

  The presentation control device 53 that has received the enclosed route abnormality error command from the game control device 54 performs, for example, an error notification “a route abnormality has occurred” on the display device 35, the speakers 16a, b, and the like. In addition, the presentation control device 53 that has received the enclosed ball number shortage error command from the game control device 54 executes an error notification “for example, the ball is insufficient” on the display device 35, the speakers 16a, 16b, etc. The game control device 54, which has received the enclosed ball number error cancel command after the error has been eliminated, is configured to erase these error displays.

Next, the board surface ball number error monitoring process S243 in the error monitoring process (FIG. 32) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S2811 whether or not the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer (that is, the remaining time until the ball polishing motor operation timer expires) is not zero. If the ball polishing motor operation timer has not timed up, the process returns. If it is zero (that is, if the ball polishing motor operation timer has timed out), the process proceeds to step S2812.

In step S2812, it is determined whether the first abnormal control flag is set. If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S2813. If it is set, the process jumps to step S2821, and second abnormal control described later is being performed. Determine if the flag is set.
In step S2813, it is determined whether or not the number of board spheres is equal to or greater than the first specified number. If it is equal to or greater than the first specified number, the process proceeds to step S2814, and if not greater than the first specified number, the process proceeds to step S2821.

  Here, for example, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 36, the first specified number is 20 in the normal gaming state (normal state), and 25 if the special gaming state is occurring (during jackpot). And This is because, in general, in each of the above states, if there are more than the prescribed number of board balls, it is considered that the flow of game balls is stagnant to some extent due to game problems. The prescribed number is not limited to 20 or 25, and the optimum value varies depending on the gaming machine.

Then, in step S2814, it is determined whether or not a special gaming state is occurring (a big hit). If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2815, and if it is not a big hit, the process jumps to step S2817.
In step S2815, a first big hit board surface ball number error occurrence command is transmitted to the card unit 200, and in step S2816, a first big hit board surface ball number error notification command is also transmitted to the game control device 54.

  Next, in step S2819, the first board ball number error flag is set, and in step S2820, the first abnormal control in-progress flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S2821. The conditions for canceling the first abnormality control are, for example, when a predetermined time has passed, when the employee confirms the opening of a new frame, or when the employee operates the RAM clear switch 182. Or when the power is turned on again.

  On the other hand, if the special game state is not being generated (big hit) in step S2814, the process jumps to step S2817, transmits the first normal board surface ball number error generation command to the card unit 200, and further in step S2818, the game control device. A first normal board ball number error notification command is transmitted to 54. Then, the process continues to step S2819 described above.

Thereafter, after the first abnormal control in-progress flag is set in step S2820 described above, the process proceeds to step S2821, where it is determined whether the second abnormal control in-progress flag is set. If it is not set here, the process proceeds to step S2822. If it is set, the process jumps to step S2831 of FIG.
Then, when proceeding to step S2822, it is determined whether or not the number of board spheres is equal to or greater than the second specified number. If it is equal to or greater than the second specified number, the process proceeds to step S2823, and if not greater than the second specified number, step S2831 in FIG. Jump to.

  Here, for example, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 36, the second specified number is 30 if the normal gaming state (normal state), and 35 if the special gaming state is occurring (big hit). And This is because, in each of the above states, if the number of board balls is more than the prescribed number, it is considered that the flow of game balls is stagnant to some extent in the game. The prescribed number is not limited to 30 or 35, and the optimum value varies depending on the gaming machine.

  In step S2823, the launch permission signal OFF data is set, and in step S2824, it is determined whether or not a special gaming state is being generated (a big hit). Here, if it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2825, and if it is not a big hit, the process jumps to step S2827.

  In step S2825, the second big hit board surface ball number error occurrence command is transmitted to the card unit 200, and further, in step S2826, the second big hit board surface ball number error notification command is also transmitted to the game control device 54. Next, in step S2829, the second board surface ball number error flag is set. Further, the process proceeds to step S2830, the second abnormal control in-progress flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S2831 in FIG. As for the condition for releasing the second abnormality control, for example, when a predetermined time has passed, when the employee confirms the opening of a new frame, or when the employee operates the RAM clear switch 182. Or when the power is turned on again.

  If it is not a big hit and jumps to step S2827, a second normal board surface ball number error occurrence command is transmitted to the card unit 200, and further, a second normal board surface ball number error is sent to the game control unit 54 in step S2828. A notification command is transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S2829, the second board ball number error flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2830, the second abnormal control in-progress flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S2831 in FIG.

  If it progresses to step S2831 of FIG. 36, it will be determined whether it is set as the monitoring object game machine mentioned later, if not set, it will return, and if it is set, it will progress to step S2832. This determination is made based on whether or not the information is received and set when the game machine is set as a monitored game machine in the fraud check process shown in FIG.

  In step S2832, it is determined whether the first monitoring target control flag is set. If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S2833. If it is set, the process jumps to step S2838 to perform second monitoring target control described later. Determine if the flag is set.

  Then, when proceeding to step S2833, it is determined whether or not the number of board spheres is equal to or greater than the first specified number, and if it is equal to or greater than the first specified number, a monitoring target first board sphere number error flag is set in step S2834. The process proceeds to S2835. On the other hand, if the number of board balls is not greater than the first specified number, the process returns as it is.

  In step S2835, a monitoring target first board ball number error occurrence command is transmitted to the card unit 200. In subsequent step S2836, a monitoring target first board ball number error notification command is transmitted to the game control device 54. In step S2837, the first monitoring target controlling flag is set, and then the process returns.

In step S2838, it is determined whether the second monitoring target controlling flag is set. If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S2839. If it is set, the process returns.
Then, when proceeding to step S2839, it is determined whether or not the number of board balls is equal to or greater than the second specified number. The process proceeds to S2841. On the other hand, if the number of board balls is not greater than the second specified number, the process returns as it is.

  In step S2841, a monitoring target second board ball number error occurrence command is transmitted to the card unit 200. In subsequent step S2842, a monitoring target second board ball number error notification command is transmitted to the game control device 54. In step S2843, the second monitoring target controlling flag is set, and then the process returns.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 36, as the control in the case of the first board surface ball number error described above, an error notification by the notification means such as the display device 35 or a board surface ball number error occurrence command is transmitted to the card unit 200. It can be considered that abnormality information is externally output to the hall computer 150. These error occurrence information may be output to a third party such as the gaming system information management company 96.

  Further, as the control in the case of the above-mentioned second board ball number error, it is conceivable that the firing solenoid 173 is prohibited from being fired by disabling the firing, or that the firing stop is notified by the display device 35 or the like ( Various external outputs may be performed as described above). In addition, regarding the control in the case of the second board surface ball number error, different control may be performed depending on the normal gaming state or the big hit.

For example, if the time from the arrival of the first specified number to the arrival of the second specified number is within a predetermined time, the notification mode may be increased. This is because if the time from the arrival of the first specified number to the arrival of the second specified number is as early as possible, it is clearly considered to be illegal.
Also, after performing the predetermined notification and error control based on the arrival of the first specified number, the number of surface balls naturally decreases, but if the time from notification based on the arrival of the first specified number to reaching the first specified number is too short. Even when the first specified number is reached, it is conceivable that the notification mode is as exaggerated as in the case of the second board ball number error.
The first and second board surface ball numbers described above can be arbitrarily set on the game store side.

  In addition, when the card unit 200 is set as a monitoring target gaming machine as a result of performing the fraud check process S668 in the activation process (shown in FIG. 58) described later, information to that effect is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. The Based on the reception of this information, the gaming machine 10 is set as a monitoring target gaming machine. Since there is a high possibility of fraud in such monitored gaming machines, the prescribed number for determining the board ball number error is smaller than the normal state or the big hit (for example, the first prescribed number is 15, 2 The prescribed number is 25. This number can be set as appropriate, and the difference between the first and second prescribed numbers may be small.) Is set, and control corresponding to reaching the prescribed number regardless of the gaming state To do.

  Further, the number of times of reaching the first specified number or the number of times of reaching the second specified number is counted as an error determination number (that is, the abnormality determination control number counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”), and based on the counting result, In addition to the control in the case of a board ball number error as set in the lower part of FIG. 36, some kind of notification may be performed, and when the number of times of error determination reaches a specific number of times, a predetermined time is passed. The gaming machine 10 may not be allowed to play a game. By doing so, it is possible for a gaming machine employee to confirm whether or not fraud has been performed on the gaming machine 10 in which errors occur too frequently, such as by visual inspection. It is possible to prevent an error from occurring in the gaming machine 10.

Next, the frame opening error monitoring process S244 in the error monitoring process (FIG. 32) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S301 whether or not the state of the glass frame opening switch 125 for detecting the opening of the glass frame 13 is the same as in the previous process. If not, in step S302, an initial value of the glass frame opening monitoring timer (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec) is set in the glass frame opening monitoring timer, and then the process proceeds to step S303.

  In step S303, if the glass frame opening monitoring timer is not zero, an update process for reducing the value of the glass frame opening monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing period is executed, and then the processing proceeds to step S304 and the glass frame opening monitoring timer is executed. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step S305. If not, the process jumps from step S305 to S314 and proceeds to step S315.

  In these steps S301 to S304, the open / close state of the glass frame 13 is monitored according to the state of the glass frame open switch 125, and the same state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the initial value of the glass frame open monitor timer. For the first time, the open / closed state of the glass frame 13 is determined in the processing after step S305. Thereby, the open / closed state of the glass frame 13 is determined with high reliability. That is, for example, even if the signal of the glass frame open switch 125 fluctuates instantaneously due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent the open / close state of the glass frame 13 from being erroneously determined.

  In step S305, it is determined whether the state of the glass frame opening switch 125 corresponds to the opening state of the glass frame 13. If the glass frame opening switch 125 is in the open state, the glass frame opening error flag is set in step S306, and then the processing proceeds to step S308. On the other hand, if it is not in the open state (that is, if it is in the closed state), the glass frame open error flag is cleared in step S307, and then the process proceeds to step S308.

  In step S308, it is determined whether the state of the glass frame opening error flag determined this time (whether it is set or cleared) is the same as in the previous process. Through S314, the process proceeds to step S315, and if not, the process proceeds to step S309.

  When the processing proceeds to step S309, a command corresponding to the currently determined glass frame opening error state (that is, the state of the glass frame opening error flag set in step S306 or S307) is transmitted to the game control device 54, and then to step S310. move on. Here, for example, if the glass frame opening error flag is set, a command indicating that the glass frame opening error is present is transmitted to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 receives this command from the game control device 54. In response, for example, the display device 35, the speakers 16a, 16b, etc. are configured to perform error notification for notifying that the glass frame 13 is in an open state. If the glass frame opening error flag is cleared, a command indicating that the glass frame opening error has been released is transmitted to the game control device 54, and the effect control device 53 receives this command from the game control device 54. In response to the command, for example, the error notification on the display device 35, the speakers 16a, 16b, etc. is turned off.

In step S310, the information that the glass frame 13 has been opened and closed (hereinafter referred to as opening / closing operation information) is cleared. Next, in step S311, the opened / closed state of the glass frame 13 determined this time is determined, and the closed state ( That is, if the glass frame opening error flag is cleared), the process proceeds to step S312, and if it is not closed (that is, if the glass frame opening error flag is set open), steps S312 to S314 are jumped. Then, the process proceeds to step S315.
In step S312, the opening / closing operation information for the glass frame 13 is set, and the process proceeds to step S313. The opening / closing operation information is used for the determination in step S252 in the error release switch monitoring process (FIG. 33) described above.

  When the process proceeds to step S313, it is determined whether an error that requires the error release switch 87 to be turned on to cancel the error is occurring. If it is occurring, the process proceeds to step S315. After setting the operation timer, the process proceeds to step S315. Here, errors that require the error release switch 87 to be turned on to clear the error include, as described above, the board surface ball number error and the enclosed ball number error (enclosed ball number excess error, enclosed ball number error, Route error).

  In addition, according to the process of step S314, since the ball polishing motor operation timer is set, unless a ball clogging is caused by a ball polishing motor control process (FIG. 54) described later, the polishing apparatus motor 59 (that is, The polishing apparatus 56) is activated for a specified time. That is, due to the presence of step S314, if the error is not occurring, the polishing apparatus 56 operates for a specified time even if the glass frame 13 is simply closed. However, if an error that requires the operation of the error cancel switch 87 has occurred, the ball polish motor operation timer is set when the operation to cancel this error is performed, and the polisher motor 59 is activated. Since it operates (refer to step S255 mentioned above), step S313 is provided here and step S314 is jumped.

In step S315, the inner frame 12 is processed in the same manner as steps S301 to S309, and then the process returns.
That is, in step S315, it is determined whether or not the state of the inner frame opening switch 126 that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 is the same as in the previous process. If the same, the process proceeds to step S317. After setting the inner frame opening monitoring timer initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec) in the frame opening monitoring timer, the process proceeds to step S317.

  In step S317, if the inner frame release monitoring timer is not zero, an update process for reducing the value of the inner frame release monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing cycle is performed, and then the processing advances to step S318 to execute the inner frame release monitoring timer. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step S319, and if it is not zero, the process returns.

  In these steps S315 to S318, the open / closed state of the inner frame 12 is monitored by the state of the inner frame opening switch 126, and the same state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the initial value of the inner frame opening monitoring timer. For the first time, the open / closed state of the inner frame 12 is determined in the processing after step S319. Thereby, the open / closed state of the inner frame 12 is determined with high reliability.

In step S319, it is determined whether the state of the inner frame opening switch 126 corresponds to the opened state of the inner frame 12. If the inner frame opening switch 126 is in the opened state, the inner frame opening error flag is set in step S320, and then the processing proceeds to step S322. If it is not in the open state (that is, if it is in the closed state), the process advances to step S322 after clearing the inner frame open error flag in step S321.
In step S322, it is determined whether the state of the inner frame opening error flag determined this time (whether it is set or cleared) is the same as in the previous processing. If not, the process proceeds to step S323.

  When the processing proceeds to step S323, a command corresponding to the currently determined inner frame opening error state (that is, the state of the inner frame opening error flag set in step S320 or S321) is transmitted to the game control device 54, and then the process returns. Here, for example, if the inner frame release error flag is set, a command indicating an inner frame release error state is transmitted to the game control device 54, and the game control device 54 further transmits to the effect control device 53. In response to this command, the production control device 53 is configured to perform error notification for notifying the display device 35, the speakers 16a, b, and the like that the inner frame 12 is open.

  In addition, when the glass frame 13 or the inner frame 12 is opened, not only an error display for notifying that an error state has occurred, but also the matching processing of the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200 is performed at this timing. You may comprise as follows. As a result, when the glass frame 13 or the inner frame 12 is opened and the board of the game control device 54 or the like is illegally exchanged, it can be surely detected.

Next, the firing permission signal editing process S178 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 26) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S331 whether the card unit is connected or not. If OK, the process proceeds to step S332, and if not OK, the process proceeds to step S344. This determination is performed based on the confirmation result of step S191 in the card unit connection confirmation process (FIG. 27) described above. That is, in step S191, it is determined that the voltage of the VL input is on. For example, if the card unit connection confirmation flag is set, it is determined in step S331 that the card unit connection confirmation is OK.

  In step S332, a process of updating the power-on forced firing timer (that is, a process of reducing the value of the power-on forced firing timer by one cycle of the timer interruption period) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S333. The power-on forced launch timer counts the forced launch time to force the ball remaining at the tip of the launcher in the event of a power failure to fire at power-on (automatic firing without player operation). The forced firing is an empty firing that does not affect the game result.

In step S333, if the power-on forced firing timer value is not zero, the process proceeds to step S345, and if it is zero, the process proceeds to the determination process in steps S334 to S343.
In the determination process of steps S334 to S343, if the determination result is positive in each determination, the process proceeds to step S344 without executing the subsequent determination process, and the determination result is negative in each determination of steps S334 to S342. The next determination process is sequentially executed, and if the determination result in the last step S343 is negative, the process proceeds to step S345.

  In step S334, the number of balls held is zero. In step S335, the counting stop timer is not zero (that is, the counting is stopped while counting the number of holding balls). In step S337, whether there is a break, in step S338, an error in the number of encapsulated balls is occurring, in step S339, an error in the number of encapsulated balls is occurring, in step 340, an error in the enclosed path is occurring, or in step S341, the glass frame is being opened In step S342, it is determined whether the inner frame is being opened or whether an illegal act is occurring in step S343.

  Here, whether the firing stop timer during counting is not zero (that is, whether or not the firing stop timer is counting while counting the number of balls) is being counted by the count switch 311 being operated (pressed). An initial value (for example, 2 seconds) is set in the firing stop timer (see step S592 in FIG. 56), and determination is made based on whether the timer is counting. If the timer is counting, it is determined that the counting stop timer is not zero.

  When the counting switch 311 is operated, the number of balls held is counted and becomes the number of counting balls, and the number of counting balls falls under the management of the card unit 200. This is an example of a game machine that pays out with a real ball, and electronically performs the same operation as the work of physically transferring the acquired number of balls to a ball box outside the game machine. By pressing 311, the acquired number of possessed balls is counted and becomes the counted number of balls, and the counted number of balls is displayed as a counted number of balls on the screen of the operation display device 30 under the control of the card unit 200 (for example, digital display ( Numbers) and analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box).

In step S335, the number of balls is counted when the count switch 311 is pressed. Therefore, in order to temporarily stop the firing of the ball during the counting, it is determined whether the counting is in progress.
Further, whether or not the account is being settled is determined by the settlement control process number, for example, in the same manner as in step S38 (FIG. 18) described above. Further, the determination of whether or not a break is in progress is made, for example, by the break control process number as in step S38 described above.

  Further, whether the enclosing ball number shortage error is occurring is determined in the above-described step S272, the enclosing ball number deficiency error flag is set, and whether the enclosing ball number excessive error is occurring is determined in the above-described steps S263 and S268. Whether or not the excessive number of balls error flag and the enclosed path abnormality error are occurring is determined based on the enclosed path abnormality error flag set in step S271 described above.

  Whether the glass frame 13 is open or not is determined based on the glass frame open error flag and the inner frame open error flag set in steps S306 and S320, respectively. These determinations are determined to be occurring if the flag is set, and not occurring if the flag is cleared. Further, for example, when it is determined that fraud is occurring in the processes of steps S82 to S84 in the error monitoring process (FIG. 22) described above, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

In step S344, the process returns after setting the firing permission signal OFF data. When the firing permission signal off data is set, the firing control circuit 86 is prohibited from operating the firing solenoid 173, and a state where the ball cannot be fired (a firing non-permitted state) is set. In this firing non-permitted state, even if there is a proper firing operation (the touch sensor 174 is turned on and the firing volume 171 is operated), the firing solenoid 173 is not activated and the ball is not fired.
On the other hand, in step S345, after setting the firing permission signal ON data, the process returns. When the firing permission signal ON data is set, the firing control circuit 86 is permitted to actuate the firing solenoid 173, and the ball can be fired (launch permitted state).

  According to the firing permission signal editing process described above, if the card unit 200 is not connected because the card unit 200 is not connected (or the power of the card unit 200 is not turned on) or the like, it is unconditionally fired. It becomes a disallowed state. In addition, after the gaming machine 10 is powered on and the forced firing time has elapsed, each condition of steps S334 to S343 (the number of balls held is zero, the counting stop timer is not zero (counting), during the settlement, If any one of a break, an error in the number of encapsulated balls occurs, a glass frame is opened, an inner frame is opened, or an illegal act is generated), a launch-permitted state where the ball cannot be launched is entered. However, during the period from when the gaming machine 10 is powered on until the forced firing time elapses, a ball can be fired by the processing of steps S333 and S345 even if any of the conditions of steps S334 to S343 is satisfied. Launch allowed. This is to perform the forced firing described above.

Next, the ball feed control process S180 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 26) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S351 whether or not the value of the forced firing timer at power-on is not zero, and if not (ie, if the forced firing time has not elapsed), step S358. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step S352. In step S352, it is determined whether the value of the ball feed control timer is zero. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step S353, and if not, the process proceeds to step S355.

  When the process proceeds to step S353, it is determined whether or not the game ball is being launched. If it is being launched, the process proceeds to step S354, and if not, the process proceeds to step S358. Here, the determination as to whether or not it is firing is in a state where the launch is permitted (that is, the launch permission state in which the launch permission signal on data described above is set) and the touch sensor 174 is turned on. By determining that it is firing. That is, if the touch sensor 174 is not turned on even if the launch is permitted (if the player does not touch the launch handle 18), it is not determined that the launch is in progress, and the launch is permitted even if the touch sensor 174 is turned on. Otherwise, it is not determined to be firing. Thereby, it is accurately determined that the game ball is actually being fired.

In step S354, a prescribed initial value (a value corresponding to the firing interval time) is set as the value of the ball feed control timer, and the process proceeds to step S355. When the process proceeds to step S355, an update process for decreasing the value of the ball feed control timer by one cycle of the timer interruption period is executed, and the process proceeds to step S356. In step S356, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball feed control timer matches the set value set as the ball feed on timing. If they match, the ball feed solenoid 172 is judged in step S357 as the ball feed on timing. The ball feed solenoid 172 is actuated by setting the ON data for the ball feed, and if not coincident, it is determined that it is not the ball feed on timing, and the process proceeds to step S358 to set the off data for the ball feed solenoid 172 and stop the ball feed solenoid 172.
The initial value of the ball feed control timer set in step S354 is set so that the ball firing frequency (number of shots per hour) is less than or equal to a predetermined value.

  According to the above ball feed control process, the ball feed solenoid 172 is maintained in a stopped state during a period from when the power is turned on until the forced firing time elapses. This is to prevent the ball from being newly sent to the tip (launch position) during the forced launch period in order to process the ball remaining at the tip at the time of a power failure by the aforementioned forced launch. Then, when this forced firing period ends and launching, as long as firing continues, every time the value of the ball feed control timer becomes zero, the operation of setting the value of this ball feed control timer to the initial value in step S354 Is repeated, and every time the value of the ball feed control timer reaches the set value (that is, every time the ball feed on timing is reached), the ball feed solenoid 172 is actuated by the processing of step S357 and one ball is Sent to the tip (launch position).

Next, the settlement / rest control process S181 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 26) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, a settlement control process (details will be described later) is performed in step S361, then a break control process (details will be described later) is executed in step S362, and then the process returns.

  The processing related to the break is executed when a break switch signal is input to the payout control device 80. For example, an instruction (break signal) from the card unit 200 is transmitted (operation of the remote controller 160 or the card unit 200). In the case where it is configured to be executed by a break switch operation) provided on the screen, the processing related to the break can be started based on the reception of the command.

Next, the settlement control process S361 in the settlement / rest control process (FIG. 40) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step S371, branching is performed according to the settlement control process number. In this case, if the settlement control process number is 1, the settlement start monitoring process (described later in detail) in step S372 is performed. If the settlement control process number is 2, the settlement write completion monitoring process (described in detail later) is performed in step S373. If the control process number is 3, the payment completion monitoring process (details will be described later) is executed, and then the process returns. The initial value of the settlement control process number is set to 1, for example, in step S14 of the main process.
The settlement control process number may be 1, 2, 3,..., But may be 0, 1, 2,..., And if this is done, when the area of the RAM 113 is cleared The process of setting 1 as the initial value can be omitted.

Next, the break control process S362 in the settlement / break control process (FIG. 40) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, branching by the break control process number is performed in step S381. In this case, if the break control process number is 1, the break start monitoring process (described later in detail) in step S382 is performed. If the break control process number is 2, the break start ACK monitoring process (described in detail later) is performed in step S383. If the process number is 3, a break end monitoring process (described later in detail) is executed in step S384, and then the process returns. The initial value of the break control process number is set to 1, for example, in step S14 of the main process.
Although the break control process number may be 1, 2, 3,..., It may be 0, 1, 2,..., And in this case, when the area of the RAM 113 is cleared. The process of setting 1 as the initial value can be omitted.

Next, the settlement start monitoring process S372 in the settlement control process (FIG. 41) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in steps S391 to S396, a process is performed to determine whether a condition that can be settled (settlement possible condition) is satisfied. After clearing the payable flag in step S398, the flow proceeds to step S399. If all the payable conditions are satisfied, the payable flag is set in step S397, and then the flow proceeds to step S399. In other words, the payable flag is set when it is possible to pay.

  Here, there are the following six conditions in the accountable conditions. That is, the break process is not being performed (determined in step S391), the number of balls is not being counted (the count switch-on timer is not zero: determined in step S392), the error is not occurring (determined in step S393), The number of board spheres is zero and there is no sphere on the board (determined in step S394), the touch sensor 174 is not turned on (determined in step S395), and the customer waiting demonstration is in progress (determined in step S396). is there. Here, for example, the determination as to whether or not the break process is being performed is performed based on the break control process number as in step S337 described above. If the break control process number is any of 2 to 3, it is determined that the break process is being performed. judge. Whether or not an error is occurring may be determined in the same manner as in step S331 and steps S338 to S343 of the firing permission signal editing process of FIG.

  Next, in step S399, it is determined whether or not a payment instruction command has been received. This is to determine whether or not a payment instruction command has been received from the card unit 200. In the card unit 200, when the return button 213 is pressed when the settlement process is not being performed, a settlement instruction command is sent to the payout control device 80 if the settlement is possible. Here, the settlement instruction command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) described above, which is communication in plain text.

If a settlement instruction command is received in step S399, the process proceeds to step S400, and if a settlement instruction command is not received, the process returns.
In step S400, it is determined whether or not the payable flag is on (that is, whether or not it is set). On the other hand, if the payable flag is not on, the process returns.

  When the processing proceeds to step S401 and subsequent steps, first, in step S401, the number of held balls is set as a total count value. This is because all the number of balls possessed by the player is counted to obtain a total number of counted balls, and the settlement is automatically performed based on the settlement instruction command. That is, when the return button 213 is pressed to request the return of the game card, it is necessary to automatically perform payment. Therefore, all the player's balls are counted to obtain a total count ball, and the total count ball This is because the game control device 54 stores the number separately from the number of counted balls (the total number of balls held) to be transmitted to the card unit 200.

Next, the process proceeds to step S402, and the number of balls held (here, the number of balls held is the same value as the total count value, hereinafter the same in this flow) is saved in the count ball number command area. This is because the number of balls held is counted and a counting ball number command is sent to the card unit 200.
In step S403, the number of held balls is set as the number of held balls for display. This is to display the number of balls on the operation display device 30 until the settlement is completed. The number of balls for display is stored in a storage area of the RAM 83 that stores the number of balls to be displayed on the operation display device 30.

  In step S404, the number of held balls is cleared to “0”. This is because the number of balls held from the gaming machine 10 is counted and sent to the card unit 200 as a counting ball number command, and the number of balls held is stored as the total number of balls held on the gaming machine 10 side. But that's what it does. On the card unit 200 side, the number of balls is recorded on the game card, but on the gaming machine 10 side, the number of balls is stored as a total number of balls in the storage area of the RAM 83 just in case. Become.

This is because even if there is a trouble on the card unit 200 side, if the number of balls held is stored as a total number of balls in the storage area of the RAM 83 on the gaming machine 10 side, the trouble can be dealt with by collation or the like.
Next, in step S405, a timer initial value (for example, 2 seconds) of the settlement write completion monitoring timer is set. The settlement write completion monitoring timer is a timer for setting a timeout in the response from the card unit 200. Next, in step S406, the settlement write completion monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and then the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement write completion monitoring process routine.

  According to the settlement start monitoring process described above, the settlement ready flag is set when all the settlement possible conditions are satisfied, and the settlement starts when the return button 213 is pressed in this state. On the other hand, if even one of the conditions for payment adjustment is not satisfied, the payment adjustment flag is cleared, and payment is not started even if the return button 213 is turned on in this state. Here, the operation display device 30 (or the display device 35 may be included) may be configured to display that the payment is impossible. It should be noted that, since the allowance for payment adjustment is set as described above, it is possible to prevent problems such as the control processing not functioning properly due to an inadvertent start operation for payment.

Next, the settlement write completion monitoring process S373 in the settlement control process (FIG. 41) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the settlement write completion monitoring timer is updated (decremented) by “−1” in step S411, and it is determined whether or not the timer has become “0” in step S412. If the settlement write completion monitoring timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S413, and it is determined whether settlement settlement completion is received from the card unit 200 or not. The receipt of the payment writing completion is determined by whether or not a payment writing completion command is received from the card unit 200, for example.

If payment completion is not received from the card unit 200, the process returns and the routine is repeated. If it is determined in step S413 that the payment write completion has been received from the card unit 200, the process goes to step S414 to clear the total count value to “0”. This is because the card unit 200 completes the payment writing (that is, records all the count balls (total count value) on the game card) and the record is held on the game card. This is because it is possible to clear “0”.
Next, in step S415, the settlement end monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement completion monitoring process routine.

  On the other hand, if the payment writing completion monitoring timer is “0” in step S412, the payment writing completion cannot be received from the card unit 200 within the predetermined time counted by the payment writing completion monitoring timer. Therefore, the process branches to step S416 and the settlement write failure flag is set. Next, in step S417, the total count value is made the number of balls for display. Since it is presumed that the card unit 200 has failed to record all the count balls (total count value) on the game card, the total count value is temporarily returned to the display ball count.

  However, at this time, the number of balls held is not an official number, but is displayed on the operation display device 30 as the number of balls held for visual evidence. After that, the employee performs confirmation work related to the settlement (inspection and confirmation of each part including the card unit 200 and the game card) and once cancels the settlement process, the total count value is officially returned as the number of balls, The information is displayed on the operation display device 30.

Next, in step S418, a command at the time of the settlement write failure is transmitted to the game control device 54. The game control device 54 receives a command at the time of payment writing failure, and performs an effect of displaying that the payment is failed on the display device 35 via the effect control device 53.
Next, in step S419, the settlement start monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement start monitoring process routine.

Next, the settlement end monitoring process S374 in the settlement control process (FIG. 41) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S421 whether a card removal command from the card unit 200 has been received. If received, the process returns after executing steps S422 to S423, and if not received, step S422 is performed. Return without executing the following. The card extraction command is a command transmitted from the card unit 200 when a game card is extracted. This payment card extraction command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) described above, which is communication in plain text.

In step S422, an initial value is set in the number-of-balls display timer, and in step S423, the settlement start monitoring process number is set as the settlement control process number.
Here, the number-of-balls display timer has a configuration in which a blinking display, which will be described later, of the number of balls held on the operation display device 30 is terminated when the time is up. The initial value is set in the number-of-balls display timer because the number of balls that have been settled in the LED of the operation display device 30 is set for a short time (initial value of the timer) after the game card is ejected from the card unit 200. This is to prepare for blinking display.

Next, the break start monitoring process S382 in the break control process (FIG. 42) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in steps S431 to S436, a process for determining whether or not a breakable condition (break permission condition) is satisfied. If even one break permission condition is not satisfied, step S438 is performed. After the break switch valid flag is cleared, the process proceeds to step S439. When all the break permission conditions are satisfied, the break switch valid flag is set in step S437, and then the process proceeds to step S439.

  That is, when the break is permitted, the break switch valid flag is set. When the break switch valid flag is set, a control for turning on the break switch valid display LED 314 is executed by a process not shown in the figure, and the player is notified that a break is possible. Conversely, when the break switch valid flag is cleared, the break switch valid display LED 314 is turned off to notify the player that the break is impossible.

  Here, the break permission conditions include the following six conditions. That is, the checkout process is not being performed (determined in step S431), no error has occurred (determined in step S432), the number of board balls is zero and there is no ball on the board (determined in step S433), and the touch sensor 174 is on. The number of balls held (one or more) (determined in step S435), and a customer waiting demonstration (determined in step S436). Here, the determination whether or not the settlement process is being performed may be performed, for example, in the same manner as in step S336 described above. Further, whether or not an error is occurring may be determined in the same manner as, for example, step S331 and steps S338 to S343 described above.

  In step S439, it is determined whether or not the break switch 312 is turned on. If the break switch 312 is turned on, the process proceeds to step S440. If the break switch 312 is not turned on, the process returns. In step S440, it is determined whether or not the above-described break switch valid flag is on (that is, whether or not it is set). If it is on, the process proceeds to step S441 to start a break, and if not, the process proceeds to step S444.

  In step S444, a break operation invalid command is transmitted to the game control device 54, and then the process returns. The game control device 54 that has received the break operation invalid command is configured to execute, for example, control for displaying on the display device 35 that the break is impossible via the effect control device 53. In addition, it is assumed that the break operation invalid command includes different data for each reason why the break cannot be performed (which condition is not satisfied among the conditions of steps S431 to S436), and the game control device 54 that has received this command The reason for the inability to rest can also be displayed on the display device 35 or the like via the effect control device 53.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S441, the break switch valid flag is cleared, then a break request command is transmitted to the card unit 200 to start the break in step S442, and then the break control processing number is set to 2 (break start process in step S443). ACK monitoring process number) is set, and then the process returns. Here, the break request command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) described above, which is communication in plain text.

  According to the break start monitoring process described above, when all the break permission conditions are satisfied, the break switch valid flag is set. When the break switch 312 is turned on in this state, the process for starting the break ( Steps S442 and S443) are executed. If even one break permission condition is not satisfied, the break switch valid flag is cleared, and even if the break switch 312 is turned on in this state, the process for starting the break is not executed, and the display device 35 cannot be rested. Is displayed.

  In addition, since the break permission conditions are set as described above, it is possible to prevent problems such as the control process not functioning properly due to an inadvertent operation to start a break. In particular, according to the condition of step S435, since the break cannot be started without the number of balls, the break function such as ensuring that the gaming machine 10 cannot be used by another person without the number of balls cannot be abused. There are advantages.

  This is because even if another player inserts a game card on the platform that is taking a break, it is returned and cannot be used, so this break function ensures that the gaming machine 10 cannot be used by others. However, in this embodiment, when there is no number of balls, such a configuration is not possible.

  Also, in this example, if there is a malicious player who has been taking a break for a long time (or a player who has forgotten to have taken a break and returned), use a staff card to take a break The use of such a malicious break can be prevented at any time by employees. Further, the condition of step S435 may be based on whether or not the number of held balls is equal to or more than a specified number, and by doing so, it is possible to prevent securing a pachinko machine with a small number of held balls.

Next, the break start ACK monitoring process S383 in the break control process (FIG. 42) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S451 whether an error has occurred. If an error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S456, and if no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S452. In step S452, it is determined whether or not the break start ACK reception timeout from the card unit 200 is reached. If timed out, the process proceeds to step S456, and if not timed out, the process proceeds to step S453.

  For example, the elapsed time from the time when the break request command is transmitted in step S442 described above is measured by a process not shown, and the break start ACK (response signal to the break request command) from the card unit 200 is not received. If this elapsed time exceeds the specified time, it is determined in step S452 that a break start ACK reception timeout has occurred.

  In step S453, it is determined whether a break start ACK has been received from the card unit 200. If it has been received, the process returns after executing steps S454 and S455 in sequence. If not, the process returns without executing step S454 and subsequent steps. To do. In step S454, a break start command is transmitted to the game control device 54, and in step S455, 3 (number of break end monitoring process) is set as the break control process number.

  The presentation control device 53 that has received the break start command from the game control device 54 performs a display such as “being on break” on the display device 35 or the like. When the game control device 54 receives a break start ACK, the game control device 54 performs control to emit light by turning on a light emitting source such as an LED in which an operation button portion of the break switch 312 is built. You may make it alert | report that it is in.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S456, a break operation cancel command is transmitted to the game control device 54, then a break operation cancel command is transmitted to the card unit 200 in step S457, and in the next step S458, the break control processing number is set to 1 (break). Set the start monitoring process number), and then return. Here, the break operation cancellation command to the card unit 200 is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) described above, which is communication in plain text. In addition, the game control device 54 and the card unit 200 that have received the break operation cancellation command are configured to stop the process for the break.

Next, the break end monitoring process S384 in the break control process (FIG. 42) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S461, it is determined whether or not a break forced release command from the card unit 200 has been received. If received, the process proceeds to step S467, and if not received, the process proceeds to step S462. Note that the break forced release command is transmitted by the communication method 1 when the staff card is inserted into the card unit 200 as described above.

  In step S462, it is determined whether a break release command has been received from the card unit 200. If it has been received, the process returns after executing steps S463 to S466 sequentially. If not, the process returns without executing step S463 and subsequent steps. To do. This break release command is used when the game card used before the break start is inserted into the card unit 200, and the game is played from the card unit 200 by the first communication method (communication method 1) described above, which is communication in plain text. This is a command transmitted to the control device 54.

  In step S463, a break release ACK (response signal to the break release command) is transmitted to the card unit 200 by the communication method 1. In step S465, a break release command is transmitted to the game control device 54. In step S466, the break control processing number is set. Set 1 (number of break start monitoring process), and then return. The game control device 54 and the card unit 200 that have received the break release command are configured to end the break processing.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S467, the break forced release ACK (response signal to the break forced release command) is transmitted to the card unit 200 by the communication method 1, and then the forced settlement request flag is set in step S468, and then step S466 is performed. Returns after execution.
Although the forced settlement request flag is not shown in the figure, when the player does not return within the prescribed time for the break, the break is forcibly canceled and used in a process for performing the forced settlement.

Next, the card unit reception analysis process S182 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 26) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the card unit reception analysis process 1 (step S471), the card unit reception analysis process 2 (step S472), and the card unit reception analysis process 3 (step S473) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

  The card unit reception analysis process 1 is an analysis process of information transmitted from the card unit 200 in the communication method 1, and the card unit reception analysis process 2 is an analysis process of information transmitted from the card unit 200 in the communication method 2. is there. The card unit reception analysis process 3 is an analysis process in the case of receiving information related to a fraud monitoring target gaming machine or the like.

Next, the card unit reception analysis process (FIG. 49) S471 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S481 whether there is data in the serial reception buffer (reception buffer for performing serial communication with the card unit 200). If there is data, the process proceeds to step S482. Return.
In step S482, the data in the serial reception buffer is read as received data. In step S483, it is determined whether the received data is a number of rented balls / number of used balls. If the command is a command, the process proceeds to step S490, and if it is not a command for renting / reserving the number of used balls, the process proceeds to step S484.

  The command for lending / using balls is a command transmitted from the card unit 200 when the ball lending button 212 is pressed by a control process (not shown) of the card unit 200. The card unit 200 is configured to perform a process of subtracting and updating the ball lending number or the number of stored balls recorded on the game card by a value corresponding to the transmitted number of balls for lending / number of accumulated balls used (ball lending information). It has become.

  In step S490, an addition process for adding the number corresponding to the number of lent balls / number of used balls command to the number of held balls is executed, and then the process returns. The addition processing in step S490 is performed in accordance with the fact that the data of the ball lending number or the number of stored balls (valuable value information) recorded on the gaming card is subtracted and updated in the card unit 200 (the payout control of the gaming machine 10). A ball lending addition process for increasing the number of balls (game value) in the device 80) (the number of balls stored in the RAM 83) is configured. In the case of a pachinko machine that is not an enclosed ball type, this ball lending addition process corresponds to a ball lending payout process in which game balls as a lending ball are discharged to the upper plate.

  In step S484, it is determined whether the received data is a break start ACK. If it is a break start ACK, the process proceeds to step S491. If it is not a break start ACK, the process proceeds to step S485. In step S491, a break start ACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break start ACK received flag is used in the determination in step S453 described above.

  In step S485, it is determined whether the received data is a break forced release command. If the received data is a break forced release command, the process proceeds to step S492. If not, the process proceeds to step S486. In step S492, a break forced release command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break compulsory release command received flag is used in the determination in step S461 described above.

  In step S486, it is determined whether the received data is a break release command. If the received data is a break release command, the process proceeds to step S493. If not, the process proceeds to step S487. In step S493, a break release command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break release command received flag is used in the determination in step S462 described above.

  In step S487, it is determined whether the received data is a payment write completion ACK. If it is a payment write completion ACK, the flow advances to step S494, and if it is not a payment write completion ACK, the flow advances to step S489. In step S494, the settlement write completion ACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. The settlement write completion ACK received flag is used in the determination in step S413 described above.

  In step S489, it is determined whether the received data is a payment card extraction command. If the payment data is a payment card extraction command, the process proceeds to step S495, and if it is not a payment card extraction command, the process returns. In step S495, the payment card removal command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The payment card sampling command received flag is used in the determination in step S421 described above.

Next, the card unit reception analysis process 2 (S472) of the card unit reception analysis process (FIG. 49) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S501 whether there is data in the serial reception buffer (reception buffer for performing serial communication with the card unit 200), and if there is, the process proceeds to step S502. Return.

  In step S502, the data in the serial reception buffer is read as received data. In step S503, it is determined whether the received data is a member card ID. If it is a member card ID, the process proceeds to step S507. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, it is determined whether the received data is a visitor card ID. If the received data is a visitor card ID, the process proceeds to step S507. If not, the process proceeds to step S505.
In step S505, it is determined whether the received data is a staff (break release) card ID. If the received data is a staff card ID, the process proceeds to step S507. If not, the process proceeds to step S506.

  If it progresses to step S507, card IDACK will be transmitted to the card unit 200, and it will return after that. The transmission of the card IDACK to the card unit 200 is performed by the above-described second communication method (communication method 2) that can be encrypted by the payout control device 80 and decrypted by the card unit 200 side.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S506, it is determined whether the received data is a table IDACK (response signal from the card unit 200 to the transmission of the gaming machine ID). If the table IDACK, the process proceeds to step S508. Return. In step S508, the base IDACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, stand IDACK is transmitted immediately after receiving game machine ID, for example.

Next, the card unit reception analysis process 3 (S473) of the card unit reception analysis process (FIG. 49) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S4731 whether there is data in the serial reception buffer (reception buffer for performing serial communication with the card unit 200). If there is data, the process proceeds to step S4732. Return.

  In step S4732, the data in the serial reception buffer is read as reception data, and then in step S4733, it is determined whether the reception data is a monitored gaming machine setting command. Here, if it is a monitored game machine setting command, it is set as a monitored game machine in step S4735, and the process returns. If it is not a monitored game machine setting command, the process proceeds to step S4734.

  In step S4734, it is determined whether the received data is a fraudulent gaming machine setting command. Here, if it is a fraudulent gaming machine setting command, in step S4736 it is set as a fraudulent gaming machine and the process returns.

Next, the display editing process S185 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 26) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, an error display editing process (step S511), a count switch display editing process (step S512), and a break switch valid display editing process (step S513) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

Here, in the error display editing process, setting of display data for turning on or blinking an error display LED 88 (shown in FIG. 7) disposed on the back side of the payout control device 80 is executed.
In the count switch display editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays by the count switch LED 313 is executed.
In the break switch effective display editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays by the break switch effective display LED 314 is executed.

In the break switch effective display editing process, for example, the following display operation is realized.
That is, when the break permission condition described in the break start monitoring process (FIG. 46) described above is satisfied, the break switch valid display LED 314 is turned on to notify that a break is possible. Further, during the break, only the break switch valid display LED 314 blinks and lights up so that a mistake in pressing the counting switch 311 and the break switch 312 can be understood.

Next, the ball polishing motor control process S186 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 26) of the payout controller 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S541, it is determined whether or not the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 (maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch) has been on for a specified time, and is continuously turned on for a specified time or longer. If so, the process proceeds to step S550; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S542.

  In step S542, the value of the above-described ball polishing motor operation timer is read. If the value of this ball polishing motor operation timer is not zero, step S543 is jumped to and proceeds to step S544, where the ball polishing motor operation timer is zero ( That is, if the time is up), the process proceeds to step S543.

When the process proceeds to step S543, it is determined whether or not a game ball is being launched in the same manner as step S353 described above. If it is being launched, the process proceeds to step S544, and if not, the process proceeds to step S550.
In step S550, off data of the polishing apparatus motor 59 (that is, the ball polishing motor) is set, and the process returns. When the off data of the polishing apparatus motor 59 is set, the polishing apparatus motor 59 is controlled to be stopped. That is, the polishing apparatus motor 59 is stopped by the process of step S550. Then, when the polishing apparatus motor 59 is stopped, the operation of the polishing apparatus 56 is naturally stopped, and the circulation of the game ball in the circulation apparatus 55 is also stopped.

According to the above steps S541 to S543, when step S550 is executed and the polishing apparatus motor 59 is controlled to stop, there are the following two.
(1) The second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 (maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch) is kept on for a specified time or longer.
(2) The value of the ball polishing motor operation timer is zero and the game ball is not being fired.

  Here, in the case of (1), the polishing apparatus motor 59 is stopped because the game ball is flowing more than necessary on the downstream side of the polishing apparatus 56 (that is, the launching apparatus side). The apparatus 56 is stopped to prevent the game ball from being sent from the polishing apparatus 56 to the downstream side (that is, for adjusting the flow rate), and unnecessary operation of the polishing apparatus motor 59 is avoided to save energy. Because. The reason for stopping the polishing apparatus motor 59 in the case of (2) is to save energy by avoiding unnecessary operation of the polishing apparatus motor 59.

  In step S544, it is determined whether a ball clogging has occurred. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S551, and if not, the process proceeds to step S545. The determination as to whether or not a ball is clogged is made based on the state of the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 and / or the second enclosed ball detection switch 165. For example, if only the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 is turned on and the enclosed path abnormality error flag (the flag set in step S270 described above) is set, it may be determined that a ball clogging has occurred. Alternatively, if the polishing device motor 59 continues to operate for a specified time or more and the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 does not turn on for the specified time or more, a ball blockage (for example, a ball blockage in the polishing device 56) occurs. It may be determined that it has occurred.

  The ball clogging determined here is highly likely to be eliminated by reverse rotation of the polishing apparatus motor 59 (specifically, clogging in the circulation path in the circulation apparatus 55, more preferably in the polishing apparatus 56 and It is desirable that the ball is clogged at the inlet 75 and the outlet 76 of the polishing apparatus 56.

  In step S551, reverse rotation data for reversely rotating the polishing apparatus motor 59 (ball polishing motor) is set in order to eliminate the generated ball clogging, and the process returns. The polishing apparatus motor 59 is driven and controlled to rotate in reverse by setting the reverse rotation data. When the polishing device motor 59 rotates in the reverse direction, the flow of the game ball is reversed in the polishing device 56 of the circulation device 55 in FIG. 4, and the polishing device 56 operates in the direction in which the game ball descends. There is a high possibility that the ball will be automatically resolved, and in this case, it is possible to save the trouble of manually resolving the ball clogging by an amusement store employee or the like.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S545, the forward rotation data for rotating the polishing apparatus motor 59 (ball polishing motor) in the forward direction is set, and the process proceeds to step S546. The polishing apparatus motor 59 is driven and controlled to rotate forward by setting the forward rotation data. When the polishing apparatus motor 59 rotates in the forward direction, the flow of game balls becomes forward in the polishing apparatus 56 of the circulation apparatus 55 in FIG. 4, and the polishing apparatus 56 operates in the direction in which the game balls are lifted. Circulation of the ball (an operation of flowing the game ball collected from the game area again toward the launch position of the launch device) is performed.

  For example, when it is determined in step S544 that the ball clogging has occurred, the rotation is performed for a predetermined time after the reverse rotation for a predetermined time, even if it is determined that the ball clogging has occurred. Also good. Moreover, you may make it repeat the drive control of reverse rotation and forward rotation alternately, for example. Here, when the ball is not clogged, the specified time for forward rotation is that the game ball flows in from the lower inlet 75, is lifted by the polishing device 56, reaches the upper outlet 76, or is discharged from the upper outlet 76. It is better to set an average time of about. In this way, the game sphere is discharged from the upper outlet 76 provided on the upper left side of the polishing device 56, passes through the sensor flow path 77, and the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 and / or the second enclosed sphere detection switch. At 165, it can be determined whether the ball clogging has been eliminated.

  In step S546, the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer is read. If the value of this ball polishing motor operation timer is not zero, the process proceeds to step S547, and the ball polishing motor operation timer is zero (ie, time is up). If so, return. When the process proceeds to step S547, the ball polishing motor operation timer update process (that is, the process of decreasing the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer by one cycle of the timer process) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S548. In step S548, the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer is read. If the value of this ball polishing motor operation timer is not zero, the process returns, and the ball polishing motor operation timer is zero (ie, time is up). If so, in step S549, the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set, and then the process returns.

  According to steps S546 to S549, when the polishing apparatus motor 59 is rotating forward, the timing operation of the ball polishing motor operation timer proceeds, and the timing at which the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer becomes zero immediately after the update (that is, The enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set at a timing when the above-described ball polishing operation time ends and the polishing apparatus motor 59 stops. When the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set, it is determined in step S264 of the enclosing ball number monitoring process (FIG. 34) that there is a request for confirming the enclosing ball number, and step S265 of the enclosing ball number monitoring process is determined. Subsequent processing for monitoring excess / insufficiency of the number of encapsulated spheres and path abnormality (processing for determining the number of encapsulated spheres) is executed.

Here, the case where the polishing apparatus motor 59 (that is, the polishing apparatus 56) is operated by the above processing is summarized as follows.
(1) A game ball is being launched in a state in which an abnormality such as a clogged ball (that is, an abnormality in which the determination results in steps S541 and S544 are positive) has not occurred.
(2) When the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer is not zero in a state where no abnormality such as ball clogging has occurred (that is, the period of the ball polishing operation time).

  For this reason, as long as there is no abnormality such as ball clogging, even if the game ball is not being fired, the period of the ball polishing operation time (the period from when the ball polishing motor operation timer is set to the time is up) 56 is activated. The ball polishing motor operation timer is set in step S138 of the main process (FIG. 24) when the power is turned on, and when the glass frame 13 is opened and closed and the error release switch 87 is turned on, the frame opening error release switch monitoring process This is set in step S314 of FIG.

  For this reason, after the power is turned on and after the glass frame 13 is opened and closed and the error release switch 87 is turned on, the polishing apparatus motor 59 (that is, the polishing apparatus 56) is operated for a specified ball polishing operation time. It will be. The ball polishing motor operation timer also performs the above-described processing in step S314 (FIG. 37) even when the glass frame 13 is opened and closed without an error that needs to be canceled by the error cancellation switch 87. Therefore, in this case as well, the polishing apparatus 56 is operated for a specified ball polishing operation time, and thereafter, the process of checking the number of encapsulated balls is executed.

  Thereby, when the power is turned on, the game ball staying on the upstream side (upstream side including the polishing device 56) of the sensor flow channel 77 in the circulation device 55 is moved downstream (launching device) including the sensor flow channel 77. It is sent after being polished to the side of the launch position), so that the preparation for the start of the game is made accurately.

  Further, when a board surface ball number error (a state in which the board surface ball number error flag is set in step S243 in FIG. 32) occurs due to a blockage of balls in the game area, an employee of the game store opens the glass frame 13, for example. When the clogged ball was manually flowed down to release the clogged ball, the glass frame 13 was closed and the error release switch 87 was turned on, the polishing device 56 was automatically operated and clogged as described above. Polish the sphere and let it flow downstream. For this reason, when the ball that has been clogged in this way is manually released, this ball is automatically polished and sent to the launching device 60 side, and the subsequent preparation for resuming the game is made accurately, The game balls touched by employees are effectively prevented from being corroded and soiled.

  When the ball polishing operation time has elapsed (that is, when the operation of the polishing device 56 in the case (2) is stopped), the encapsulated ball number confirmation request flag is set in step S549, and the number of encapsulated balls is as described above. Is confirmed (the number of encapsulated balls is confirmed; after step S265), so that all the balls that have stayed or clogged as described above are automatically sent to the sensor flow path 77 side. Abnormality of the number of encapsulated balls is confirmed. Therefore, a highly reliable abnormality check of the number of encapsulated balls is performed every time the power is turned on, every time the ball clogging is manually released, and every time the glass frame 13 is simply opened and closed. Therefore, there is an effect that an abnormality in the number of encapsulated spheres can be detected early and accurately.

Next, the card unit command transmission process S183 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 26) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S571 whether or not the card unit transmission control timer is "0". This is because the card unit transmission control timer is set to an initial value (for example, 200 ms) in step S572, which will be described later, and "-1" is updated (incremented) from the initial value. It is to determine whether it has become.

When the card unit transmission control timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S572, and an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is set in the card unit transmission control timer.
For example, 200 ms is set as the initial value here. This initial value = 200 ms corresponds to a period shorter than the interval of updating the number of balls (the interval of a predetermined period (0.3 seconds)) when the operation display device 30 displays the number of balls held by the player.

In this embodiment, various information on the gaming machine 10 is sent from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200 every 200 ms. As a response thereto, the card unit 200 sends various information on the card unit 200 side to the gaming machine 10 side. Is configured to send.
Thus, since the information transmission interval (200 ms) between the payout control device 80 and the card unit 200 is shorter than the interval (0.3 seconds) for updating the number of balls, Information transmission between the payout control device 80 and the card unit 200 can be performed without any trouble with respect to updating or the like.

After step S572, a ball number command to the card unit 200 is set based on the number of balls in the subsequent step S573. A command sent from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200 is written in a serial transmission buffer for card unit communication.
The number-of-balls command is a command for informing the card unit 200 of the total number of balls.

Here, the commands transmitted from the gaming machine (gaming machine 10) to the card unit 200 will be described together as follows.
<Command for number of balls>
・ Number-of-ball commands: Command to notify the total number of balls-Updated ball-number command: Command to notify the number of balls that have changed since the previous transmission <Command to notify various states of gaming machines: gaming machines Information command>
・ Command to notify whether or not the game is in progress ・ Command to notify the number of gaming balls “0” ・ Command to notify the game completion ・ Command to notify the jackpot ・ Command to notify in special mode ・ Command to notify the game machine RAM clear (Notify that payment is possible when payment conditions are met) Command

  Note that the above is an example, and commands other than these may be included. Further, a command (game machine information command) for notifying various states of the gaming machine 10 may be composed of one command, but may be composed of a plurality of commands.

<Command to notify various error states of gaming machine 10: gaming machine error information command>
-Glass frame opening command-Inner frame opening command-Enclosed ball number error command-Board surface ball number error (floating ball error) command-Switch abnormality command-Bad prize opening illegal command-General power illegal command- Other commands for notifying the error information other than the above may be included.

  After step S573, an updated ball number command to the card unit 200 is set based on the updated ball number in the subsequent step S574. As described above, the updated number-of-balls command is a command for informing the card unit 200 of the number of balls that has changed since the previous transmission.

  In this way, by the processing in step S573 and step S574, the total number of balls (the number of balls held until the previous time) and the number of updated balls (the number of balls changed from the previous transmission) are changed every 200 ms to the card. These pieces of information are stored on the card unit 200 side, and the number of balls held is displayed on the operation display device 30 under the management (control) of the card unit 200 (for example, a ball box). (Analog display with a figure that is deceived).

  In step S575, the updated number of possessed balls is cleared to “0”. This is because the setting of the updated number of balls command to send the updated number of balls (the number of balls changed from the previous transmission) to the card unit 200 has been completed. This is to prepare for changes in the number. Next, 0 commands are prepared as counting ball number commands in step S576. In preparation for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311, there is a possibility that the number of counting balls = 0 depending on the timing, so 0 command is set as the counting ball number command.

  Next, in step S577, it is determined whether there is a command setting in the counting ball number command area. This is to determine whether a counting ball number command is already set in the counting ball number command area of the RAM 113 storing the counting ball number command. If it is determined in step S577 that there is a command setting in the counting ball number command area, the counting ball number command is loaded in step S578 and prepared for transmission to the card unit 200. That is, the value saved in the counting ball number command area in step S605 (FIG. 56) of the counting switch monitoring process described later is loaded.

  Next, in step S579, the counting ball number command area is cleared. This is because the counting ball number command is loaded in the previous step S578, so that it is cleared and prepared for the next time. Next, the process proceeds to step S580, and the counting ball number command prepared in step S578 is set as a command to the card unit 200. Thereby, the counting ball number command prepared in step S578 is sent to the card unit 200.

On the other hand, if no command is set in the counting ball number command area in step S577, the process jumps to step S580. In this case, the command of the number of counted balls = 0 prepared in step S576 is sent to the card unit 200.
After step S580, the process proceeds to step S581, where a gaming machine information command to the card unit 200 is set based on various information. As described above, the gaming machine information command is a command for notifying the card unit 200 of various states of the gaming machine 10, whereby the card unit 200 can grasp the various states of the gaming machine 10.
After step S581, the process returns.

  On the other hand, if the card unit transmission control timer is not “0” in step S571, the process branches to step S582 to update (decrement) the card unit transmission control timer and then return. When the routine is repeated and the card unit transmission control timer becomes “0”, the process goes from step S571 to step S572 to execute the processing from step S572 onward.

  In this manner, various information (the above-mentioned various information including the number of balls held, the number of balls held updated, and the number of balls counted) of the gaming machine 10 is sent from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200 every 200 ms. In addition, various information on the card unit 200 side is transmitted from the card unit 200 to the gaming machine 10 as a response thereto. Among these, since the ball number data such as the number of balls is transmitted and managed, the card unit 200 that has received these ball number data can display the number of balls held on the operation display device 30.

Next, the count switch monitoring process S204 in the switch monitoring process (FIG. 28) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S591 whether or not the counting switch 311 is on. If the counting switch 311 is in the on state, it is determined that the player intends to push the counting switch 311 to move the number of balls held under the control of the card unit 200, and the process proceeds to step S592, where an initial value is set in the shooting stop timer during counting. (For example, 2 seconds) is set. This is to set the firing stop period in order to stop the launch of the ball while counting the number of balls.

  Next, in step S593, the count switch-on timer is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step S594, it is determined whether the count switch-on timer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. The counting switch-on timer counts the elapsed time from when the player presses the counting switch 311.

The upper limit value in step S594 corresponds to a time during which all the number of balls can be counted, and is set to 6 seconds, for example. If the count switch-on timer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value in step S594, the process proceeds to step S595, and the count switch-on timer is kept at the upper limit value. This suppresses the upper limit value so that the timer does not loop if the counting switch-on timer is set to a value larger than a time value (for example, 6 seconds) that allows the total counting of the number of balls to be held. .
After step S595, the process proceeds to step S596. On the other hand, if the count switch-on timer is less than the upper limit value in step S594, the process jumps to step S595 and proceeds to step S596.

In step S596, it is determined whether the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second. If the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second, the process proceeds to step S597.
In step S596, it is determined whether the count switch-on timer is 1 second or longer. If the count switch-on timer is 1 second or longer, the process proceeds to step S597. Step S596 is a determination for setting the number of units of counting in the processing after step S597 when the counting switch-on timer is 1 second.

  The time of counting switch-on timer = 1 second corresponds to the minimum time for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311. Accordingly, the operation of the counting switch 311 in a time shorter than 1 second is invalid, and the counting of the number of balls is not started. Since less than 1 second may cause the player to touch the counting switch 311 by mistake, it is invalidated to prevent malfunction.

If it is determined in step S596 that the count switch-on timer is not 1 second, this time the process jumps to step S600 without setting the number of units for counting. On the other hand, if the count switch-on timer is 1 second, the process proceeds to step S597 to set the count unit number.
In the processing after step S597, the number of units of counting is determined as follows. The unit number of counting is a numerical value (hereinafter referred to as a unit count value) indicating how many balls are counted in units of one second, for example.

  In step S597, it is determined whether the number of balls is “1000” or less. If the number of holding balls is “1000” or less, the process branches to step S612 to set “50” as the unit count value, and then proceeds to step S600. On the other hand, if the number of held balls exceeds “1000” in step S597, the process proceeds to step S598, and it is determined whether or not the number of held balls is “10000” or less. If the number of held balls is “10000” or less, the process branches to step S613 to set “100” as the unit count value, and then proceeds to step S600.

On the other hand, if the number of possessed balls exceeds “10000” in step S598, “1000” is set as the unit count value in step S599, and the process proceeds to step S600.
Next, when the process proceeds to step S600, it is determined whether or not the number of possessed balls is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process proceeds to the process after step S601 and the number of possessed balls is counted. If the number of balls held is “0” in step S600, the process returns (no counting is performed).
When the process proceeds to step S601 and subsequent steps, it is first determined in step S601 whether or not the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing unit counting.

The value of the timing for performing the unit counting is that the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated because the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated when the minimum time for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311 is less than 1 second. It is a time of 1 second or more and a timing with 0.5 second as a unit break after 1 second. Specifically, the timing corresponds to a timer value indicating 1.0 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.5 seconds,.
Accordingly, the processing in step S601 is performed at the timing of 0.5 sec as a unit break, that is, 1.0 sec, 1.5 sec, 2.0 sec, 2.5 sec,. Value of timing for performing unit counting).

Here, the number of units of the count described above will be described specifically as follows. The following unit count value corresponds to “count unit”.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: Invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls held.
(A) Counting 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less (meaning unit count value = 50, the same applies hereinafter)
(B) Counting 100 balls from 1001 to 10,000 balls. (C) Counting 1000 balls from 10001 balls. After that, every 0.5 seconds:
(B) Count 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less. (B) Count 100 balls when the number of balls is between 1001 and 10,000. (C) Count 1000 when the number is 10001 or more. .0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

  As described above, in this example, the value of timing for performing unit counting is set by dividing the pressing time of the counting switch 311 every 0.5 seconds. For less than 1 second, the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated to prevent the counting switch 311 from malfunctioning. Regardless of how many balls are held, the count time of the count switch 311 is all counted in 6.0 seconds.

Now, returning to the flow, if the count switch-on timer is the value at which the unit count is performed in step S601, it is determined that the number of balls possessed by the operation of the count switch 311 is determined, and the process proceeds to the subsequent step S602. It is determined whether the number is less than the unit count value. If the number of held balls is less than the unit count value, the number of held balls at that time is replaced with the unit count value in step S603. This is to simplify the counting process by replacing the remaining number of balls at that time with the unit count value when the number of balls remaining is less than the unit count value.
After step S603, the process proceeds to step S604. On the other hand, if the number of held balls is not less than the unit count value in step S602, the process jumps to step S603 and proceeds to step S604.

  In step S 604, “total count value + unit count value” is set as the total count value, and is stored in the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80. This is because when the card unit 200 cannot be written in the settlement write completion monitoring process, the settlement is dealt with using the total count value stored in the RAM 83.

  In step S605, the unit count value is saved in the count ball number command area. Here, the unit count value is saved in the counting ball number command area, and the game information (including the number of balls held, the number of counting balls, etc.) from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200 is periodically (200 ms). This is because the data is taken out and sent to the card unit 200 when the transmission process is performed.

Next, in step S606, “number of balls held−unit count value” is set as the current number of balls, and in step S607, the number of balls held (number of balls processed in step S606) is set as the number of balls held for display, and the routine is terminated and returned. To do.
By the processing of step S606 and step S607, every time the number of balls is counted, it is subtracted from the unit count value and stored as the number of balls for display in the storage area of the RAM 113 that stores the number of balls.

Next, a description will be given of a case in which the determination at each step branches to a route different from that described above.
If the count switch 311 is not on in step S591, it is determined that the player has not pressed the count switch 311 or has pressed the count switch 311 but released for a moment, and the process branches to step S608. If it is not “0”, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”.

This is because if the player has not pressed the counting switch 311 at all, the process returns through steps S609 to S611, which will be described later, so the counting of the number of held balls is not started, but the player presses the counting switch 311 to hold the ball If there is an intention to start counting, a grace period (for example, 2 seconds) so that the counting of the number of balls can be continued even if the counting switch 311 is turned off for a moment during counting. ) Is provided, the counting stop timer is updated (decremented) by “−1” in order to count the grace period.
On the other hand, if the firing stop timer during counting is “0”, it is determined that the player has not pressed the counting switch 311.

  After step S608, it is determined in a subsequent step S609 whether or not the counting stop timer is “0”. If the firing stop timer is not “0” during counting, the process returns and the routine is repeated. As described above, when the player intends to start counting the number of balls held by pressing the count switch 311, even if the count switch 311 is turned off for a moment during the count, the count switch 311 is held. Although a grace period is provided so that the counting of the number of balls can be continued, NO in step S609 is a case where the grace period is counted.

  On the other hand, if the counting stop timer during counting is “0” in step S609, the process proceeds to step S610 to clear the count switch-on timer to “0”, and in step S611 to clear the total count value to “0” and return. . In this case, the player has not pressed the counting switch 311 at all, and the counting of the number of balls is not started.

  If it is determined in step S601 that the count switch-on timer is not the timing value for performing unit counting, the process branches to step S614, and it is determined whether the count switch-on timer is the timing value for performing total counting. . The timing of total counting is that when the count switch 311 is pressed for 6.0 seconds, the number of balls held will be counted regardless of the number of balls held. 6.0 seconds).

  Therefore, if it is not the value of the timing when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 becomes 6.0 seconds in step S614, the routine ends and returns, and the timing when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 becomes 6.0 seconds. If it is a value, the process proceeds to step S615, where “total count value + unit count value” is set as the total count value and stored in the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80.

  Next, in step S616, the number of balls held is saved in the counting ball number command area. Here, the number of balls held is saved in the counting ball number command area, and the game information (including the number of balls held, the number of counting balls, etc.) from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200 is periodically (200 ms). This is because the data is taken out and sent to the card unit 200 when the transmission process is performed.

Next, in step S617, the number of held balls is cleared to "0", and in step S618, the number of held balls for display is cleared to "0", the routine is terminated, and the process returns.
By the processing from step S614 to step S618, all the number of balls held are counted and saved in the counting ball number command area, and thereafter, both the number of balls held and the number of balls held for display are cleared to “0”. Become.

Next, the control contents of the card unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, the main process of the card unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.
This main process starts when power is supplied to the card unit 200. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply device 58 that supplies power to the card unit 200 is turned on, first, a startup process is executed in step S621. Although this activation process will be described later, connection confirmation with the gaming machine 10, the hall computer 150, or the like is performed. When the activation process is completed, the following loop of steps is repeated.

When the process proceeds to step S622 following the start-up process, it is determined whether or not a game card has been inserted into the card slot 201 of the card unit 200. If no game card is accepted, the process proceeds to step S623, and if a game card is accepted. In step S631, a card acceptance process is executed, and then the routine is repeated.
In step S623, it is determined whether the player has operated the ball lending button 212. If there is no ball lending operation, the flow proceeds to step S624. If there is a ball lending operation, the lending process is executed in step S632, and then the routine is executed. Repeated.

  Next, in step S624, it is determined whether or not cash is inserted into the cash slot 202 of the card unit 200. If no cash is accepted, the process proceeds to step S625. If cash is accepted, the issuance / payment is performed in step S633. Processing is performed and then the routine is repeated.

In step S625, it is determined whether the player has operated the return button 213. If there is no return operation, the process proceeds to step S626. If there is a return operation, return processing (settlement command transmission, etc.) is executed in step S634. The routine is then repeated.
In step S626, it is determined whether the player has operated the replay button 211. If there is a replay operation, the replay process is executed in step S635. If there is no replay operation, the routine is repeated thereafter. It is.

Next, the startup process S621 in the main process (FIG. 57) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, a self-diagnosis is executed in step S641, the mode such as what kind of control stage it is in is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in step S642. If the determination result in step S642 is YES and there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to the next step S643, and it is determined whether or not the hall computer 150 that is the management apparatus (higher server) can communicate with each other. If the determination result of step S642 is NO, it is determined that there is some abnormality in the card unit 200, and the process jumps to step S658.

  If the determination result in step S643 is YES, the above-described online processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S644, where the card unit 200 requests the hall computer 150 to send actual management information ( Send this authentication request. Thereafter, as the verification process of the main controller 221 itself of the card unit 200, the process proceeds to step S645, where it is determined whether the verification result from the hall computer 150 has been received.

  If the collation result is received (YES in step S645), the process proceeds to the next step S646 to determine whether or not the collation result is OK. On the other hand, if the collation result is not received (NO in step S645), the process is repeated until the collation result is received, and a standby state is entered. Step S646 here corresponds to (A56 to A57) in FIG. 11 described above.

If the determination result in step S642 is NO and there is some abnormality in the card unit 200, a flag corresponding to the type of abnormality is set in step S658, and then the process proceeds to step S659 to notify that there is an abnormality. For example, notification (display or the like) is made by means of a notification lamp 204 or the like.
Similarly, if the collation result in step S646 is not OK, the flag corresponding to the type of abnormality is set in step S658, and then the process proceeds to step S659. Informs (displays, etc.) by 204 or the like and returns.

  If “NO” in the step S643 or “YES” in the step S646, the process proceeds to a step S647 to execute an internal mutual matching process. That is, in the card unit 200, the main control device 221 and the communication control device 222 collate the actual management information registered with each other. Step S647 here corresponds to (A59) in FIG. 11 described above.

Then, in step S648, the collation result of the internal mutual collation process is determined. If the collation result = OK, YES in step S648, the process proceeds to step S649, and the main control device 221 sends a communication control device 222 to the communication control device 222. A management information transmission request to the gaming machine 10 is instructed.
On the other hand, if collation result = NG, NO is determined in the step S648, the process proceeds to a step S658 to set a flag corresponding to the collation result = NG, and then proceeds to a step S659 to notify that the collation result = NG. For example, notification (display or the like) is made by the notification lamp 204 or the like, and the process returns.

Next, in step S650, it is determined whether or not management information from the gaming machine 10 is received. If the management information is received (YES in step S650), the management information is registered in step S651. At this time, a notification that the management information has been received may be transmitted to the gaming machine 10.
On the other hand, if the management information is not received (NO in step S650), the process is repeated until the management information is received, and a standby state is entered. Step S651 here corresponds to (A63) in FIG. 11 described above.

  Thereafter, when the process proceeds to step S652, it is determined whether or not the card unit 200 is in an offline state. If the card unit 200 is in an offline state, the management information collating process is performed in step S653, and then the process proceeds to step S660. Thus, if it is an offline state, the card unit 200 will perform the collation work of the gaming machine 10.

  On the other hand, if not in an offline state (that is, in an online state), the management information is transmitted to the hall computer 150 in step S654, and then the process proceeds to step S655. In this way, whether or not management information is sent to the hall computer 150 differs depending on whether it is offline or online. In the online state, the card unit 200 transmits the management information sent from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 150 for verification.

  Next, in step S655, it is determined whether a management information collation result has been received. If the management information collation result is received (YES in step S655), it is determined in next step S656 whether the management information collation result is OK. On the other hand, if the management information collation result has not been received (NO in step S655), a flag indicating that it has not been received is set in step S658, and then in step S659 the fact is notified by the notification lamp 204 or the like. Inform (display, etc.) and return.

If the management information collation result is OK in step S656 (YES in step S656), the process proceeds to step S657, and communication key transmission / reception processing is performed so that the card unit 200 can start communication.
On the other hand, if the management information collation result is NG (NO in step S656), the process proceeds to step S658, and a flag indicating that the management information collation result is NG is set. Announcement (display etc.) is made by the notice lamp 204 or the like, and the process returns. In this case, basically, the management information collation result is not transmitted to the gaming machine 10, and the game cannot be started.

  Thereafter, when the process proceeds to step S660, it is determined whether or not the frame opening information is received from the gaming machine 10. If the frame opening information is received (YES in step S660), the process proceeds to the next step S661 to register the frame opening information. On the other hand, if the frame opening information is not received (NO in step S660), the process is repeated until the frame opening information is received, and a standby state is entered. Step S661 here corresponds to (A63) in FIG. 11 described above.

  When the processing proceeds to step S662, a notification that the frame opening information has been received is transmitted to the gaming machine 10.

  Next, in step S663, it is determined again whether the card unit 200 is in an offline state. If it is offline (YES in step S663), the process proceeds to step S665. If it is not offline (that is, if it is online) (NO in step S663), the frame opening information is sent to the hall computer 150 in step S664. After the transmission, the process proceeds to step S665.

In a succeeding step S665, it is determined whether or not the frame opening information indicates that the frame is open. If the frame is open (YES in step S665), the process proceeds to step S666. If the frame is not open (NO in step S665), the process returns thereafter.
In step S666, a frame opening fraud flag is set, and in step S667, notification control for notifying (displaying, etc.) the notification by means of notification lamp 204 or the like is set in step S667. A fraud check process is executed in S668. Although this fraud check process will be described later, it is a process for setting a monitored gaming machine based on a predetermined condition.

  In addition, if any fraudulent act has been performed after an employee of the game shop confirms the fraud based on the presence of the frame opening information, the card unit 200 corresponding to the gaming machine 10 in which the fraudulent act has been performed. However, a fraud occurrence history may be left as a result. The history is created continuously for a predetermined period. Also, the type of fraud, the presence / absence of fraud, and the release of fraud are registered by the operation of the employee's remote control 160, and the information of each card unit 200 is sent to the hall computer 150 in a batch and managed. Also good.

Next, the internal mutual matching process S647 in the startup process (FIG. 58) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the main control device 221 transmits mutual verification data to the communication control device 222 in step S671. Here, the mutual verification data is the above-described actual management information such as a unit serial ID registered in the storage area of the communication control device 222. When the mutual verification data is transmitted to the communication control device 222, It is verified whether the data included in the actual management information registered in the control device 221 and the communication control device 222 match each other.

  In step S672, it is determined whether or not the collation result by the collation has been received. If the collation result is received (YES in step S672), the collation result is determined in step S673. On the other hand, if the collation result has not been received (NO in step S672), the process is repeated until the collation result is received, and a standby state is entered.

  If the collation result is determined in step S673 and the collation result = OK (YES in step S673), the process proceeds to step S674, and the main controller 221 initializes the actual management information to the communication controller 222. Send instructions. On the other hand, if the collation result is not OK but the collation result is NG (NO in step S673), the process proceeds to step S682 to register that the collation result is NG and then returns.

  Next, in step S675, it is determined whether or not a notification that the initialization of the actual management information in the communication control device 222 has been completed is received. If the notification is received (YES in step S675), step S676 is performed. The main control device 221 determines whether or not the same mutual verification data has been received from the communication control device 222. On the other hand, if the notification has not been received (NO in step S675), the process is repeated until the notification is received, and a standby state is entered.

  If it is determined in step S676 that main controller 221 has received the mutual verification data from communication control unit 222 (YES in step S676), the received data is verified in step S677, and then in step S678. The main control device 221 transmits the collation result to the communication control device 222. On the other hand, if main controller 221 has not yet received the data for mutual verification (NO in step S676), the process is repeated until it is received, and a standby state is entered.

In step S679, the collation result is determined. If collation result = OK (YES in step S679), the process proceeds to step S680 to register that the collation result = OK. Thereafter, in step S681, main controller 221 sets the start of communication with communication controller 222, ends the routine, and returns. On the other hand, if the collation result is not OK but the collation result is NG (NO in step S679), the process proceeds to step S682 to register that the collation result is NG.
As described above, according to this routine, if the collation result is OK in both the collation results in step S673 and step S679, the communication start state using the communication key described above is entered to start the game.

Next, the fraud check process S668 in the activation process (FIG. 58) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S6681 whether or not a check result has been input. Here, the check result is information input by an employee of the amusement shop. For example, when the card unit 200 performs a predetermined notification based on the notification control in step S667 in the activation process (FIG. 58). The check result is input by the display input device 203 of the card unit 200.

If a check result is input in step S6681, the check result is registered in step S6682. On the other hand, if there is no input of the check result, the process is repeated until there is an input, and a standby state is entered.
A specific example of the predetermined notification by the card unit 200 will be described later. Based on the notification, an employee of the game store opens the glass frame 13 and the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and is illegal (nails). Confirm that bending, mixing of small-diameter spheres, control device replacement, etc.) have been performed. The confirmation result here is registered as the check result.

  Next, in step S6683, the presence / absence of unauthorized information is determined. Here, if there is no unauthorized information, it is set as a monitored game machine in step S6684. On the other hand, if there is fraud information, the process jumps to step S6687 to set as a fraudulent gaming machine, and after the fraudulent gaming machine setting command is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 in step S6688, the process returns.

“Unauthorized information” here refers to information on fraud (such as nail bending, small-diameter ball mixing, control device replacement, etc.) that can be visually confirmed when an employee opens the glass frame 13 or the like as described above. is there.
Further, the “illegal occurrence gaming machine setting command” is information for notifying the gaming machine 10 or the like and not starting the game immediately. The payout control device 80 performs notification based on the presence of the frame opening information and does not perform the game start control, but also transmits the fraudulent gaming machine setting command.

  By the way, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is premised that the game ball is made of a non-magnetic material that prevents fraud due to a magnet, a game ball made of a magnetic material is enclosed later. Even if it is done, fraud regarding the inclusion of game balls of such magnetic material cannot be confirmed visually by employees of the game store.

  Therefore, when the fraud is confirmed by opening the glass frame 13 or the like, and if no visible fraud is performed, the employee places a game ball of magnetic material on the gaming machine 10 as a predetermined condition. Assume that there is a risk of being encapsulated. In step S6684, the gaming machine 10 can be set as a “monitoring target gaming machine” by the monitoring target setting means such as the display input device 203.

Information set as a gaming machine to be monitored in this way is stored as needed in, for example, the RAM of the card unit 200 as a storage means, or an external storage device in the hall computer 150, etc., as in the case of the illegal information. Can do.
Even if it is after the setting of the monitored gaming machine, if a fraud determination is made after starting the game due to a clogged ball or the like, there will be a fraud determination later in the newly corresponding storage area. Can be re-registered.

Next, in step S6685, a prescribed number for fraud determination with respect to the monitored gaming machine is set. In step S 6686, a monitoring target gaming machine setting command is transmitted to the gaming machine 10.
Here, the prescribed number for fraud determination is used by fraud determination means capable of determining based on the number of game balls existing in the game machine 10 or in the game area 22 (specific area). The fraud determination means is a function of the payout control device 80 for executing the above-described enclosing ball number monitoring process (FIG. 34) and the board surface ball number error monitoring process (FIGS. 35 and 36).
By transmitting the monitoring target gaming machine setting command, the gaming machine 10 sets the specified number to that at the monitoring target.

  In the step S6685, for example, the setting means such as the display input device 203 can arbitrarily set the prescribed number of game balls that the fraud determination means uses as a determination criterion for the presence or absence of fraud. The prescribed number relating to the target gaming machine can be set to a value different from that of the gaming machine 10 other than the monitored gaming machine. For example, since there is a high possibility of fraud in the monitored gaming machine, as described in the board ball number error monitoring process in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 described above, the prescribed number related to the monitored gaming machine is set to a normal gaming machine. It is better to set it lower than 10.

Next, card reception processing S631 in the main processing (FIG. 57) of the card unit 200 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S6311 whether or not the player is taking a break. If the player is not taking a break, the process proceeds to the next step S6312. If the player is taking a break, the process jumps to step S6314.

In step S6312, the card ID of the inserted game card is read and transmitted from the card unit 200 to the gaming machine 10. In step S6313, the game start setting process is performed, and then the process returns.
In step S6314, it is determined whether or not the card ID of the inserted game card is the ID of the card on which the player is resting. Here, if it is the ID of the card being rested, it is determined in S6315 whether or not the specified time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is not the ID of the card during the break, the game card inserted in step S6321 is discharged and then the process returns.

If the specified time has passed in the determination in step S6315 described above, data such as the card ID and game history is deleted in step S6316, and then the process proceeds to step S6321 to eject the inserted game card and return. To do.
On the other hand, if the specified time has not elapsed in the determination in step S6315, the process proceeds to step S6317 to execute the break release setting process. In subsequent step S6318, a break release command is transmitted to hall computer 150, and the process proceeds to step S6319.

Next, in step S6319, a break release command is transmitted to the gaming machine 10, and after game resumption setting processing is executed in subsequent step S6320, the process returns.
Even if the game card is not received, if the predetermined time set at the start of the break has elapsed, the data such as the card ID and game history of the player who is taking a break as shown in step S6316 are cleared. Then, the display input device 203 of the card unit 200, the display device 35 of the gaming machine 10 or the like is displayed to indicate that the break has been completed or a customer waiting screen is displayed so that anyone can play the game. Also good.

Next, a break acceptance process performed by receiving a break request command from the gaming machine 10 in a received command analysis process (FIG. 64) described later will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started by receiving a break request command from the gaming machine 10 (the payout control device 80), it is first determined in step S6361 whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a breakable state (game). The machine 10 is configured to transmit a break request command on condition that it is in a breakable state, but the card unit 200 side again determines whether or not it is in a breakable state. The occurrence of an error in the card unit 200 alone). If it is not in a breakable state, the process proceeds to step S6362a. If it is in a breakable state, the process jumps to step S6363.

If it progresses to step S6362a, after setting a break transfer impossible display, the command regarding a break rejection will be transmitted to the gaming machine 10 (the payout control device 80) (step S6362b), and it will return. Note that in the gaming machine 10 (the payout control device 80), when the break start ACK is not transmitted within the specified time, the break request is canceled, so that a command regarding break rejection should not be transmitted. May be.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S6363, a break request command is transmitted to the hall computer 150, and in the subsequent step S6364, a break transition wait timer is set to 10 seconds, for example, as the floating ball processing time in the gaming machine 10, and the same in step S6365. It is determined whether the timer has become “0” and typed up.

If the break transition wait timer expires, the process proceeds to step S6366. On the other hand, if the time has not expired, the determination result in step S6365 is NO, the process returns to step S6365, and the loop is repeated.
In step S6366, data such as a card ID and game history is backed up. Since a break request command has already been transmitted to the gaming machine 10, data such as a card ID and gaming history may be backed up only on the gaming machine 10 side.

Next, in step S6367, a specified time is set, and in the subsequent step S6368, a command relating to break start permission is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 (the payout control device 80), and then, in step S6369, the game card is ejected. Return.
In step S6364, a weight for the floating ball processing time in the gaming machine 10 is provided, but this weight may be controlled on the gaming machine 10 side. In that case, without performing the processing of step S6364 and step S6365, backup after step S6366 and setting of a specified time are performed, and a command related to break start permission is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 (the payout control device 80). It becomes.

Next, command reception interrupt processing in the card unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.
This command reception interrupt process is a process for receiving a command transmitted from the main control device 221 by the communication control device 222, and includes a content for checking whether the data constituting the command is within a normal range. include. The command from the main controller 221 includes MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), which are sequentially transmitted.

  When this routine is started, the reception monitoring timer is first stopped in step S701. In step S702, it is determined whether or not there is a command. If there is a command, the process proceeds to step S703. If there is no command, the process proceeds to step S715, in which the MODE flag is set to NG, and the process returns.

In step S703, the command from the main controller 221 input at this time is input, and then in step S704, it is determined whether or not the received command is MODE. If the received command is MODE. The process proceeds to step S705, and if it is not MODE, the process jumps to steps S705 to S707 and proceeds to step S708.
In step S705, the received data input in step S703 is registered as MODE, and in step S706, the MODE flag is set to OK. In step S707, the value of the reception monitoring timer is reset to zero and the reception starts. Return after starting the timer operation.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S708, it is determined whether the value of the MODE flag is OK. If MODE = OK, the process proceeds to step S709. If MODE = OK is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S715, and MODE = NG is set and then the process returns. .
In step S709, it is determined whether or not the reception monitoring timer has timed out. If timed out, the process proceeds to step S710. If not timed out, the process proceeds to step S715, the MODE flag is set to NG, and the process returns.

  If the value of the MODE flag is not OK in step S708, it is abnormal because, for example, ACTION command data has been received, but MODE command data has not been received prior to that. If the time-out has occurred in step S709, it is abnormal because the ACTION command data is not received within the specified reception monitoring time counted by the reception monitoring timer from the time when the MODE command data is received.

  In step S710, the command input in step S703 is confirmed as ACTION, the process proceeds to step S711, the MODE flag is set to NG, and then the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, it is determined whether the command reception counter is a predetermined value. If it is the predetermined value, MODE and ACTION are registered in step S713, and then the command reception counter is updated (incremented) by "+1" in step S714, and the process returns. . On the other hand, if the command reception counter is not a predetermined value, it returns as it is.

Next, received command analysis processing in the card unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S721, the upper byte of the command data received this time is separated into MODE and the lower byte is separated into ACT, and whether or not MODE is normal in subsequent step S722. judge. If the MODE is normal, the process proceeds to step S723. If the MODE is not normal, the process directly returns.

In step S723, it is determined whether the command is a frame opening information command. If the command is not a frame opening information command, the processing proceeds to step S724. If the command is a frame opening information command, processing for receiving a frame opening information command is executed in step S731. And then return.
In step S724, it is determined whether the command is a RAM clear command. If the command is not a RAM clear command, the process proceeds to step S725. If the command is a RAM clear command, the process at the time of RAM clear command reception is executed in step S732, and thereafter Return.

When it proceeds to step S725, it is determined whether or not it is a production command, and if it is not a production command, the process proceeds to step S726. If it is a production command, the production command reception process is executed in step S733, and thereafter Return.
In step S726, it is determined whether the command is an other command. If the command is not another command, the process returns. If the command is another command, the other command reception process is executed in step S734, and then the process returns.

Next, the frame opening information command reception processing S731 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S741 whether or not the frame opening information command = night frame open (with frame open). If the night frame is open, the number of opening / closing is checked in step S742. Then, it progresses to step S743. On the other hand, if the nighttime frame is not opened, the process proceeds to step S743 without checking the number of opening / closing operations in step S742.

In step S743, a command corresponding to the frame opening information command is generated. In step S744, the generated frame opening information command is transmitted to the hall computer 150, and then the process returns.
In this routine, a command corresponding to the frame opening information is set to be transmitted to the hall computer 150 regardless of whether the frame opening information command is opened or not.
Further, when the frame is opened, the number of times of opening and closing is included in the command, but it may not necessarily be included. Note that after the command corresponding to the frame opening information command is reliably transmitted to the hall computer 150, the frame opening information may be cleared, or a predetermined period of time may be stored.

Next, RAM clear command reception processing S732 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S751, the collation result of the internal mutual collation process (FIG. 59) is checked. In step S752, it is determined whether or not collation is completed. If collation is completed, the process proceeds to step S753. If collation is not completed, the process returns to step S751 and the process is repeated.

  In step S753, it is determined whether or not the collation result is OK. If OK, the history information stored in step S754 is cleared. On the other hand, if the collation result is not OK (that is, collation result = NG), the process returns as it is without clearing the history information in step S754. Thus, in this embodiment, the history information is cleared only when the collation is completed and the collation result is OK.

Next, an encapsulated ball number shortage error command reception process which is one of the other command reception processes S734 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S761 whether or not an enclosed ball number shortage error command has been received.

  Here, if an encapsulated ball number shortage error command is received, an encapsulated ball number shortage error notification is set in step S762, and if not received, the process directly returns. In addition, regarding the insufficient ball number error notification, not only the gaming machine 10 but also the card unit 200 may be notified.

  In subsequent step S763, the fraudulent information regarding the encapsulated ball number shortage error is stored in the frame opening information history data storage unit in the RAM of the card unit 200 as the storage means. The frame opening information history data storage unit will be described below. In step S764, a command corresponding to the encapsulated ball number shortage error is generated. In step S765, the generated command is transmitted to the hall computer 150, and the process returns.

Next, the storage means in the card unit 200 will be described.
The card unit 200 includes various data storage units that constitute storage means. Various information generated in the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200 is aggregated at any time and accumulated and stored in various data storage units for each type of information. The various data storage unit can store, for example, history data for 10 days as a predetermined period, and the operation display device 30 or display input based on a predetermined operation by a player or a game shop employee according to the type of information. It can be displayed on the device 203 or the like.

The frame opening information history data storage unit for accumulating the frame opening information among such various data storage units will be described with reference to FIG.
In the frame opening information history data storage unit, information on opening history, fraud information, target setting, and fraud occurrence setting can be stored, for example, for 10 days for each business day, and these information are sequentially updated. .

  Here, the opening history is a history of the frame opening information, and is recorded as “present” when the frame is opened and “absent” when the frame is not opened. Further, as described above, the fraud information is information on fraud (eg, nail bending, small diameter ball mixing, control device replacement, etc.) that can be visually confirmed when an amusement shop employee opens the glass frame 13 or the like. When the fraud is confirmed, “Yes” is recorded, and when the fraud cannot be confirmed, “No” is recorded. In the case of “present”, the fraudulent type (for example, replacement of the control device is “board”) can be recorded so that it can be distinguished.

  The target setting is information related to the setting of the monitoring target gaming machine in step S6684 of the above-described fraud check process (FIG. 60), and “Yes” when set as the monitoring target gaming machine, is not set as the monitoring target gaming machine. In this case, record “None”. The fraud occurrence setting is information related to the setting of the fraudulent gaming machine in step S 6687 of the fraud check process (FIG. 60) described above. If not, record “None”.

  As described above, in the case of a fraud that can be confirmed visually, it is set as a fraudulent gaming machine when the power is turned on. After that, if there is an actual fraud, it is set as a fraudulent gaming machine. If there is no fraud after that, the setting as the monitoring target gaming machine is canceled, and “No” is recorded in the setting relating to the fraudulent gaming machine.

  The various types of information are sequentially updated, so that the oldest record (for example, 10 days ago) is deleted. As for, the memory may be held until a predetermined clear operation is performed. In this case, it is preferable that the predetermined clear operation can be operated only by a limited part of employees.

Next, details of the control operations of the card unit 200 described above and the characteristic control operations by the control processing of the gaming machine 10 will be described according to the process state transition diagrams shown in FIGS.
In order to clarify the correspondence between the figure and the description, each process or state illustrated in the process state transition diagram is denoted by a symbol F such as F1, F2,. In the following, the correspondence relationship with the flowchart described above will be described as appropriate, but the control operations described below include those omitted in the description of the flowchart described above.

  Here, transmission conditions in communication performed between the card unit 200 (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) side and the gaming machine 10 (hereinafter also abbreviated as P machine) side will be described in advance. The transmission condition from the CU side to the P machine side is established when a response from the P machine side is received within a predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment) to be described later from the previous command transmission and the previous command is sent. This is when a predetermined time (200 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the transmission.

  The transmission condition from the P machine side to the CU side is established because the command from the CU side is received within the predetermined time (4 seconds in this embodiment) from the previous transmission and the previous transmission is performed. This is a time when a predetermined time (200 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed. In the following, even when this transmission condition is described in a simplified manner, strictly speaking, transmission is executed when such a transmission condition is satisfied.

Also, the CU side and the P machine side basically back up the transmitted / received information (including SQN) every time, and there are some parts that are not described below.
Basically, communication between the CU side and the P machine side is started by transmitting a command from the CU side to the P machine side.

First, referring to FIG. 69, the control operation on the CU side when the power is turned on will be described.
This control operation on the CU side when the power is turned on is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU side and the P machine side is normally completed. Specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power supply of the CU (card unit 200) is turned off during standby in which no game card is inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement store after one day of business is completed, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  When the power is turned on, the CU first executes a device information request command transmission process (F1) for transmitting a device information request command to the P machine side. This device information request command transmission processing is executed, for example, in the command setting processing in step B13 described above (the same applies to other command transmission processing described later).

  Next, after execution of the device information request command transmission process (F1) (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as “after F1 execution”), before the monitoring timer determines that 1 second has elapsed, When a device information response response (response including information on the base ID) from the corresponding P machine side is received, a reception information backup process (F2) for storing the received base ID information is executed, and then a predetermined time ( In this embodiment, the next command transmission condition is satisfied when 200 ms) elapses. The stand ID is information including individual identification information (referred to as a unique ID, chip code, chip ID, etc.) of the IC chip constituting the CPU 111.

  Then, after execution of F1, if the device information response response from the corresponding P machine side is not received and it is determined by the monitoring timer that one second has elapsed, the next command transmission condition is not satisfied, and the command retransmission process ( F11) is executed. In the command retransmission process (F11), the same information as in the device information request command transmission process (F1) is retransmitted.

  After the command retransmission process (F11) is executed, the received information backup process (F2) is executed if the corresponding response from the P machine side can be received by 1 second after the monitoring timer expires, as in the case after the execution of F1. If the corresponding response from the P machine side cannot be received by one second, the command re-transmission process (F12) is executed, and the same process (transmission of the same information as F1) is repeated. However, if the corresponding response from the P machine side is not received within one second after the command re-transmission process (F12) is executed (that is, if the next command transmission condition is not satisfied), it is determined that the communication is abnormal, Wait for power off.

In other words, after the command is sent, if the response cannot be received within a predetermined time (in this case, within 1 second) after sending the command, the CU will retransmit the same command up to twice and receive the response within the predetermined time for the second time. When it is not possible, it is determined that the communication is abnormal (the same applies to other command transmission processes described later).
If it is determined that the communication is abnormal, the control operation at the time of reconnection, which will be described later, may be executed after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after that, instead of waiting for power-off. Communication abnormalities include causes such as disconnection of the connector between the CU side and the P machine side, disconnection of wiring, power interruption of the P machine (gaming machine 10), and the like.

  Next, after the reception information backup process (F2) is executed, an authentication request command transmission process (F3) for transmitting an authentication request command to the P machine side is executed. Then, after this F3 is executed, the received information backup process (F4) is executed if a corresponding response (authentication response response) from the P machine side can be received by 1 second after the execution of F1.

  Next, after executing the reception information backup process (F4), a recovery request command transmission process (F5) for transmitting a recovery request command to the P machine side is executed. Then, after the execution of F5, the recovery process (F6) is executed if the corresponding response (recovery response response) from the P machine side can be received by one second after the execution of F1.

In the recovery process (F6), recovery response response information received from the P machine side (recovery data saved at the time of the power failure at the P machine side) and recovery data backed up at the CU side and saved at the time of the power failure When a comparison (verification) occurs, data is corrected (for example, updated to the data on the P machine side) if there is a deviation (inconsistency), and if there is a consistency, the CU side recovery that was backed up Clear (erase) data. This recovery process (F6) is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU side and the P machine side, and is not only executed when the power is turned on, but also has a problem as described later. It is also executed when it occurs and recovers.
The recovery data includes data of connection time, last SQN, previous sphere related information, and current sphere related information, as described in the recovery response response process on the P machine side.

  Next, after the recovery process (F6) is executed, an external information output process (F7) is executed. This external information output process (F7) is a process of transmitting a gaming machine reset signal (security signal) included in the recovery data to the hall computer 150. Note that the recovery data includes a gaming machine reset signal (security signal) to be transmitted to the hall computer 150.

  Next, after execution of F7, a communication start request command transmission process (F8) for transmitting a communication start request command based on the recovery process result to the P machine side is executed. Here, the communication start request command includes clear request data, sequence number correction request data, and number-of-balls correction request data. For example, if the clear request data is on, the P-side recovery is performed. Data is cleared (erased).

  Next, after the execution of F8, the reception information backup process (F9) is executed if the corresponding response (communication start response response) from the P machine side can be received by 1 second after the execution of F1. In F9, a process corresponding to the communication start response received from the P machine side is performed.

Next, after execution of F9, an operation instruction command transmission process (F10) for transmitting the first operation instruction command to the P machine side is executed. After the execution of F10, as in the case after the execution of F1, if a corresponding response (first operation response response) from the P machine side can be received by one second later, the received information backup process corresponding to this response ( (Not shown).
Thereafter, as with F10, as long as the game system 1 continues to operate normally, the operation instruction command transmission process and the corresponding response to the operation response response command transmitted from the P-machine side are received. The information backup process is repeated.

  The operation response response includes various commands including various information (current ball related information, information related to the state of the gaming machine, etc.) in the gaming machine 10. The operation response response also includes the value of SQN. For example, in the case of normal power-on (when communication is not resumed after abnormal termination or power failure is restored, etc.), the first operation instruction command is set to include data of SQN = 0. The first operation response response includes transmission of data of SQN = 1, which is increased by one. Thereafter, the value of SQN increases every time it is transmitted.

  For example, the first motion instruction command includes data of no game permission request and SQN = 0, and the P-side receives this, and as the first motion response response, SQN = 1, current ball related information (For example, the number of held balls counter = 0, the number of added balls counter = 0, the number of subtracted balls counter = 0, the starting port 1 winning number counter = 0, the starting port 2 winning number counter = 0, the big winning port counter = 0, and winning Mouth counter = 0) and a game prohibition (game stop state) command are transmitted to the CU side.

  Then, the P machine side has SQN = 1, previous ball related information (addition ball number counter = 0, subtraction ball number counter = 0, start port 1 winning number counter = 0, start port 2 winning number counter = 0, big winning port The data of counter = 0, winning prize counter = 0) is backed up. Note that backing up the previous ball-related information means storing and holding the current ball-related information data (excluding the value of the number of possessed balls) at that time as data of the previous ball-related information. After that, the P machine side calculates the value of each counter of current ball-related information (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, start port 1 winning counter, start port 2 winning counter, big winning port counter, winning port counter). Clear all to zero.

  On the basis of the motion response, the CU side receiving the first motion response response backs up SQN = 1, calculates the current number of balls held 0 + the number of added balls received 0−the number of subtracted balls received 0 The current number of possessed balls 0 is backed up, and the cumulative number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 0, the total number of starting ports 1 = 0, and the total number of starting ports 2 = 0 are backed up. Here, the accumulated ball count is the cumulative value of the added ball count counter included in the motion response response received from the P machine side. Similarly, the subtracted ball count is the cumulative value of the subtracted ball count counter. The value, starting port 1 cumulative is the cumulative value of the starting port 1 winning number counter, and starting port 2 cumulative is the cumulative value of the starting port 2 winning number counter.

Next, a game permission request is included in the operation instruction command (for example, the second operation instruction command) transmitted from the CU side when the above startup process (the process from F1 to the first F10) is normally completed. (Game permission request ON), data of SQN = n (for example, n = 2) is included, and the P-machine side that receives it has a game response refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, current ball related Information (Number of held balls counter = 0, Number of added balls counter = 0, Subtracted ball number counter = 0, Start port 1 winning number counter = 0, Start port 2 winning number counter = 0, Large winning port counter = 0, Winning port Counter = 0) and a game permission command are returned to the CU side.
Then, on the CU side, at least a part (or all) of the operation response response information periodically transmitted from the P machine side in this way is sequentially obtained as external information by the external information output process (F7) described above. It is transmitted to the hall computer 150 or the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 70, the control operation on the P machine side when the power is turned on will be described.
The control operation on the P machine side when the power is turned on is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU side and the P machine side is normally completed.
When the power is turned on, the P-machine side first starts communication with the CU side in a game prohibited state, and is in a standby state (F21). The game prohibition state is set because the game prohibition flag is set at the time of activation in step S16 in the main process on the P machine side described above.

  When the instruction command (the device information request command) transmitted from the CU side is received, the chip ID acquisition process (F22) for acquiring the chip ID (chip code) is executed, and then the information including the chip ID is transmitted to the CU side. The device information response response transmission process (F23) to be transmitted to is executed. In this table ID acquisition process, the chip code as individual identification information (unique ID) of the IC chip constituting the CPU 221 is read (that is, acquired) and written to the serial transmission buffer (that is, transmitted to the CU side). )

  Next, when the next instruction command (the authentication request command) is received from the CU side after the execution of F23 and before it is determined by the monitoring timer that the predetermined time (four seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed. As a result, the next response transmission condition is satisfied, and the authentication response response transmission process (F24) for transmitting the authentication response response corresponding to the received instruction command to the CU side is executed.

  After the execution of F23, if the next instruction command from the CU side is not received and it is determined by the monitoring timer that 4 seconds have elapsed, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the next response transmission condition is not established, and the game is impossible. A game end process (F30) is executed.

  That is, if the next instruction command cannot be received from the CU side within a predetermined time (in this case, within 4 seconds) after the response is transmitted, the P-side determines that the communication has been interrupted and prohibits the game (other response transmission described later). The process is the same). Causes of this communication disconnection include disconnection of the connector, disconnection of the connection wiring, or power supply disconnection of the CU.

  Next, after the execution of F24, if the next instruction command (recovery request command) can be received from the CU by 4 seconds after the execution of F23, the recovery data acquisition process (F25) and the recovery response response transmission process (F26) are sequentially executed. Note that the recovery data transmitted to the CU side in F26 includes a gaming machine reset signal (security signal) transmitted from the CU side to the hall computer 150.

Next, after the execution of F26, if the next instruction command (communication start request command) can be received from the CU by 4 seconds after the execution of F23, the next data clear / backup process (F27) and communication are performed. The start response response transmission process (F28) is sequentially executed.
Next, after the execution of F28, if the next instruction command (first operation instruction command) can be received from the CU by 4 seconds after the execution of F23, the operation response response transmission process (F29) corresponding thereto is performed. Run.

  The operation response response transmission process (F29) is a process of transmitting a command (response command, sometimes simply referred to as a response) including data such as SQN, current ball related information, and game information to the CU side. In this process, the P machine side backs up the value of the SQN to be transmitted and also backs up the data of the current ball related information (excluding the number of possessed balls) to be transmitted as the previous ball related information. In addition, the P machine side sets the value of each counter of current ball related information (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, start port 1 winning counter, start port 2 winning counter, big winning port counter, winning port counter). Clear all to zero.

Of course, the current ball related information is cleared to 0 after the transmission processing of the current ball related information as an operation response response and the backup of the current ball related information as the previous ball related information are completed.
In the following, “back up previous sphere related information” means that the current sphere related information data (excluding the value of the current ball counter) is stored as previous sphere related information data unless otherwise specified. It means holding.

  Thereafter, as with F29, as long as the normal operation of the gaming system 1 continues, the operation instruction command reception processing and the corresponding operation response response transmission processing are repeated. As described above, the operation instruction command transmitted from the CU side after the activation process includes the data of the game permission request ON, thereby clearing the game prohibition flag and enabling the game to be executed. .

Next, the control operation on the CU side during reconnection and the control operation on the P machine side during reconnection will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. Since the flow and basic contents of the control operation are the same as when the power is turned on, the same reference numerals (F1 to F12) and (F21 to F30) are used, and only the parts having different contents will be described.
“At the time of reconnection” is when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU side and the P machine side ends abnormally. This “abnormal termination” is, for example, a case where a power failure occurs on the CU side when the power source is activated while the card is held, or when the P machine side refuses addition when the CU itself disconnects communication.

  When the CU side resumes communication, (a) it is resumed in a state other than waiting, (b) it is resumed after sending a communication disconnection request by itself, or (c) ) When the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN transmitted from the P machine side are inconsistent, it is determined that one of (a) to (c) is normal. It is determined that the process is not completed (abnormal termination), and the control operation at the time of reconnection is executed.

  The difference from when the power is turned on is that the time when the machine P prohibits the game and starts communication immediately after receiving the device information request command from the CU. This is because the P machine can recognize that it has been reconnected only after the P machine side receives a device information request from the CU.

  Next, when the power is turned on, a communication start request command for recovery clear ON is transmitted from the CU side to the P machine side, and the P machine receives it and clears the recovery data. In accordance with the sent SQN = 0, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1, and all the previous sphere related information and current sphere related information are cleared to “0”.

  However, in the case of reconnection, the recovery data backed up on the P machine side may not match the data stored on the CU side. Therefore, at the time of reconnection, on the CU side, after starting the recovery process (F6), in accordance with the contents of the recovery data on the P machine side (previous ball related information, current ball related information, etc.) included in the recovery response, A process for correcting the number of balls and the like is executed.

  Specifically, based on the recovery data sent from the P machine side, the number of balls held is calculated, the stored number of balls is corrected to the calculated new number of balls, The corrected number of balls is compared with the number of balls transmitted as recovery data from the P machine side to determine whether or not they match. If they do not match, F8 sends a ball number correction request ON (with correction) to the P machine side as a communication start request command in F8. Further, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from the P machine side is compared with the final SQN stored in the CU to determine whether or not they match. An SQN correction request ON (with correction) is transmitted to the P machine side as a start request command. Further, the correct number of balls to be corrected and SQN (the number of balls after correction, etc.) are included in the communication start request command and transmitted to the P machine side.

  The P machine side receives the communication start request command and performs a correction process to match the SQN and the number of balls that were backed up on the P machine side with the information of the CU. Specifically, the correct number of balls to be corrected and SQN (corrected number of balls etc.) are corrected, and the notified “connection time” is backed up.

  On the CU side, when the recovery process (F6) is completed, the chip ID transmitted from the P machine side is backed up, and the connection time that is the time of reconnection is backed up. And about SQN, when the last SQN transmitted from the P machine side is not abnormal, the SQN is continued.

  On the other hand, after the recovery process (F6) is started in the CU, if it is determined that the P machine side that is the communication partner does not match, or if the SQN is determined to be abnormal, it is transmitted from the P machine side. The number of balls held (the number of balls held as the current ball-related information) included in the recovery response is temporarily converted to the number of held balls. The number of possessed balls is the number of possessed balls recorded on the game card owned by the player as described above. Then, after the number of possessed balls is recorded on the game card, the replay button 211 is operated to use the possessed number of balls of the game card, and the replay is performed after converting the retained number of balls into the number of possessed balls. Is possible. At that time, as in the case of power-on shown in FIG. 69, a recovery clear ON is transmitted as a communication start request transmitted from the CU side to the P machine side, and the P machine side receives the recovery data in response to the request. clear.

  On the CU side, SQN is set to “0”, and SQN = 1 is transmitted to the P machine side in the first operation instruction, and the SQN = 1 is backed up on the P machine side. On the P machine side, the previous ball related information (added ball counter = 0, subtracted ball counter = 0, starting port 1 winning counter = 0, starting port 2 winning counter = 0, big winning counter = 0 , Winning-port counter = 0) and current ball-related information counters (added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, starting port 1 winning counter, starting port 2 winning counter, big winning port counter, winning Clear the value of the mouth counter).

Next, referring to FIGS. 73 and 74, the control operation on the CU side and the control operation on the P machine side during standby to card insertion will be described. In the following, the same state or the same process as before is denoted by the same reference numeral, and description thereof is omitted.
“Waiting” means a state in which no game is played on the P machine, a game card is not inserted in the CU, and the ball rental button 212 and the replay button 211 are not operated at all. During this standby, the P machine side is in a game stop state (shooting motor stop state) (F51).

  During this standby, first, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the P-machine side with an operation instruction command with no addition (ball number addition request OFF), no subtraction (ball number subtraction request OFF), and SQN = n. Command transmission processing (F31) is executed. In response to this, the P machine side receives, as an operation response response, SQN = n + 1, current ball-related information (number of balls held counter = 0, number of added balls counter = 0, number of subtracted balls counter = 0, start port 1 winning number counter = 0, start port 2 winning number counter = 0, big winning port counter = 0, winning port counter = 0), and a game response response transmission process (F52) for transmitting a game enable (game permission flag ON) command to the CU side. ).

  On the other hand, on the CU side, data such as SQN = n + 2 is backed up in the reception analysis process (F32), and information is transmitted to the hall computer 150 in the external information output process (F33). In the next operation instruction command transmission process (F34), a command including data such as SQN = n + 2 is transmitted. In response to this, the P machine side receives SQN = n + 3, previous ball related information (addition ball number counter = 0, subtraction ball number counter = 0, start port 1 winning number counter = 0, start in reception analysis processing (F53). Mouth 2 winning number counter = 0, big winning number counter = 0, winning number counter = 0), and current ball related information (added number counter, subtracted number counter, starting port 1 winning number counter, starting port Each counter value of the (2 winning number counter, large winning counter, winning counter) is cleared to zero.

  Then, in the next operation response response transmission process (F54), the P machine side has SQN = n + 3, current ball related information (ball number counter = 0, addition ball number counter = 0, subtraction ball number counter = 0, start The mouth 1 winning number counter = 0, the start opening 2 winning number counter = 0, the big winning port counter = 0, the winning port counter = 0), and a game enable command are transmitted to the CU side. On the CU side, every time this operation response response from the P machine side is received, the SQN and the like are backed up in the reception analysis process (F35), and external information output process (not shown) is performed. The next operation instruction command transmission process (F34) is repeated.

  In such a situation, when a gaming card is inserted into the card slot 201, the CU side outputs a command signal for taking the card to a card reader / writer (not shown) and A card reader / writer reads the recorded information and receives the read information, and the card insertion process is executed.

  Next, the CU side executes card inquiry processing start (F36), and after the card is inserted, the card balance is being inquired for a predetermined period. This state corresponds to the execution of the card acceptance process, and whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a member card registered at the game shop, the number of possessed balls, the card balance, etc. The management apparatus such as 150 is being inquired and authenticated. At this time, such a state is displayed on the display input device 203, for example.

  Then, after executing F36, the CU side executes an operation instruction command transmission process (F37) for transmitting an operation instruction command including ON during card holding and ON during card insertion processing to the P machine side. On the P machine side, the operation instruction command is received and analyzed in the reception analysis process (F55), and a control command including ON during card holding and ON during card insertion processing is transmitted to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 inserts it. Control is performed to display on the display device 35 (or the operation display device 30 or the like, the same applies hereinafter) that the received card is being inquired.

After that, the P machine side performs an operation response response transmission process (F56), for example, SQN = n + 5, current ball related information (ball number counter = 0, addition ball number counter = 0, subtraction ball number counter = 0, start port 1 All the data indicating the status such as jackpot or probability change are OFF (including winning number counter = 0, starting port 2 winning number counter = 0, big winning port counter = 0, winning port counter = 0), and game prohibition data. An action response response command (special prize OFF, probability change OFF) is transmitted to the CU side. Specifically, all the data indicating the state of jackpot, probability change, etc. are OFF (special award OFF, probability change OFF) is a state in which Bits 0 to 4 in the data structure of the above-described game machine state 2 command are all 0.
The CU side receives and analyzes the command transmitted in F56 in the reception analysis process (F38), and transmits the corresponding external information to the hall computer 150 in the external information output process (F39).

  After that, the CU side confirms the balance and the number of possessed balls, etc. at the stage where the balance of the inserted card and the number of possessed balls etc. are confirmed as a result of the inquiry of the card balance. While performing control (ball holding confirmation display) (F40) to be displayed on the operation display device 30, an addition display that is being transmitted to the P machine side as the number of balls held (for example, 5000) as the number of balls held The display inside is displayed on the operation display device 30, for example.

  Then, SQN = n + 6, the number of held balls = 0 (the number of held balls before update) +5000 (the number of balls required for addition) = 5000 and the number of held balls = 0 are backed up, and the consumption of the number of held balls is determined at this time. . Here, an example of operation is described in which all of the possessed balls are automatically converted to the number of possessed balls by inserting a game card. However, as described above, the replay button 211 or the like is played. It is good also as an aspect by which conversion of the number of possessed balls to the number of possessed balls is performed by a user's operation.

  Next, on the CU side, as an operation instruction, addition is present (ball number addition request ON), card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, SQN = n + 6, addition request ball number = 5000 and, for example, a card An operation instruction command transmission process (F41) for transmitting a command including the balance = 7000 to the P machine side is executed.

  On the P machine side, the command transmitted in F41 (the operation indication command including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested to be added = 5000) is received and analyzed by the reception analysis process (F57), thereby adding ON during addition display. A display process during addition (F58) in which a control command including the requested number of balls = 5000 is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 is executed. In response to this, the effect control device 53 displays on the display device 35 that 5000 balls are being added as the number of balls held (during addition display).

  Next, the P machine side is SQN = n + 7, current ball related information (ball number counter = 0, addition ball number counter = 0, subtraction ball number counter = 0, start port 1 in operation response response transmission processing (F59). Win command counter = 0, start port 2 winning counter = 0, big prize counter = 0, winning mouth counter = 0) To the side. This is because at this time, the number of balls has not yet been added.

Thereafter, upon receiving the next operation instruction command (SQN = n + 8) from the CU side, the P machine side receives and analyzes this in the reception analysis process (F60), and in the next operation response response transmission process (F61), F60. The operation response response corresponding to the operation instruction command transmitted in is transmitted to the CU side. This motion response response includes SQN = n + 9, and if there is no game ball fired or winning yet, the current ball related information (number-of-ball counter = 5000, number of added balls counter = 0, number of subtracted balls counter = 0 , The starting port 1 winning number counter = 0, the starting port 2 winning number counter = 0, the big winning port counter = 0, the winning port counter = 0), and the game possible data.
Thus, the game becomes possible, and thereafter (that is, during the game), the same control operation as the reception analysis process (F60) and the operation response response transmission process (F61) is repeated.

Next, referring to FIGS. 75 and 76, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the card balance is consumed will be described.
When the card balance is consumed, it means when the prepaid balance (corresponding to the number of balls lent) recorded on the inserted game card is consumed.
As an example, a case will be described in which a prepaid balance is “1000” (yen) and the current number of balls is “50” (pieces), and ball lending is performed.

First, on the P machine side, in response to an operation instruction command (not shown) previously transmitted from the CU side, as an operation response response transmission process (F91), SQN = n−1, current ball related information (number of possessed balls counter) = 50, additional ball counter = 0, subtracted ball counter = 0, starting port 1 winning counter = 0, starting port 2 winning counter = 0, big winning port counter = 0, winning port counter = 0), special prize An operation response response including data of OFF and probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU side.
Upon receipt of this, the CU side performs operation instruction command transmission processing (F71), no addition (number of balls to be added addition request OFF), addition display OFF, SQN = n, number of addition request balls = 0, and number of subtraction request balls = 0 is transmitted to the P machine side.

Next, the P machine that has received the command transmitted in F71 receives and analyzes it in the reception analysis process (F92), and in the operation response response transmission process (F93), SQN = n + 1, Number of balls counter = 50, number of added balls counter = 0, number of subtracted balls counter = 0, start port 1 winning number counter = 0, starting port 2 winning number counter = 0, big winning port counter = 0, winning port counter = 0 ), An operation response response including data of the special prize OFF and the probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU side.
On the other hand, the CU side receives and analyzes the data of the operation response response in the reception analysis process (F72), and transmits information to the hall computer 150 in the external information output process (F73).

Thereafter, in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F74), the CU side transmits a command including data such as SQN = n + 2, but the ball lending button 212 is pressed down at a timing between F73 and F74. If a ball lending signal is input, the following occurs.
On the CU side, one lending operation (ball lending operation) usually lends 500 yen, that is, 125 gaming balls. In this example, when the ball lending button 212 is pressed in the CU, the CU side determines that SQN = n + 2, the number of held balls = 50 (the number of held balls before update) +125 (the number of balls requested for addition) = 175, and the balance = 500. (= 1000-500) is backed up. In this way, the balance consumption is determined by the CU alone at the stage where the ball lending operation is performed. Then, the CU is being added and displayed. During the addition display, for example, the operation display device 30 displays that 125 pieces are deducted from the balance and are being added to the number of balls held.

Then, on the operation instruction command transmission process (F74), on the CU side, as operation instruction commands, addition is present (ball number addition request ON), addition display is ON, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number = 125, and subtraction request A command with the number of balls = 0 (including a game prohibition request) is transmitted to the P machine side.
In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the operation instruction command in the reception analysis process (F94), and determines whether or not to reject the addition request.

If the request for adding the number of balls is not rejected, the P-side transmits a control command to the effect control device 53 as adding is possible, and displays, for example, an operation display indicating that 125 balls are being added. An in-addition display process (F95) informed by the display of the device 30 is executed.
On the P side, SQN = n + 3, previous ball related information (addition ball number counter = 0, subtraction ball number counter = 0, start port 1 winning number counter = 0, start port 2 winning number counter = 0, big winning port Counter = 0, winning-port counter = 0), and the value of the added ball number counter is updated to a value of 175, which is obtained by adding 125 the requested addition ball number to the current added ball number counter 0.

  Then, in the next operation response response transmission process (F96), the P machine side is addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, balance = 500, current ball related information (ball number counter = 0, ball number counter = 175, subtraction Ball counter = 0, starting port 1 winning number counter = 0, starting port 2 winning number counter = 0, big winning port counter = 0, winning port counter = 0), and game possible, special prize OFF, and probability variation OFF data Is returned to the CU side.

Upon receiving this, the CU side receives and analyzes the data of the operation response response in the reception analysis process (F75), and transmits information to the hall computer 150 in the external information output process (F76). (It may also include information on the addition of the number of balls added). Next, the CU side calculates SQN = n + 4, the number of balls held = 175 (the number of balls held before update) +0 (the number of balls required for addition) −0 (the number of subtracted balls) = 175 in the addition confirmation process (F77). While backing up, the fact that the addition to the number of balls has been confirmed is displayed on the operation display device 30, for example.
Thus, unlike the determination of the balance consumption, the determination of the number of balls held is determined after waiting for an operation response response (including data indicating addition rejection OFF) from the P machine side.

Thereafter, in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F78), the CU side transmits, as an operation instruction command, an ON command during addition display, SQN = n + 4, and a command including data on the number of balls after addition to the P machine side.
In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the operation instruction command in the reception analysis process (F97), and sends a control command including ON during addition display and the number of held balls 175 included in the command. It transmits to the production control device 53. In response to this, the effect control device 53 performs a display notifying that the number of balls has been added to 175 in the operation display device 30, for example.

  Then, the P machine side updates the number of balls held (the value of the number of held balls counter) to a value of 175 obtained by adding 125 which is the value of the added ball number counter to the current number of balls held 50, and the next motion response In response transmission processing (F98), addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 5, balance = 500, current ball related information (number of balls held = 175, number of added balls counter = 0, number of subtracted balls counter = 0, start opening 1 winning Number counter = 0, start port 2 winning number counter = 0, big winning port counter = 0, winning port counter = 0), and a response including data indicating that the game is possible, the special prize OFF, and the probability variation OFF are returned to the CU side.

  Upon receiving this, the CU receives and analyzes the data of the operation response response in the reception analysis process (F79), and transmits information to the hall computer 150 (excluding the information on the ball rental and the like) in the external information output process (not shown). , Information on the addition of the number of balls held thereby may be included). Further, the CU side displays, for example, on the operation display device 30 that the addition to the number of balls has been completed.

  Here, the CU side that has received the response transmitted in F98, when the data of the number of added balls or the number of subtracted balls included in this response (that is, the value of the added ball number counter or the subtracted ball number counter) is not zero. The data on the number of possessed balls stored on the CU side is updated with the data on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls. The data on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls included in the response transmitted in F98 is between F96 and F98 (that is, while the number-of-balls adding process is performed on the P machine side) This is information on the amount of change in the number of balls held (update information during addition processing).

  Then, on the CU side, when the number of held balls stored on the CU side is updated by the update information during the addition process, the update result (that is, calculated based on the number of held balls stored on the CU side). And the data of the number of balls included in the response transmitted in F98 (that is, the data of the number of balls held and calculated on the P machine side and stored on the P machine side). The consistency may be confirmed by comparison.

If the two match, the consistency check here proceeds as if the consistency is taken, and if the two do not match, the consistency is not taken. For example, the number of balls on the CU side This is done by executing the number-of-balls correction process (game value correction process) for updating the data to the data on the number of balls on the P machine side (matching with the data on the P machine side).
The consistency check as described above is not limited to the response transmitted in F98, but is performed not only when another operation response response is received and the number of balls held is updated on the CU side. May be.

Thereafter, in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F80), the CU side transmits a command including SQN = n + 6 to the P machine side as an operation instruction command.
In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the operation instruction command in the reception analysis process (F99), and transmits a control command to the effect control device 53 according to the command, for example, the operation display device 30 determines the number of balls held. Display to notify the end of addition.
Thereafter, the next operation response response transmission process (F100) is performed, and then the control operation similar to F79, F80, and F99, F100 is repeated.

On the other hand, when rejecting the request for adding the number of balls in F94, the P machine side cannot transmit the control command to the effect control device 53, and cannot add the number of balls (that is, lend a ball). For example, the non-addable display process (F101) for informing the display by the display of the operation display device 30 is executed.
Then, in the next operation response response transmission process (F102), the P machine side turns on addition refusal, SQN = n + 3, balance = 1000, current ball related information (ball number counter = 0, ball number counter = 0, subtraction A response including data such as a ball counter = 0, a starting port 1 winning number counter = 0, a starting port 2 winning number counter = 0, a large winning port counter = 0, a winning port counter = 0) and the like are returned to the CU side.

The CU receiving it receives and analyzes the data of the operation response response in the reception analysis process (F75), and then indicates that the addition to the number of held balls cannot be performed in the non-addition display process (F81). 30.
Thereafter, in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F82), the CU side transmits, as an operation instruction command, a command including data such as a communication disconnection request ON and SQN = n + 4 to the P machine side.

In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the operation instruction command in the reception analysis process (F103), and includes data such as communication disconnection, SQN = n + 5, etc. in the next operation response response transmission process (F104). A response is returned to the CU side.
After that, the P machine side temporarily turns off the power and newly receives a device information request command (that is, the control operation at the time of reconnection described above), and enters the process of restarting the game.

  On the other hand, the CU that has received the response transmitted in F104 receives and analyzes the operation response response data in the reception analysis process (F83), then disconnects the power supply once and transmits a new device information request command. A process for resuming the game is entered by (that is, the control operation at the time of reconnection described above).

Next, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side during subtraction (wagon service) will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG.
In a game store, a wagon service is provided in which a player owns the number of balls possessed by the player and provides drinks to the player. When the player receives such a wagon service, for example, when the player touches the operation display device 30 and places a wagon order, the order content ordered by the player is changed to the IR light emitting unit 205 of the card unit 200. Is input to the remote controller 160 possessed by an amusement shop employee as an infrared signal.
An employee of the amusement shop performs a wagon service according to the order contents input to the remote controller 160.

In FIG. 77, as an example, a wagon order (wagon order signal input by the touch operation) that consumes “300” is generated at a timing between F73 and F114 when the number of balls held is “1000”. Shows the case.
In this case, when a wagon order is generated, the CU side performs a process of backing up “300”, which is the number of game balls used when the wagon order is generated, as SQN = n + 2, number of requested addition balls = 0, and number of requested addition balls. Do. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the number of balls held, but simply backs up “300” as the number of balls required for subtraction.

Then, in the operation instruction command transmission process (F114) after the occurrence of the wagon order, the CU side has subtraction as an operation instruction command (ball number subtraction request ON), subtraction display ON, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number A command including data of = 0 and the number of subtraction request balls = 300 is transmitted. Then, the CU causes the operation display device 30 to display a display indicating that the subtraction is being performed.
The P machine side receives and analyzes the operation instruction command with subtraction in the reception analysis process (F134), and whether or not the value of the number-of-balls counter stored (backed up) is equal to or greater than the subtraction request ball number. A comparison determination process (F135) for determining whether to compare is performed.

  If the value of the holding ball number counter is equal to or greater than the subtraction request ball number, the P machine side determines that subtraction is possible, and outputs a control command including ON during subtraction display and subtraction request ball number = 300. For example, a subtraction display process (F136) for displaying on the operation display device 30 that 300 balls are being subtracted is performed.

  In addition, the P plane side backs up the data of SQN = n + 3 and the previous ball related information. Then, according to the subtraction request ball number = 300, the value of the subtraction ball number counter is updated to a value of 300 obtained by adding the subtraction request ball number 300 to the current subtraction ball number counter 0.

  Then, the P machine side updates the number of balls held (the value of the number of held balls counter) to a value of 700 obtained by subtracting 300, which is the value of the subtracted ball number counter, from the current number of held balls 1000, and an operation response response transmission process ( F137), as an operation response response, subtraction rejection OFF, SQN = n + 3, current ball related information (ball number counter = 700, addition ball number counter = 0, subtraction ball number counter = 300, start port 1 winning number counter = 0, the start port 2 winning number counter = 0, the big winning port counter = 0, the winning port counter = 0), and a response including data indicating that the game is possible, the special prize OFF, and the probability variation OFF are returned to the CU side.

On the CU side, the response transmitted in F137 is received and analyzed in the reception analysis process (F115), and the external information output process (F116) is sent to the hall computer 150 (the information on the wagon order and the number of balls held thereby May be included). Next, on the CU side, in subtraction confirmation processing (F117), SQN = n + 3, the number of balls held = 1000 (the number of balls held before update) −300 (the number of balls required for subtraction) +0 (the number of balls added) −0 (the number of subtraction balls) ) = 700, and the number of held balls is corrected to “700” and backed up. As described above, the subtraction of the number of possessed balls is determined only after waiting for an operation response response (including subtraction rejection OFF) from the P machine side.
Further, the CU side backs up the accumulated number of added balls = 0, the accumulated number of subtracted balls = 0, the accumulated starting port 1 = 0, and the accumulated starting port 2 = 0.

Thereafter, in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F118), the CU side transmits, as an operation instruction command, a command including ON during subtraction display, SQN = n + 4, and the number of balls held after subtraction to the P machine side.
In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the operation instruction command in the reception analysis process (F138), and receives a control command including ON during subtraction display and the number of held balls 700 after subtraction included in the command. It transmits to the production control device 53. In response to this, the effect control device 53 performs a display for notifying that the number of held balls is subtracted to 700 in the operation display device 30, for example.

  Then, in the next operation response response transmission process (F139), the P machine side performs addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 5, current ball related information (ball number counter = 700, ball number counter = 0, subtracted ball number counter = 0, starting port 1 winning number counter = 0, starting port 2 winning number counter = 0, large winning port counter = 0, winning port counter = 0) and the like are returned to the CU side.

  The CU receiving it receives and analyzes the data of the operation response response in the reception analysis process (F119), and receives information (information on the wagon service and the information to the hall computer 150) in the external information output process (not shown). It may contain information on the subtraction of the number of balls by that). Further, the CU side displays, for example, on the operation display device 30 that the subtraction to the number of possessed balls has been completed.

Thereafter, in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F120), the CU side transmits a command including data such as SQN = n + 6 to the P machine side as an operation instruction command.
After that, the same control operation as F119, F120, and F138, F139 is repeated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in F135 described above that the value of the holding ball number counter is less than the subtraction request ball number, the P machine side assumes that subtraction is not possible and the subtraction ball number counter corresponding to the subtraction request ball number Do not perform the update. Further, in this case, the P machine side returns an operation response response of subtraction rejection ON to the CU side in the operation response response transmission process (F142).
Thereby, the CU side is notified that the update based on the subtraction request was not performed because the P machine side rejected the subtraction request.

  On the CU side, the response transmitted in F142 is received and analyzed in the reception analysis process (F115), SQN = n + 4 is backed up in the calculation disable display process (ball count correction process) (F121), and the subtraction request ball count is calculated. Back up after correcting to "0".

Thereafter, in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F122), the CU side transmits, as an operation instruction command, a command including the subtraction display OFF, SQN = n + 4, and the corrected subtraction request ball number data to the P machine side. .
In response to this, the machine P receives and analyzes the operation instruction command in the reception analysis process (F143), and transmits an operation response response including data such as SQN = n + 5 in the next operation response response transmission process (F144). To do.

Upon receiving this, the CU side receives and analyzes the data of the operation response response in the reception analysis process (F123), and transmits information to the hall computer 150 in the external information output process (not shown). Further, the CU side displays, for example, on the operation display device 30 that the wagon service by the subtraction of the number of balls has not been performed.
Thereafter, in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F124), the CU side transmits a command including data such as SQN = n + 6 to the P machine side as an operation instruction command.
Thereafter, the same control operation as that of F123, F124, and F143, F144 is repeated.

  As described above, the subtraction of the number of balls based on the instruction from the CU is determined only after waiting for an operation response response from the P machine side. On the other hand, as described above, the consumption of the stored ball and the holding ball based on the instruction from the CU is determined when the CU accepts the consumption. This is due to the following reason. At the time when the CU has received a subtraction process for the number of balls, such as a wagon order, there was a surplus in the number of balls held, so a subtraction instruction was sent. In some cases, there is no remaining number of balls corresponding to the subtraction instruction. In that case, if the CU side is confirmed when the subtraction process is accepted, the subtraction is actually confirmed even though the number of balls held by the P machine does not remain, and a contradiction occurs. On the other hand, the consumption of the stored balls and the holding balls based on the instruction of the CU is an update to add the number of holding balls, so there is no problem even if the number of holding balls fluctuates before the instruction command arrives at the P machine. is there.

Next, referring to FIGS. 79 and 80, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the big hit / probability change occurs will be described.
As an example, when the initial number of balls is 1010 and a probability variation jackpot occurs while an operation instruction command and an operation response response are being transmitted and received between the P machine side and the CU side during the game Will be explained.

First, in response to an operation instruction command (not shown) previously transmitted from the CU side, the P machine side transmits an operation response response of, for example, SQN = n−1 in an operation response response transmission process (F171). On the other hand, the CU side backs up SQN = n, and transmits a command of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n as an operation instruction to the P machine side in the operation instruction command transmission process (F151).
In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F172), SQN = n + 1, previous ball related information (addition ball number counter = 3, subtraction ball number counter = 13, start port 1 winning prize Number counter = 1, start port 2 winning number counter = 1, big winning port counter = 0, winning port counter = 0) and number of balls held = 1010 + 3 (number of added balls) −13 (number of subtracted balls) = 1000 is calculated and the number of balls held is updated to 1000. Further, after the response is created, each counter value of the current ball related information (excluding the number of balls held, the same applies hereinafter) is cleared to zero.

Then, the P machine side is SQN = n + 1, current ball related information (number-of-ball counter = 1000, number-of-added-ball counter = 3, number-of-subtracted-ball counter = 13, start port 1 prize in the operation response response transmission process (F173). Number counter = 1, start port 2 winning number counter = 1, big winning port counter = 0, winning port counter = 0), and a response including data indicating that the game is possible, special award OFF, and probability variation OFF are transmitted to the CU side. Thus, the P machine side transmits not only the number of subtracted balls and the number of added balls, but also the number of possessed balls to the CU side. As a result, the CU side can determine whether or not the number of balls held on the P machine side matches the number of balls managed on the CU side.

  Note that the subtraction ball number counter = 13 is a numerical value for convenience of explanation only, and is actually a slightly smaller numerical value. This is because a pachinko machine normally fires 100 game balls per minute and fires one in 0.6 seconds. As described above, since the commands / responses transmitted / received on the CU side and the P machine side are transmitted at 0.2 second intervals, the actual subtraction between the previous transmission and the current transmission is performed. This is because the increase in the number of balls is 0 or 1.

  Upon receiving the operation response response transmitted in F173, the CU receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F152), calculates the number of balls held = 1010 + 3-13 = 1000, and 1000 is the number of balls held. In addition, the cumulative number of added balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 13, the total of starting port 1 = 1, and the total of starting port 2 = 1 are backed up. In the external information output process (F153), information corresponding to the received response is transmitted to the hall computer 150.

  During repeated transmission / reception of such an operation instruction command and operation response response (for example, timing between F173 and F174), a probabilistic jackpot occurs in the P machine, and the current ball-related information is retained. It is assumed that the number of balls counter = 1100, the number of added balls counter = 120, the number of subtracted balls = 20, the starting port 1 winning number counter = 2, and the starting port 2 winning number counter = 2. After that, if the big hit ends on the P machine and the probability change starts, it becomes as follows.

The CU side backs up SQN = n + 2, and transmits the command of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 to the P machine side as operation instructions in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F154).
On the P machine side, the command transmitted in F154 is received and analyzed in the reception analysis process (F174), SQN = n + 3 is backed up, and the previous ball related information (added ball number counter = 120, subtracted ball number counter = 20) , Starting port 1 winning number counter = 2, starting port 2 winning number counter = 2, etc.) and calculating the number of balls held = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100 and updating the number of balls held to 1100. Further, after creating the response, each counter value of the current ball related information is cleared to zero.

  Then, in the operation response response transmission process (F175), the P machine side has SQN = n + 3, current ball related information (ball number counter = 1100, addition ball number counter = 120, subtraction ball number counter = 20, start port 1 prize Number counter = 2, start port 2 winning number counter = 2, etc.), and a response including data indicating that the game is possible, the special prize is ON, and the probability change ON is transmitted to the CU side. Here, the special award and the probability variation data represent the types of jackpots (results of the special figure variation display game) as described above, and the special award ON and the probability variation ON data indicate that the probability variation jackpot has been reached. ing.

  Next, the CU side receives and analyzes the response in the reception analysis processing (F155), calculates the number of balls held = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100, corrects the number of balls held in 1100, and backs up, and adds the number of balls The total = 120, the number of subtracted balls = 20, the starting port 1 total = 2, and the starting port 2 total = 2 are backed up. The reception of this response notifies the CU side that it has been a probable big hit.

  Therefore, in the next external information output process (F156), the CU side transmits information including data (for example, jackpot ON information, probability change ON information) indicating that the jackpot has been won to the hall computer 150. The jackpot ON information and probability change ON information to be transmitted to the hall computer 150 is output by the response ON information from the P machine side (that is, the special prize ON and probability change ON data), and the response from the P machine side. When there is no ON information, an end may be output (that is, an aspect in which data is not continuously output), or an aspect in which the ON information of a response from the P machine side continues is output.

Thereafter, the CU side backs up SQN = n + 4 and transmits a command of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 4 as an operation instruction to the P machine side in the operation instruction command transmission process (F157).
In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F176), backs up SQN = n + 5, etc., updates the number of balls, and creates a response. Each counter value is cleared to zero.

If the probability variation state (the state in which the jackpot probability is increased) starts, the P aircraft side becomes the probability variation state in addition to the data such as SQN = n + 5 in the operation response response transmission process (F177). A response including information (probability change information) indicating that it is present is transmitted to the CU side.
Upon receiving the operation response response, the CU receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F158), performs update backup of the number of balls, etc., and then receives the response in the external information output process (F159). The information corresponding to (including the probability variation information) is transmitted to the hall computer 150.

Thereafter, the CU side backs up SQN = n + 6, and transmits an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 6 to the P machine side in the operation instruction command transmission process (F160).
In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F178), backs up SQN = n + 7, etc., updates the number of balls, and creates a response. Each counter value is cleared to zero.

Then, in the operation response response transmission process (F179), the P machine side transmits a response including probability variation information to the CU side in addition to data such as SQN = n + 7.
Upon receiving the operation response response, the CU side receives and analyzes the command in reception analysis processing (F161), performs update backup of the number of balls, etc., and then receives it in external information output processing (not shown). Information corresponding to the response (including the probability variation information) is transmitted to the hall computer 150.

Thereafter, the CU side backs up SQN = n + 8, and transmits a command of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 8 as an operation instruction to the P machine side in the operation instruction command transmission process (F162).
Upon receiving the command, the P machine receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F180), backs up SQN = n + 9, etc., updates the number of balls, creates a response, Each counter value is cleared to zero.

In the operation response response transmission process (F181), the P machine side transmits to the CU side a response including information (probability variation information) indicating that the state is in a probability variation state in addition to data such as SQN = n + 9.
Thereafter, the same control operation as F161, F162, F180, and F181 is repeated thereafter.

Next, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side at the time of detecting the absence of a ball will be described with reference to FIG. 81 and FIG.
The time of no-ball detection means a case where it is detected that there is no game ball (the number of held balls is zero) while playing a game. As an example, the initial number of balls held is 20.
First, the CU side backs up SQN = n, and transmits a command of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n to the P machine side as operation instructions in an operation instruction command transmission process (F191).

  On the other hand, the P machine side receives the command, SQN = n + 1, previous ball related information (addition ball number counter = 3, subtraction ball number counter = 18, start port 1 winning number counter = 1, start port 2 Winning number counter = 1, etc.). Further, the number of balls held = 20 + 3-18 = 5 is calculated to correct the number of balls and back up. Further, after the response is created, each counter value of the current ball related information is cleared to zero.

Then, the P machine side is SQN = n + 1, current ball related information (number of balls held counter = 5, number of added balls counter = 3, number of subtracted balls counter = 18, start port 1 winning in operation response response transmission processing (F201). Number counter = 1, start port 2 winning number counter = 1, etc.), and a response including data indicating that the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU side.
On the CU side, the response is received and analyzed by reception analysis processing (F192), and the number of balls held = 20 + 3-18 = 5 is calculated and the number of balls held is corrected and backed up. The total number of balls = 18, the starting port 1 total = 0, and the starting port 2 total = 0 are backed up.

Then, after executing the external information output process (F193) according to the response, the CU side backs up SQN = n + 2, and in the operation instruction command transmission process (F194), as the operation instruction, no addition, no subtraction, and A command of SQN = n + 2 is transmitted to the P machine side.
On the other hand, the P machine side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F202). Thereafter, in the P machine, since the subtraction ball number counter = 5, the number of balls held = 5-5 = 0. Is calculated, and the number-of-ball counter is 0.

  Then, when the number of balls held becomes zero, the P machine detects that there is no ball, and the P machine side automatically stops the driving of the firing solenoid 173 by the processing of steps S204 and S213 described above. A game stop (solenoid stop) process (F203) for controlling to a game prohibited state in which a game ball cannot be fired is executed. It should be noted that only the firing is stopped, and if the display device 35 is already in a variable display at this stage, the variable display is continued. Also, if there is a pending start memory corresponding to the value of the start port 1 winning number counter or the starting port 2 winning number counter, the corresponding variable display game is executed.

  Then, since the P machine side is in a game prohibition state without such a ball, in the next operation response response transmission process (F204), SQN = n + 3, current ball related information (ball number counter = 0, number of added balls) Counter = 0, subtraction ball counter = 5, starting port 1 winning number counter = 0, starting port 2 winning number counter = 0, etc.), response including data of game disabled, special prize OFF, and probability variation OFF to the CU side Send.

  On the CU side, the reception analysis processing (F195) receives it and analyzes it, calculates the number of balls held = 5 + 0−5 = 0, corrects the number of balls held to 0, and backs up the accumulated number of balls = Correction is made to 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 5, the start port 1 total = 1, and the start port 2 total = 0.

Then, the CU side executes the external information output process (F196) reflecting the response information, and transmits the operation instruction command of SQN = n + 4 to the P machine side in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F197). .
Upon receiving the command, the P machine receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F205), backs up SQN = n + 5, etc., updates the number of balls, creates a response, Each counter value is cleared to zero.

Then, the P machine side transmits a response of SQN = n + 5 to the CU side in the operation response response transmission process (F206).
Upon receiving the operation response response, the CU side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F198), performs update backup of the number of balls, etc., and then outputs the response in the external information output process (not shown). Corresponding information is transmitted to the hall computer 150, and a command of SQN = n + 6 is transmitted in the operation instruction command transmission process (F199).
Thereafter, control operations similar to those of F198, F199, F205, and F206 are repeated thereafter.

In this way, the main management of the number of balls held is performed by the CU, but only when the game prohibition control (launching stop control) associated with the number of balls held at the P machine is zero, It is determined that the number of possessed balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (launch stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as the operation response, final ball-related information is transmitted to the CU, and the final number of held balls “0” is determined on the CU side.
The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to perform the firing stop control at the moment when the number of balls held becomes zero on the P machine side.

  For example, on the CU side that mainly manages the number of balls held, the CU side waits for reception of an operation response response when the number of balls held from the P machine side becomes 0, and then the final holding on the CU side. When the number of balls is calculated and it becomes 0, a command for an operation instruction with a prohibition request for prohibiting a game is transmitted to the P aircraft side, and the launch stop control is performed on the P aircraft side only after receiving this command. In this case, there is a possibility that a game ball is fired during the response and command transmission / reception, and a new subtraction ball number may be generated during that time, and the number of held balls has already become “0” on the P aircraft side. However, there is a disadvantage that a new number of subtracted balls is generated and the number of held balls becomes negative. In order to prevent such inconvenience, only the firing stop control when the number of balls held becomes zero is controlled based on the number of balls held on the P machine side.

  In this way, game control represented by launch stop control is performed based on the number of balls stored in the CU in order to perform based on the number of balls stored in the P machine itself. Compared with the case where the game control is performed, the game control in accordance with the fluctuation of the number of balls can be performed in real time.

Next, referring to FIGS. 83 and 84, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the card is returned will be described.
As an example, the return button 213 is pressed while the operation instruction from the CU side to the P machine side and the operation response from the P machine side to the CU side are repeated with the initial number of balls = 500. The case will be described.

First, in response to an operation instruction command (not shown) previously transmitted from the CU side, the P machine side transmits an operation response response of, for example, SQN = n−1 in an operation response response transmission process (F231). On the other hand, the CU side backs up SQN = n, and transmits a command of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n as an operation instruction to the P machine side in the operation instruction command transmission process (F211).
In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F232), and transmits a response including data such as SQN = n + 1 to the CU side in the operation response response transmission process (F233).

  Upon receiving the operation response response transmitted in F233, the CU receives and analyzes the response in reception analysis processing (F212), and in the external information output processing (F213), stores information corresponding to the received response in the hall computer 150. Send to. Then, the CU side transmits an operation instruction command to the P machine side in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F214).

While the transmission / reception of the operation instruction command and the operation response response is repeatedly executed (for example, the timing between F213 and F214), the return button 213 is pressed and a return signal is input to the CU side. Then, it becomes as follows.
First, in the operation instruction command transmission process (F214), the CU side has a prohibition request for prohibiting a game (game prohibition request ON), no clear request, clear display OFF, and SQN = n + 2 as the next operation instruction. Is sent to the P machine side.

  On the P machine side, the command is received and analyzed in the reception analysis process (F234), the game prohibition flag is set according to the prohibition request presence instruction included in the command, the drive of the launch solenoid 173 is stopped, and the launch stop state A game stop (solenoid stop) process (F235) for controlling to (game prohibition state) is executed.

Next, in the next operation response response transmission process (F236), the P machine side transmits a response including data such as SQN = n + 3, game prohibition possible, etc. to the CU side, and then finish wait process (wait time setting) ( F237) is executed.
In the end waiting process (wait time setting) (F237), the time (that is, the floating ball processing time) from when the already fired balls flow down the game area 22 and all flow to the merging path (game ball inlet 71) is calculated. Considering this, for example, a process of providing a wait time of 10 seconds.

  On the other hand, the CU that has received the operation response response transmitted in F236 receives and analyzes this response in the reception analysis process (F215), and stores information corresponding to the received response in the external information output process (F216). Send to computer 150. Thereafter, the CU side sets a wait time of 10 seconds in the end standby process (F217) corresponding to the end standby process (F237).

Note that polling (command / response transmission / reception in the present embodiment) is continued between the P machine side and the CU side even during the wait time of 10 seconds.
In other words, in the operation instruction command transmission process (F218), the CU side transmits an operation instruction command of no prohibit request, no clear request, OFF during clear display, and SQN = n + N−1 to the P machine side. In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F239), and in the operation response response transmission process (F238), SQN = n + N, current ball related information (ball number counter = 500, addition) Ball counter = 0, subtraction ball counter = 0, starting port 1 winning number counter = 0, starting port 2 winning number counter = 0, etc.), prohibition rejection OFF, game prohibition, game completion OFF, special prize OFF, and probability change An OFF response is sent to the CU side. Then, the operation in which the CU side receives and analyzes the response in the reception analysis process (F219) is repeated until the wait time elapses.

  When the wait time elapses, the P-side executes F240 instead of F238 as the next operation response response transmission process. That is, in the operation response response transmission process (F240), for example, SQN = n + N + 2, current ball related information (number of balls held counter = 500, number of added balls counter = 0, number of subtracted balls counter = 0, start port 1 winning number counter = 0, start port 2 winning number counter = 0, etc.), game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability variation OFF operation response responses are transmitted to the CU side. Here, “game completion ON” has a role as initializeable information indicating that it is possible to accept information for instructing initialization of the number of balls on the P machine side.

  In addition, the number of balls held (the value of the number of balls held) transmitted at this time is the final number of balls held at the end of the game. This control operation example shows a case where neither the number of added balls nor the number of subtracted balls is changed by the floating sphere. If a winning is generated by a floating ball or a foul ball is generated, the number of winning balls or the number of foul balls corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the CU side as an “added ball number”.

  Upon receiving the F240 operation response response, the CU receives and analyzes this response in reception analysis processing (F220), detects the completion of the game, and backs up SQN = n + N + 3 and data with clear request. Furthermore, according to “the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of winnings of the starting port 1 and the number of winnings of the starting port 2” included in this motion response response, the stored “number of holding balls, total number of added balls, total number of balls” Each data of “subtracted ball number, starting port 1 total winning number, starting port 2 total winning number” is updated. As a result, the number of balls held at the end of the game is determined on the CU side. Thus, since the final number of balls is determined on the CU side, there is no need to provide a management function for the number of balls on the P machine side, and the cost of the P machine can be suppressed as much as possible.

Next, the CU side executes a clear display process (F221) for causing the operation display device 30 to display an indication that the CU is being cleared (clear display is in progress), and then the external information output process (F222). Information is transmitted to the hall computer 150.
Thereafter, in the operation instruction command transmission process (F223), the CU side transmits a command including clear request present (clear request ON), clear display ON, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P machine side. Here, “clear request present” (clear request ON) is data instructing initialization of the number of balls on the P machine side.

  On the P machine side, the command transmitted from the CU side in F223 is received and analyzed in the reception analysis process (F241), and the clear included in this command is cleared in the next clear display process (various counter clear) (F242). A control command including ON during display is transmitted to the effect control device 53. In response to this, the effect control device 53 causes the operation display device 30 to display a display screen that is being cleared (screen that is being cleared), for example. Further, the P plane clears various counters of the current ball related information and the previous ball related information (that is, sets the value to 0) in F242.

  Next, in the operation response response transmission process (F243), the P machine side clears clear to not reject the clear request, SQN = 0, current ball related information (ball number counter = 0, added ball number counter = 0 , Subtracted ball number counter = 5, starting port 1 winning number counter = 0, starting port 2 winning number counter = 0, etc.), response of game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF are transmitted to the CU side. .

  The CU receives and analyzes the response in the reception analysis process (F224), and backs up the number of balls held = 0 and the number of balls held = 500. The number of held balls = 500 is a value obtained by adding 500, which is the number of held balls immediately before the clear request, to the number of held balls. Next, the CU side transmits the information at this point to the hall computer 150 in the external information output process (F225).

  After that, the CU side clears the backup data in the backup data clear process (recording the number of balls held) (F226), records the number of balls held = 500 on the inserted game card, discharges it, and returns it to the player To do. Then, for example, SQN = m + 1, the number of balls held = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting ports = 0, the number of starting ports 2 = 0, gaming prohibited, game completion ON, A special award OFF and probability change OFF command is transmitted to the P machine side.

  Instead of directly recording the number of possessed balls on the card, the hall computer 150 may store the number of possessed balls in association with the card ID of the card. In that case, the number of balls held by the CU and the card ID of the inserted card are transmitted to the hall computer 150 and stored in association with the card ID received by the hall computer 150. The number of held balls is searched, and the number of held balls is updated to a value corresponding to the number of held balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card.

In this example, the CU receives the input of a “signal for requesting the end of game” based on the operation of the return button 213, and determines the number of balls held at the end of the game. However, the “signal for requesting completion of the game” is not limited to a signal based on the operation of the return button 213.
For example, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit 223 is essential at the start of a game, and the fingerprint information specified by the game card inserted into the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit 223. The game is allowed on the condition. Further, at the end of the game, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit 223 is essential, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit 223 matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal for requesting completion of the game” includes fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit 223.

  In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island (for example, the hall computer 150), the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 213 is operated. good. In this case, the “game end request signal” is constituted by the game end request signal input from the server.

Next, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the glass frame is opened (when the glass frame 13 is unlocked and opened) will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, in response to an operation instruction command (not shown) previously transmitted from the CU side, the P machine side transmits an operation response response of, for example, SQN = n−1 in an operation response response transmission process (F271).
On the other hand, the CU side backs up SQN = n, and in the operation instruction command transmission process (F251), sends a command of SQN = n including an instruction of no glass opening request without a glass frame 13 opening request to the P machine side. Send to.

Receiving it, the P machine side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F272), and sends an ordinary response including SQN = n + 1 and the number of balls held = 500 to the CU in the operation response response transmission process (F273). Send back.
On the other hand, the CU side receives and analyzes the response in the reception analysis process (F252), and transmits the information at this point to the hall computer 150 in the external information output process (F253).

  After that, the CU side backs up SQN = n + 2, and transmits the next operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machine side in the operation instruction command transmission process (F254). At the timing of F254, an infrared signal for unlocking and releasing the glass frame 13 by operating the remote controller 160 possessed by an amusement shop employee is transmitted to the IR light emitting unit 205 (that is, If there is a glass frame opening signal input), it will be as follows. The operation of the remote controller 160 is performed when, for example, a trouble occurs such that a game ball thrown into the game area 22 on the P machine is caught on the game board surface, and the player calls an employee of the game store. Done.

  The IR light emitting unit 205 that has received the infrared signal inputs a glass frame opening signal included in the received infrared signal to the main controller 221. Upon receiving the glass frame opening signal input, the CU main control device 221 receives a prohibition request for stopping the game (game prohibition request ON) and no glass opening request in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F254). Glass door opening request OFF) and a command of SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P machine side. That is, before the glass frame 13 is actually opened, first, an operation instruction with a prohibition request and no glass opening request is sent to the P machine side so that the firing stop control is performed on the P machine side.

The machine P receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F274), and drives the firing solenoid 173 in the game stop (solenoid stop) process (F275) according to the command data of the prohibition request present (game prohibition request ON). Stop and control to the firing stop state (game prohibition state). Next, in the operation response response transmission process (F276), the P machine side sends a response including SQN = n + 3, prohibition rejection OFF indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected, and game prohibition data indicating that the game prohibition state is set to CU. Reply to the side.
The CU side receives and analyzes the response transmitted in F276 in the reception analysis process (F255), and transmits the information at this point to the hall computer 150 in the next external information output process (F256).

  Then, on the CU side, an operation instruction command including a prohibition request is transmitted to the P machine side in F254 described above, and after receiving the response, a wait time of 10 seconds is set in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time described above. The open waiting process to be provided (wait time setting) (F257) is executed, and until this wait time elapses, the CU side transmits a command including an instruction for prohibiting the game, that is, prohibition request to the P machine side and polling ( Command / response transmission / reception indicated by F258, F259 and F278, F279) is continued.

  Then, when the wait time of 10 seconds elapses, the CU side executes an operation instruction command transmission process (glass frame opening request) (F260). In F260, a glass opening request is issued to release the lock of the glass frame 13 (glass frame opening request ON), and an operation instruction command including data of SQN = n + N is transmitted to the P machine side.

When the P machine side that has received the command transmitted in F260 does not reject the glass opening request (glass door opening request), it unlocks the glass frame 13 in the glass frame unlocking process (F280). Then, the control to open the glass frame 13 is executed, the bit during the development of the glass door is turned ON (value indicating the glass frame open), and thereafter, until the glass frame 13 is closed (that is, the first frame open switch 125). Until the detection signal is turned off), the glass door development bit is kept ON.
Next, in the operation response response transmission process (F281), the P machine side returns a response including data such as glass opening refusal OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, game prohibition, and glass development in progress to the CU side.

  On the other hand, the CU side receives and analyzes the response in the reception analysis process (F261), and if the glass opening request is not rejected, the frame opening process (F262) is then executed. In the frame opening process (F262), when the glass opening request command transmitted in F260 is not rejected on the P machine side (that is, when a response including a response of glass opening rejection ON is not returned), the glass frame 13 Is a process for transmitting a command including no glass opening request to the P machine side as an operation instruction command.

At this time, on the P machine side, a glass frame opening process (F282) for setting a response during opening of the glass frame and the like is executed corresponding to F262.
From this point onward, transmission / reception of commands / responses indicated by F263, F264, F283, and F284 is repeated until the opening of the glass frame is completed. During the opening of the glass frame, from the CU side in the external information output process (F265). A glass frame opening signal indicating that the glass frame is being opened is output to the hall computer 150.

On the other hand, when the glass frame opening request of the operation instruction command transmitted in F260 is rejected on the P machine side, the P machine side returns a response including data on glass opening rejection ON to the CU side. And the CU side which received this response performs the control which performs the display which alert | reports that the glass frame 13 cannot be opened by the operation display apparatus 30 by the glass frame open | release impossible information display process (F266), for example, The next operation instruction command transmission process (F267) is executed.
In this embodiment, the above-mentioned floating ball processing waiting time (for example, a 10 second wait time) is measured (timed) on the CU side, but this measurement may be performed on the P machine side. Such time measurement may be performed on the CU side or on the P machine side. The same applies to the wait time of F237 when the card is returned.

In the control operation when the glass frame is opened in this embodiment, the operation instruction command for the game prohibition request and the operation instruction command for the glass frame opening request are transmitted as different commands at different timings in F254 and F260. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the next operation instruction command transmission process when a glass frame opening signal is input, an operation instruction command including both a game prohibition request and a glass frame opening request is transmitted from the CU side to the P machine side (game) A mode in which a prohibition request and a glass frame opening request are transmitted at once may be used.
Further, since the control operation when the inner frame 12 is opened is the same as that when the glass frame is opened as described above, the description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88, control operations on the CU side and the P machine side when power interruption occurs after arrival of CU data will be described.
The occurrence of power interruption after arrival of CU data means the occurrence of power interruption on the CU side after arrival of the operation response response for addition / subtraction data. In the following description, as an example, the initial number of balls held is 520.

First, in response to an operation instruction command (not shown) previously transmitted from the CU side, the P machine side performs an operation response response transmission process (F311), for example, SQN = n−1, and current ball related information (held ball) An operation response response including data of a number counter = 520, etc. is transmitted.
On the other hand, the CU side backs up SQN = n, and transmits the operation instruction command of SQN = n to the P machine side in the operation instruction command transmission process (F291).

  The P machine side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F312), and in the operation response response transmission process (F313), the SQN = n + 1, and the current ball related information (ball count counter = 500, added ball count counter) = 3, subtraction ball number counter = 23, start port 1 winning number counter = 1, start port 2 winning number counter = 1, etc.), and an operation response response including addition / subtraction data is transmitted to the CU side. Here, the value of the number-of-ball counter is calculated by the calculation of 520 + 3-23 = 500.

  Then, the response transmitted in F313 reaches the CU side, and the CU side receives and analyzes the response by reception analysis processing (F292), and corrects to SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls held according to this response. After that, after the CU side executes the external information output process (F293) and before the next operation instruction command transmission process is executed, if the CU is powered off, the subsequent control operation is as follows. .

  In other words, since the operation instruction command from the CU side is not transmitted to the P machine side due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the P machine side uses the function of the card unit communication monitoring timer described above to perform the same as the game end process of F30 described above. In addition, a game stop (solenoid stop) process (F314) is performed after determining that the communication has been cut off after 4 seconds and transitioning to the unconnected state and stopping the firing solenoid 173 to stop the firing (game prohibited state). Run.

  At this time, on the P machine side, the current ball-related information storage area (the number-of-balls counter, addition) is added to the addition / subtraction data and the number of start openings (start opening winnings) after the operation response response including the previous addition / subtraction data is transmitted in F313. (Cumulative number counter, subtracted ball number counter, starting port 1 winning number counter, starting port 2 winning number counter, etc.) are stored in a timer interrupt cycle. As shown in FIG. 8, the latest current ball related information is backed up (stored). For example, when the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of held balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470 is calculated, and the number of held balls = 470 is stored and held.

  Next, when the power failure is restored and the CU is started after that, as in the case of reconnection (FIGS. 71 and 72), on the CU side, device information request command transmission processing (F294), reception information backup processing ( F295), authentication request command transmission processing (F296), received information backup processing (F297), recovery request command transmission processing (F298), recovery processing (F299), external information output processing (F300), etc. are executed. Then, chip ID acquisition processing (F316), device information response response transmission processing (F317), authentication response response transmission processing (F318), recovery data (backup data) acquisition processing (F319), recovery response response transmission processing (F320), etc. Is executed.

  In this case, the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response response transmission process (F320) includes SQN = n + 1, previous ball number related information (addition ball number counter = 3, subtraction ball number counter = 23, start port 1 winning number counter = 1, starting port 2 winning number counter = 1), current ball number related information (held ball number counter = 470, adding ball number counter = 6, subtracting ball number counter = 36, starting port 1 winning number counter = 2, starting Mouth 2 winning number counter = 2).

On the CU side, in the recovery process (F299), it is determined that the communication partners are the same and both SQNs match, and a process of correcting the backup value based on the recovery data is performed.
Specifically, the number of balls held = 500 (number of balls held by CU) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start Correction is made so that the total number of mouth 1 = 2 and the total number of starting port 2 = 2.

Next, referring to FIGS. 89 and 88, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side at the time of occurrence of power interruption before reaching the CU operation instruction will be described. FIG. 89 shows the control operation on the CU side, and the control operation on the P machine side is the same as that when power interruption occurs after arrival of the CU data (FIG. 88).
The occurrence of power interruption before arrival of the CU operation instruction means the occurrence of power interruption on the CU side before arrival of the operation instruction command.

First, in the operation response response transmission process (F311), the P machine side transmits an operation response response including, for example, data of SQN = n−1 and current ball related information (ball number counter = 520, etc.).
On the other hand, the CU side backs up SQN = n, and transmits an operation instruction command of SQN = n to the P machine side in an operation instruction command transmission process (not shown).

  The P machine side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F312), and in the operation response response transmission process (F313), the SQN = n + 1, and the current ball related information (ball count counter = 500, added ball count counter) = 3, subtraction ball number counter = 23, start port 1 winning number counter = 1, start port 2 winning number counter = 1, etc.), and an operation response response including addition / subtraction data is transmitted to the CU side.

  Then, the response transmitted in F313 reaches the CU side, and the CU side corrects SQN = n + 2 and the number of held balls = 500 according to this response. Next, the CU side executed the operation instruction command transmission process (F331) to transmit the operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2, but the command does not reach the P machine side, and the next operation instruction command retransmission process (F332) In the next operation instruction command re-transmission process (F333), the same command (SQN = n + 2) is transmitted, but it does not reach the P machine side, and immediately after that, a power failure occurs in the CU. The control operation is as follows.

  That is, since the operation instruction command from the CU side has not reached the P machine side and the power supply of the CU has been cut off, on the P machine side, the function of the card unit communication monitoring timer described above is used, similar to the game end process of F30 described above. In addition, a game stop (solenoid stop) process (F314) is performed after determining that the communication has been cut off after 4 seconds and transitioning to the unconnected state and stopping the firing solenoid 173 to stop the firing (game prohibited state). Run. Also, as indicated by F315 in FIG. 88, the latest current ball related information is backed up (stored and stored).

  Next, when the CU recovers from the power interruption and then starts up, as in the case of reconnection (FIGS. 71 and 72), on the CU side, device information request command transmission processing (F334), reception information backup processing ( F335), authentication request command transmission processing (F336), received information backup processing (F337), recovery request command transmission processing (F338), recovery processing (F339), external information output processing (F340), etc. are executed. Then, chip ID acquisition processing (F316), device information response response transmission processing (F317), authentication response response transmission processing (F318), recovery data (backup data) acquisition processing (F319), recovery response response transmission processing (F320), etc. Is executed.

  In this case, the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response response transmission process (F320) includes SQN = n + 1, previous ball number related information (addition ball number counter = 3, subtraction ball number counter = 23, start port 1 winning number counter = 1, starting port 2 winning number counter = 1), current ball number related information (held ball number counter = 470, adding ball number counter = 6, subtracting ball number counter = 36, starting port 1 winning number counter = 2, starting Mouth 2 winning number counter = 2).

  On the CU side, in the recovery process (F339), the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is one more advanced than the SQN on the P machine side. Based on this, the backup value is corrected. Specifically, the number of balls held = 500 (number of balls held by CU) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start Correction is made so that the total number of mouth 1 = 2 and the total number of starting port 2 = 2.

Next, referring to FIGS. 90 and 91, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when a game is interrupted due to a break will be described.
As an example, the break switch 312 is pressed while the operation instruction from the CU side to the P machine side and the operation response from the P machine side to the CU side in response to the initial number of balls held = 500. The case will be described.

First, in response to an operation instruction command (not shown) previously transmitted from the CU side, the P machine side transmits an operation response response of, for example, SQN = n−1 in an operation response response transmission process (F371). On the other hand, the CU side backs up SQN = n, and transmits a command of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n as an operation instruction to the P machine side in the operation instruction command transmission process (F351).
In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F372), and transmits a response including data such as SQN = n + 1 to the CU side in the operation response response transmission process (F373).

  Upon receiving the operation response response transmitted in F373, the CU side receives and analyzes the response in the reception analysis process (F352), and in the external information output process (F353), the information corresponding to the received response is sent to the hall computer 150. Send to. Then, the CU side transmits an operation instruction command to the P machine side in the next operation instruction command transmission process (F354).

While the transmission / reception of the operation instruction command and the operation response response is repeatedly executed (for example, the timing between F353 and F354), the break switch 312 is pressed and an interruption signal is input to the CU side. Then, it becomes as follows.
First, in the operation instruction command transmission process (F354), the CU side has a prohibition request for prohibiting a game (game prohibition request ON), no clear request, clear display OFF, and SQN = n + 2 as the next operation instruction. Is sent to the P machine side.

  On the P machine side, the command is received and analyzed in the reception analysis process (F374), the game prohibition flag is set according to the prohibition request presence instruction included in the command, the drive of the launch solenoid 173 is stopped, and the launch stop state A game stop (solenoid stop) process (F375) for controlling to (game prohibition state) is executed.

Next, in the next operation response response transmission process (F376), the P machine side transmits a response including data such as SQN = n + 3, game prohibition possible, etc. to the CU side, and thereafter, a release waiting process (wait time setting) ( F377) is executed.
Open waiting processing (wait time setting) (F377) is a time (that is, floating ball processing time) until a ball that has already been fired flows down the game area 22 and flows to the merging path (game ball inlet 71). Considering this, for example, a process of providing a wait time of 10 seconds.

  On the other hand, the CU that has received the operation response response transmitted in F376 receives and analyzes this response in the reception analysis process (F355), and stores the information corresponding to the received response in the external information output process (F356). Send to computer 150. Thereafter, the CU side sets a wait time of 10 seconds in the end standby process (F357) corresponding to the open standby process (F377).

Note that polling (command / response transmission / reception in the present embodiment) is continued between the P machine side and the CU side even during the wait time of 10 seconds.
In other words, in the operation instruction command transmission process (F358), the CU side transmits an operation instruction command of no prohibition request, no clear request, OFF during clear display, and SQN = n + N−1 to the P machine side. In response to this, the P machine side receives and analyzes the command in the reception analysis process (F379), and in the operation response response transmission process (F378), SQN = n + N, current ball related information (ball number counter = 500, addition) Ball counter = 0, subtraction ball counter = 0, starting port 1 winning number counter = 0, starting port 2 winning number counter = 0, etc.), prohibition rejection OFF, game prohibition, game completion OFF, special prize OFF, and probability change An OFF response is sent to the CU side. Then, the operation of the CU side receiving and analyzing the response in the reception analysis process (F359) is repeated until the wait time elapses.

  When the wait time elapses, the P machine side executes F380 instead of F378 as the next operation response response transmission process. That is, in the operation response response transmission process (F380), for example, SQN = n + N + 2, current ball related information (ball number counter = 500, addition ball number counter = 0, subtraction ball number counter = 0, start port 1 winning number counter = 0, start port 2 winning number counter = 0, etc.), game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability variation OFF operation response responses are transmitted to the CU side. Here, “game completion ON” has a role as initializeable information indicating that it is possible to accept information for instructing initialization of the number of balls on the P machine side.

  In addition, the number of balls held (the value of the number of balls held) transmitted at this time is the final number of balls held at the end of the game. This control operation example shows a case where neither the number of added balls nor the number of subtracted balls is changed by the floating sphere. If a winning is generated by a floating ball or a foul ball is generated, the number of winning balls or the number of foul balls corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the CU side as an “added ball number”.

  Upon receiving the F380 operation response response, the CU receives and analyzes this response in reception analysis processing (F360), detects the completion of the game, and backs up SQN = n + N + 3 and data with clear request. Furthermore, according to “the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of winnings of the starting port 1 and the number of winnings of the starting port 2” included in this motion response response, the stored “number of holding balls, total number of added balls, total number of balls” Each data of “subtracted ball number, starting port 1 total winning number, starting port 2 total winning number” is updated. As a result, the number of balls held at the end of the game is determined on the CU side. Thus, since the final number of balls is determined on the CU side, there is no need to provide a management function for the number of balls on the P machine side, and the cost of the P machine can be suppressed as much as possible.

Next, the CU side executes a clear display process (F361) for causing the operation display device 30 to display an indication that the CU is being cleared (clear display is in progress), and then the external information output process (F362). Information is transmitted to the hall computer 150.
Thereafter, in the operation instruction command transmission process (F363), the CU side transmits a command including clear request present (clear request ON), clear display ON, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P machine side. Here, “clear request present” (clear request ON) is data instructing initialization of the number of balls on the P machine side.

  On the P machine side, the command transmitted from the CU side in F363 is received and analyzed in the reception analysis process (F381), and the control command included in this command is sent to the effect control device 53 in the next data backup (F382). Send to. In response to this, the effect control device 53 causes the operation display device 30 to display a display screen during data backup (screen during data backup display), for example. Further, the P plane side backs up various counters of the current ball related information and the previous ball related information in F382.

  Next, on the P machine side, in the operation response response transmission process (F383), SQN = 0, current ball related information (ball number counter = 0, addition ball number counter = 0, subtraction ball number counter = 5, start port 1 (Winning number counter = 0, start port 2 winning number counter = 0, etc.), game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF responses are transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU receives and analyzes the response in the reception analysis process (F364), and backs up the number of balls held = 0 and the number of balls held = 500. The number of held balls = 500 is a value obtained by adding 500, which is the number of held balls immediately before the clear request, to the number of held balls. Next, the CU side transmits the information at this point to the hall computer 150 in the external information output process (F365).

  Thereafter, the CU side performs data backup in the data backup process (F366), records the number of possessed balls = 0 on the inserted game card, discharges it, and returns it to the player. Then, for example, SQN = m + 1, the number of balls held = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting ports = 0, the number of starting ports 2 = 0, gaming prohibited, game completion ON, A special prize OFF command is transmitted to the P machine side. The CU then ejects the card. In addition, in the P machine interrupted due to the break, the game by other players is interrupted by the above-described processing.

Next, an example of the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when a command is not reached without a CU request operation will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG. The initial number of balls is 520.
The command unreachable without CU request operation means a case where an operation instruction command (no request operation) from the CU side has not yet reached the P machine side.
In FIG. 92, the control operation (processing contents) and transmission data on the CU side are shown on the left side, and the control operation and transmission data on the P machine side are shown in chronological order from top to bottom. The reference numerals F (F451, F452, etc.) are given to the description part of the transmission data etc. (the same applies to FIGS. 92 to 97 described later).

  First, the CU side transmits an operation instruction command (F451) with no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n to the P machine side as operation instructions. However, for example, if this command does not reach the P machine side due to no connection, the CU side, when there is no response, passes for 1 second by the function of the aforementioned monitoring timer (the function of F11 command retransmission processing described above), An operation instruction command (F452) having the same content as F451 is transmitted to the P machine side.

  At this time, since the operation instruction command does not arrive on the P aircraft side, the current ball related information backup clear process is not performed. That is, by receiving the operation instruction command from the CU side, the P machine side adds the number of added spheres and the subtraction sphere stored in the current sphere related information storage area (the storage area of each counter value of the current sphere related information). Number, starting port 1 winning number, and starting port 2 winning number data in the previous ball related information storage area (storage area of each counter value of the previous ball related information) The number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of winnings for starting port 1 and the number of winnings for starting port 2 are stored as backups as the starting port 1 winning number and the previous starting port 2 winning number. The backup clear process of clearing the data of 0 is performed.

  However, in this case, since the operation instruction command from the CU side has not reached the P machine side, the backup clear process is not performed on the P machine side. As a result, the P machine side, for example, every time a winning prize is added or subtracted by launching, and every time a start win occurs, these data are accumulated and stored as current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area. To do.

If the retransmitted F452 command has not arrived either, the response from the P machine side is not returned to the CU side, so that the same operation instruction command (SQN = SQN = Perform a second retransmission for n).
Then, the retransmitted F452 command (or the same command transmitted in the second retransmission) arrives, and the value of the current sphere-related information up to this command arrival time (the value obtained by cumulative addition as described above) ), For example, the added ball number counter = 6, the subtracted ball number counter = 36, the starting port 1 winning number counter = 0, and the starting port 2 winning number counter = 0.

  Then, the P machine side performs the above-described backup clear process with respect to the arrived command. That is, SQN = n + 1 and the previous ball related information (added ball counter = 6, subtracted ball counter = 36, etc.) are backed up, and the number of balls held = 520 + 6-36 = 490 Is corrected and backed up (F453). In addition, after the response is created, each counter value of the current ball related information (excluding the number of balls held) is cleared to zero.

Next, on the P machine side, SQN = n + 1, current ball related information (number of balls held counter = 490, number of added balls counter = 6, number of subtracted balls counter = 36, starting port 1 winning number counter = 0, starting port 2 winning number An operation response response (F454) including data of counter = 0 is transmitted to the CU side.
On the CU side, the response (F454) is received and analyzed, and the number of held balls = 520 + 6 (number of added balls) −36 (number of subtracted balls) = 490 is corrected and the number of held balls is corrected and backed up (F455).

Next, referring to the lower part of FIG. 92, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the CU addition request command has not been reached will be described.
The time when the CU addition request command has not reached means a case where an operation instruction command (with an addition request) from the CU side has not reached the P machine.
As an example, the initial number of balls held is set to 520, and the number of requested balls to be added when there is an operation for withdrawal from a stored ball replay or prepaid balance is set to 125.

  First, the CU side transmits, as an operation instruction, an operation instruction command (F461) including data of addition request, no subtraction, SQN = n, and addition request ball number = 125. However, for example, when this command does not reach the P machine side due to unconnection, the CU side retransmits the operation instruction command (F462) having the same contents as F461 to the P machine side as described above twice.

  At this time, as described above, during the operation instruction command non-reaching period, the P aircraft side does not perform the backup clear processing of the current ball related information. For example, the number of added balls by winning, the number of subtracting balls by firing, or starting Each time a winning occurs, these data are accumulated and stored as current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area.

  Then, the retransmitted command of F462 (or the same command transmitted in the second retransmission) arrives, and the value of the current ball related information up to this command arrival time (the value obtained by cumulative addition as described above) ), For example, the added ball number counter = 6, the subtracted ball number counter = 36, the starting port 1 winning number counter = 1, and the starting port 2 winning number counter = 1. Then, in response to the arrived command, the P machine side performs the above-described backup clear process by reflecting that there is an addition request (addition request ball number = 125). That is, SQN = n + 1 and the previous ball-related information (added ball counter = 6, subtracted ball counter = 36, etc.) are backed up, and the number of balls held = 520 + 125 + 6-36 = 615 is calculated. Is corrected and backed up (F463). In addition, after the response is created, each counter value of the current ball related information (excluding the number of balls held) is cleared to zero.

Next, on the P machine side, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, current ball related information (ball number counter = 615, addition ball number counter = 6, subtraction ball number counter = 36, start port 1 winning number counter = 1, start The operation response response (F464) including the data of the mouth 2 winning number counter = 1, etc. is transmitted to the CU side.
On the CU side, the response (F464) is received and analyzed, and the number of balls held is calculated by calculating the number of balls held = 520 + 125 (number of balls required for addition) +6 (number of balls added) −36 (number of balls subtracted) = 615. Back up (F465).

Next, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the P machine response is not reached will be described with reference to FIG.
P machine response unreachable 1 means that the operation response response from the P machine side (response to no requested action) has not reached the CU side.
As an example, the initial number of balls is 520.

  First, the CU side transmits an operation instruction command (F471) with no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n to the P machine side as operation instructions. When the command of F471 arrives, the value of the current ball related information up to this command arrival time is, for example, an added ball counter = 3, a subtracted ball counter = 13, a starting port 1 winning counter = 1, a starting port 2 winning Assume that the number counter = 0. Then, the P machine side performs the above-described backup clear process with respect to the arrived command.

  That is, SQN = n + 1 and the previous ball-related information (added ball counter = 3, subtracted ball counter = 13, etc.) are backed up, and the number of balls held is calculated as 520 + 3-13 = 510. Is corrected and backed up (F472). In addition, after the response is created, each counter value of the current ball related information (excluding the number of balls held) is cleared to zero.

Next, on the P machine side, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, current ball related information (ball count counter = 510, ball count counter = 3, ball count counter = 13, start port 1 winning counter = 1, start The operation response response (F473) including the data of the mouth 2 winning number counter = 0, etc.) is transmitted to the CU side.
However, if the response of this F473 does not reach the CU side for any reason, the CU side, as described above, sends the operation instruction command (F474) having the same content (SQN = n) as the F471 up to the P machine side. Send to.

  Then, if this command (F474) reaches the P machine side in the first retransmission, the P machine side receives this and the above-mentioned backup clear processing is executed and an operation response response is sent. Since the SQN value (= n) of the command received this time is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the operation response response transmitted to the CU side does not reach the CU side. The following processing is performed.

  That is, data of current ball related information (current ball related information) (values of counters such as an added ball number counter, a subtracted ball number counter, a starting port 1 winning number counter, a starting port 2 winning number counter, etc.) are used as previous ball related information. Prior to the process of backing up and clearing as data, the previous sphere related information data is cumulatively added to the current sphere related information data. Then, an operation response response (F476) including the data of the cumulative addition result is created and transmitted.

  In this case, specifically, as a result of the cumulative addition, the data (F475) backed up as the previous sphere related information on the P machine side is SQN = n + 1, for example, the number of pre-added balls = 3 + 3 = 6, pre-subtraction The number of balls = 13 + 8 = 21, the number of winning at the front start port 1 = 1 + 0 = 1, the number of winning at the front start port 2 = 0 + 1 = 1. Further, the number of balls data backed up on the P machine side is the number of balls held = 520 + 6-21 = 505. The motion response response (F476) includes data of SQN = n + 1, the number of held balls = 505, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 21, the starting port 1 winning number = 1, and the starting port 2 winning number = 1. It will be included.

On the P machine side, after creating the operation response response (F476), the data of the current ball related information (excluding the number of balls held) is cleared to zero.
When the operation response response (F476) reaches the CU side, the normal operation is resumed. However, as shown in FIG. 93, when this response does not reach the CU side, the operation is as follows.
That is, on the CU side, the operation instruction command (F477) having the same content (no request, SQN = n) is transmitted to the P machine side again.

  In response to this, the P machine side determines that the SQN received this time is the previous value (= n) of the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response reaches the CU side. It is detected that it is a re-transmission because it is not. As a result, on the P machine side, similar to the above, cumulative addition storage (F478) is performed on the previous ball related information, and an operation response response (F479) is created and returned to the CU side. As a specific example, SQN = n + 1, number of held balls = 485, number of added balls = 12, number of subtracted balls = 47, start port 1 winning number = 2, start port 2 winning number = 2 The contents are transmitted to the CU side.

  If this motion response response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of balls held = 520 + 12−47 = 485, and stores the data (F480) in which the number of balls held is corrected in 485. .

  As described above, when the previously transmitted operation response did not reach the CU, the P machine side did not retransmit the unreachable operation response and then transmitted the next operation response, but did not reach it. The information after adding the information is transmitted as the next operation response. As a result, it is possible to reliably and efficiently collect information on the number of balls held and the number of winnings at the start opening. In particular, the example of FIG. 93 is a case where the operation response response from the P machine side has not reached twice, and the operation response transmitted for the third time includes the information of the operation response transmitted for the second time. The combined value will be included.

Next, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the P machine response is not reached will be described with reference to FIG.
P machine response unreachable 2 is a case where an operation response response from the P machine side (response to the presence of an addition request) has not been reached.
As an example, the initial number of balls held is set to 520, and the number of requested balls to be added when there is an operation for withdrawal from a stored ball replay or prepaid balance is set to 125.

First, the CU side transmits an operation instruction command (F481) with an addition request, SQN = n, and the number of addition request balls = 125 as an operation instruction to the P machine side. When the command of F481 arrives and the value of the current ball related information up to the time of reaching this command is, for example, the added ball number counter = 3, the subtracted ball number counter = 13, the starting port 1 winning number counter = 1, the starting port 2 winning Assume that the number counter = 0.
Then, in response to the arrived command, the P machine side performs the above-described backup clear process while reflecting the addition request ball number = 125. That is, SQN = n + 1, and the previous ball related information (added ball counter = 3, subtracted ball counter = 13, etc.) are backed up, and the number of balls held = 520 + 125 + 3-13 = 635 Is corrected and backed up (F482). In addition, after the response is created, each counter value of the current ball related information (excluding the number of balls held) is cleared to zero.

Next, on the P machine side, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, current ball related information (ball count counter = 635, ball count counter = 3, ball count counter = 13, start port 1 winning counter = 1, start The operation response response (F483) including data of the mouth 2 winning number counter = 0, etc. is transmitted to the CU side.
However, if the response of F483 does not reach the CU side for some reason, the CU side sends the operation instruction command (F484) having the same contents (SQN = n) as F481 up to twice as described above. Send to.

  And if this command (F484) arrives at the P machine side by the first retransmission, the P machine side receives this and the above-mentioned backup clear processing is executed and an operation response response is sent. Since the SQN value (= n) of the command received this time is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the operation response response transmitted to the CU side does not reach the CU side. In the same way as in the case of P machine response unreachable 1, the following processing is performed.

That is, before the process of backing up and clearing the current sphere related information (current sphere related information) data as the previous sphere related information data, the previous sphere related information data is cumulatively added to the current sphere related information data. Then, an operation response response (F486) including the cumulative addition result data is created and transmitted.
However, although the received request ball number = 125 is included in the received command (F484), the addition of the number of held balls is not updated based on this addition request ball number. This is because the addition update is not executed repeatedly for the same addition request.

In this case, specifically, as a result of the cumulative addition, the data (F485) backed up as the previous sphere related information on the P machine side is SQN = n + 1, for example, the number of pre-added balls = 3 + 3 = 6, pre-subtraction The number of balls = 13 + 8 = 21, the number of winning at the front start port 1 = 1 + 0 = 1, the number of winning at the front start port 2 = 0 + 1 = 1. Further, the number of balls data backed up on the P machine side is the number of balls held = 635 + 3-8 = 630. Then, the operation response response (F486) is addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of held balls = 630, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 21, starting port 1 winning number = 1, starting port 2 winning number = 1 data is included.
On the P machine side, after creating the operation response response (F486), the data of the current ball related information (excluding the number of balls held) is cleared to zero.

When the operation response response (F486) reaches the CU side, the normal operation is resumed. However, when this response does not reach the CU side as shown in FIG. 94, the operation is as follows.
That is, on the CU side, the operation instruction command (F487) having the same content (addition request is present, SQN = n) is transmitted to the P machine side again.

  In response to this, the P machine side determines that the SQN received this time is the previous value (= n) of the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response reaches the CU side. It is detected that it is a re-transmission because it is not. As a result, on the P machine side, similar to the above, cumulative addition storage (F488) is performed on the previous ball related information (however, the addition of the number of balls held in response to the current addition request is not performed), and the operation response response Create (F489) and send it back to the CU side. As a specific example, SQN = n + 1, number of held balls = 610, number of added balls = 12, number of subtracted balls = 47, start port 1 winning number = 2, start port 2 winning number = 2 as the operation response response. The contents are transmitted to the CU side.

  If this motion response response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of balls held = 520 + 125 + 12−47 = 610, and stores the data (F490) in which the number of balls held is corrected in 610. .

  As described above, when the previously transmitted operation response does not reach the CU side, the P aircraft side does not transmit the next operation response after retransmitting the unreachable operation response, but has not reached it. The information after adding the information is transmitted as the next operation response. Moreover, even if the operation instruction command from the CU side is a command with an addition request including the addition request ball number data, when this command is received again, the number of balls held for the addition request ball number is added. Since the update is not executed, it is possible to prevent a problem that the number of held balls is erroneously updated a plurality of times for the same addition request. Therefore, even in the case of an operation instruction command with an addition request, it is possible to reliably and efficiently collect information regarding the number of balls held and the number of winnings at the start opening.

Next, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the CU subtraction request command P machine is rejected will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
The CU subtraction request command P machine rejection means a case where the P machine side returns a subtraction rejection response to the subtraction request from the CU side.
As an example, the initial number of balls held is 520, the operation instruction / response between the CU side and the P machine side makes one round trip, the number of added balls is 3, the number of subtracted balls is 13, and the number of balls held is 520 + 3−3. Let 13 = 510.

  First, when an order is issued by the wagon service and a subtraction request for 500 balls is generated from the number of held balls, the CU side includes an operation instruction including SQN = n + 2 and subtraction request ball number = 500 as operation instructions. A command (F491) is transmitted to the P machine side. When this F491 command arrives, on the P aircraft side, the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, and the current number of held balls = 510 + 6-36 = 480. Since the number = 500 is insufficient, the subtraction request cannot be satisfied.

Then, the P machine side has SQN = n + 3, subtraction rejection ON to reject the subtraction request, the number of holding balls = 480, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and An operation response response (F492) including data of the number of times of start port (2) = 2 is transmitted to the CU side.
When the motion response response (F492) reaches the CU side, the CU side calculates gaming ball = 510 + 6-36 = 480 and corrects the gaming ball to 480. Then, subtraction rejection processing is performed. As this processing, for example, the operation display device 30 is notified (displayed or the like) such as “cannot subtract due to insufficient game balls”.

Next, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the CU clear instruction request command P machine is rejected will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
The CU clear instruction request command P machine rejection means the case where the P machine side returns a clear rejection response to the clear instruction request from the CU side.
As an example, the initial number of balls held is 520, the operation instruction / response between the CU side and the P machine side makes one round trip, the number of added balls is 3, the number of subtracted balls is 13, and the number of balls held is 520 + 3−3. Let 13 = 510.

  First, for example, when the player presses the return button 213, the CU side issues an operation instruction command (F493) including data of SQN = n, game prohibition request presence, and clear request absence as an operation instruction. To the side. When the F493 command arrives, the P machine side transmits an operation response response (F494) including data such as SQN = n + 1, prohibition rejection OFF, game prohibition request to the CU side. At this time, a wait time (10 seconds) is provided on the CU side, and instructions or responses are continued between the P machine side and the CU side during the 10 seconds.

  Thereafter, the CU side transmits, as an operation instruction, a data operation instruction command (F495) including SQN = n + N + 3, clear request presence, etc. to the P machine side. When this F495 command arrives, on the P machine side, SQN = n + N + 4, clear refusal ON not clearing, number of balls held = 480, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of start ports (1) = 1. An operation response response (F496) including data of start port (2) times = 2 is transmitted to the CU side.

  Then, if the operation response response (F496) reaches the CU side, the CU side detects clear rejection, and an operation instruction command (F497) including data such as SQN = n + N + 4, clear request non-existence as an operation instruction Send to the side and process clear cancellation. In this clear cancel process, for example, the operation display device 30 is notified (displayed or the like) such as “cannot be cleared and cancels”.

Next, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the CU game permission request command P machine is rejected will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
The CU game permission request command P machine rejection means a case where the P machine side returns a game permission rejection response to a game permission request from the CU side.

  First, when the game prohibition factor is resolved after the operation instruction / response transmission / reception when the P machine side is in the game prohibition state, the CU side operates as an operation instruction command including data such as SQN = n + 2, game permission request existence (F501). ) Is sent to the Aircraft P side.

When the command of F501 arrives, if the P machine side is in a state where it is not possible to launch a ball for some reason, the P machine side will respond to an action response response including data such as a game rejection ON that rejects the game permission request (F502) Is returned to the CU side.
Then, if the operation response response (F502) reaches the CU side, the CU side, as an operation instruction, until the game is permitted, an operation instruction command (F503) including data such as SQN = n + x, game permission request existence, etc. Repeatedly send to P side.

Next, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the CU game prohibition request command P machine is rejected will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
The CU game prohibition request command P machine rejection means a case where the P machine side returns a game prohibition rejection response to a game prohibition request from the CU side.
First, when the return button 213 is pressed down after the operation instruction / response transmission / reception while the P machine side is in the game prohibition state and the game prohibition factor is generated, the CU side will have SQN = n + 2 as the operation instruction. An operation instruction command (F504) including requested data is transmitted to the P machine side.

If the P machine side is in a state of rejecting the game prohibition request when this F504 command arrives, the P machine side sends an operation response response (F505) including data such as prohibition rejection ON to reject the game prohibition request. Reply to the CU side.
Then, when the operation response response (F505) reaches the CU side, the CU side issues an operation instruction command (F506) including data such as SQN = n + x, game prohibition request presence, etc. as an operation instruction on the P machine side. Is repeatedly transmitted to the Aircraft P until it is prohibited.

Next, the control operation on the CU side and the P machine side when the CU glass opening request command P machine is rejected will be described with reference to FIG.
The CU glass opening request command P machine rejection means a case where the P machine side returns a glass opening rejection response to the glass opening request from the CU side.

First, when an instruction to open the glass frame 13 is input, the CU side issues an operation instruction command (F511) including data such as SQN = n, prohibition request present, glass opening request non-existence as an operation instruction. Transmit to P side.
When this F511 command arrives, the P machine side outputs a signal to stop the driving of the firing solenoid 173, and the operation response response includes data such as SQN = n + 1, prohibition rejection OFF, game prohibition, etc. (F512) is transmitted to the P machine side.
At this time, a wait time (10 seconds) is provided on the CU side, and instructions or responses are continued between the P machine side and the CU side during the 10 seconds.

Then, the CU side transmits an operation instruction command (F513) including data such as SQN = n + 2, glass opening request existence to the P machine side as an operation instruction when the 10 second wait time (10 seconds) is completed. .
When the command of F513 arrives, the P machine side sends an operation response response (F514) including data such as glass opening refusal ON that refuses to release the lock of the glass frame 13 for some reason and releases it to the CU side. Send.

  When the operation response response (F514) reaches the CU side, the CU side transmits an operation instruction command (F515) including data such as SQN = n + N + 4, glass opening request non-existence to the P machine side as an operation instruction. At this time, on the CU side, for example, the operation display device 30 is notified (displayed or the like) that “the glass frame cannot be opened”. FIG. 97 shows the control operation in the case of rejecting the opening request for the glass frame 13, but the control operation in the case of rejecting the opening request for the inner frame 12 is substantially the same, and redundant description is omitted.

  Next, among the operations of the gaming system 1 described above (FIGS. 8 to 15), characteristic control operations relating to the legitimacy determination will be described based on the processing state transition diagrams of FIGS. The control operation described below schematically shows the flow of the control operation with respect to the validity determination.

  FIG. 98 shows the flow of control operation in the installation stage of the gaming system 1. In FIG. 98, in order to clarify the correspondence between the figure and the explanation, the flow of operation when the verification result = OK in the verification route of the card unit 200 is indicated by a double line arrow for each of the illustrated processes and states. Along with B1, B2,... Further, the flow of operation when the verification result is NG in the verification route of the card unit 200 is indicated by a broken-line arrow, and a symbol C is added such as C1, C2,. Further, the flow of the operation relating to the verification route of the gaming machine 10 is indicated by a solid line arrow and denoted by D, such as D1, D2,.

First, the flow of operation when the verification result is OK in the verification route of the card unit 200 will be described.
When power is turned on to the card unit 200, the main controller 221 of the card unit 200 uses the unit serial ID included in the temporary management information registered in advance as information for requesting transmission of actual management information (this authentication request). ) And to the hall computer 150 (B1). Here, if the same unit serial ID as the received unit serial ID is not included in the already registered temporary management information, the hall computer 150 registers this unit serial ID as temporary management information (B2). Then, the hall computer 150 transmits the unit serial ID and this authentication request to the gaming system information management company 96 (B3).

  Subsequently, the gaming system information management company 96 searches whether or not provisional management information including the same unit serial ID as the unit serial ID received from the hall computer 150 has already been registered (B4). If the temporary management information to be searched has already been registered as a result of the temporary management information search here, a key version of the authentication key used for encrypted communication is created and already registered with this key version. The unit serial ID or the like in the temporary management information is registered as actual management information (B5).

  Then, the gaming system information management company 96 transmits the registered actual management information to the hall computer 150 together with the temporary management information search result (verification result = OK) (B6). When the hall computer 150 receives the actual management information and the search result (collation result = OK), the hall computer 150 registers the actual management information (B7). Then, the hall computer 150 transmits the registered actual management information to the main control device 221 of the card unit 200 (B8).

  Next, when the main control device 221 receives the actual management information from the hall computer 150, the main control device 221 performs an internal mutual verification process for verifying the temporary management information already registered with the communication control device 222. In the verification, since the verification is performed using the authentication key and the temporary authentication key, the verification result of this information is NG (B9). At this time, the card unit 200 notifies (displays, etc.) that the verification result is NG by using, for example, the notification lamp 204 that is a notification means (B10).

  Thereafter, the main control device 221 and the communication control device 222 start communication by collating the management information registered with each other, initializing the storage areas (RAM 113, RAM 83), etc. (B11). If the collation result is NG in the collation operation here, the hall computer 150 notifies (displays, etc.) that the collation result is NG by using the notification means such as the display display 151 (B12).

  Further, in the verification route of the card unit 200, when the verification result is NG, when the hall computer 150 receives the above-mentioned actual management information or search result (verification result = NG) from the gaming system information management company 96 (C1) The collation result = NG, that is, it is determined that the corresponding management information does not exist (C2). Then, the hall computer 150 notifies (displays, etc.) that the collation result = NG using the display means 151 such as the display unit (C3).

Next, the verification route of the gaming machine 10 in FIG. 98 will be described.
When starting communication with the communication control device 222, the main control device 221 requests the communication control device 222 to transmit management information (D1). Then, the communication control device 222 requests the payout control device 80 of the gaming machine 10 to send management information (D2), and then the payout control device 80 sends the management information to the game control device 54. Request (D3). And the game control apparatus 54 transmits unit serial ID, a key version, etc. to the payout control apparatus 80 among the management information already memorize | stored in the RAM113 (D4).

  The payout control device 80 transmits the management information received from the game control device 54 to the communication control device 222 of the card unit 200 (D5). The communication control device 222 that has received this management information registers the management information in its own storage area (D6), and then sends the management information to the main control device 221 that first requested the management information to be transmitted. Transmit (D7). The main control device 221 registers the management information transmitted from the communication control device 222 in its own storage area (D8), and transmits the management information to the hall computer 150 together with the verification request (D9).

  Then, the hall computer 150 determines whether or not the management information transmitted from the main control device 221 is already registered, and adds the amusement shop information to the management information (D10). Further, the hall computer 150 transmits the management information to the gaming system information management company 96 (D11). When the gaming system information management company 96 receives the management information from the hall computer 150, the gaming system information management company 96 checks the management information for checking the management information already registered in its own storage area (D12).

  In the management information collation, the collation result is transmitted from the gaming system information management company 96 to the hall computer 150 (D13). The hall computer 150 determines the received collation result, and if the collation result = OK, the management information is registered in its own storage area (D14-1). On the other hand, if the collation result = NG, the management information is deleted (D14-2). The verification result is transmitted to the main controller 221 of the card unit 200 in either case of OK or NG (D15). The main control device 221 starts communication with the communication control device 222 using the communication key if the collation result = OK.

Next, when the card unit 200 is in the online state in the operation stage, or the operation of the gaming system 1 in the replacement stage, a characteristic control operation relating to the legitimacy judgment will be described based on the process state transition diagram of FIG. To do.
If the main control device 221 of the card unit 200 is in an online state in which the main computer 221 can communicate with the hall computer 150, the main control device 221 sends information requesting transmission of actual management information (this authentication request) to the hall computer 150. (E1).

  Then, the hall computer 150 transmits the authentication request received from the main controller 221 to the gaming system information management company 96 (E2). Then, the gaming system information management company 96 performs management information collation to collate the management information received from the hall computer 150 with the management information registered in its own storage area. For example, if the collation result = OK, The result is transmitted to the hall computer 150 (E3). Subsequently, the hall computer 150 transmits actual management information to the main control device 221 that has made the authentication request based on the collation result (= OK) (E4). If the collation result is NG, the main control device 221 that has received the result notifies the fact by the notification lamp 204 or the like, which is a notification means (E5).

  Next, the main control device 221 transmits a transmission request for actual management information to the communication control device 222 (E6), and the communication control device 222 that has received this transmission request sends a payout control device 80 of the gaming machine 10 to the payout control device 80. The transmission request is transmitted (E7). Then, the payout control device 80 transmits the transmission request to the game control device 54 (E8). Then, the game control device 54 transmits the actual management information already registered in the RAM 113 to the payout control device 80 (E9), and the payout control device 80 transmits the real management information to the communication control device 222. (E10).

  Thereafter, the communication control device 222 registers the management information in the storage area of the actual management information received from the payout control device 80, and transmits the management information to the main control device 221 (E11). The main control device 221 registers the actual management information transmitted from the communication control device 222 in its own storage area and transmits it to the hall computer 150 (E12).

  Further, the hall computer 150 transmits the actual management information received from the main control device 221 to the gaming system information management company 96 (E13). Then, the gaming system information management company 96 performs management information verification that compares the actual management information received from the hall computer 150 with the management information registered in its own storage area. For example, if the verification result is OK, The result is transmitted to the hall computer 150 (E14).

  Subsequently, the hall computer 150 transmits the collation result (= OK) to the main controller 221 (E15). In the card unit 200, when a request for collation work (internal mutual collation processing) is transmitted from the communication control device 222 to the main control device 221 (E16), the main control device 221 transmits to the communication control device 222 as described above. The collation result (= OK) in the collation work is transmitted (E17).

If the collation result is NG, the communication control apparatus 222 that has received the result notifies the fact by the notification lamp 204 or the like that is a notification means (E18).
In the above description, the order in which each route in the figure is described is not limited to time series.

Also, the processing state transition diagram of FIG. 100 shows the operation of the gaming system 1 when the card unit 200 is in an offline state at the operation stage.
That is, in the offline state, the card unit 200 does not send or receive information to / from the hall computer 150 or the gaming system information management company 96, and the above-described verification operation (internal mutual verification processing) is performed between the main control device 221 and the communication control device 222. ) Is executed, and processing common to E5 to E11 and E16 to 18 shown in FIG. 99 is performed. Note that a duplicate description of processes common to those in FIG. 99 is omitted.

  Next, when the monitoring result of the inner frame opening switch 126 (or the glass frame opening switch 125) is a result indicating that opening / closing has occurred, that is, a specific notification when the frame opening information indicates that there is an opening. 101 to 104 will be described. Here, FIGS. 101 and 103 show notifications in the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200, and FIGS. 102 and 104 show notifications in the display display 151 of the hall computer 150 and the display unit 161 of the employee remote control 160. ing.

  FIG. 101 shows an example of displaying and notifying character information such as “There was a nighttime frame open. Please check for errors” separately on the operation display device 30 and the display device 35 of the gaming machine 10. Yes. In addition to such a display, the alarm sound or the character information may be used as it is as audio and output from the speakers 16a and 16b for notification. Further, not only on the gaming machine 10 but also on the card unit 200 side, similar character information may be displayed on the display input device 203, or the notification lamp 204 and the error display LED 88 may be notified by lighting or flashing. .

  As described above, the notification termination condition is that when a new frame opening detection or RAM clear switch 182 operation is performed as described above, or when a predetermined time has elapsed, a predetermined command is received from the card unit 200. Even after these end conditions are finished, the display input device 203 of the card unit 200, the display display 151 of the hall computer 150 described below, or the remote controller 160 owned by the employee, etc. You may make it leave the display which can recognize the gaming machine 10 which has detected the opening of the frame somewhere.

  In FIG. 102, the display display 151 of the hall computer 150 and the display unit 161 of the remote controller 160 are also displayed with “the night frame open. "Please check etc." The example of displaying and displaying character information such as "is shown. Similar to the above example, notification may be made with these displays together with an alarm sound or voice output. In particular, in the display here, not only the notification that the frame has been opened but also the notification that recommends that the frame be opened to check the substrate or the like is given to alert the employee.

  FIG. 103 shows a situation in which an employee of a game store is prompted to register illegal information when the above-described display is performed on the operation display device 30 and the display device 35 of the gaming machine 10. That is, a fraudulent information registration screen is displayed on the display input device 203 of the card unit 200, and an employee of the amusement shop can register the type of fraud, the presence / absence of fraud, etc. by operating the fraud information registration screen. it can. Alternatively, the information may be registered by operating the remote controller 160 and received from the IR light emitting unit 205. The registered information is managed by the various data storage units of the card unit 200 and the hall computer 150 described above.

  FIG. 104 shows an example in which information managed by the hall computer 150 is displayed on the display 151. First, in FIG. 104 (a), various types of managed information are displayed corresponding to each gaming machine 10. Here, in the display item column, “monitor setting” in particular is synonymous with “target setting” explained in FIG. 68, and “illegal setting” is synonymous with “fraud occurrence setting” explained in FIG. 68. Further, “illegal code (details)” is synonymous with “illegal information” described in FIG.

As described above, in the display item, the gaming machine 10 whose “unauthorized setting” is “present” is displayed so as to be clearly distinguishable from others by coloring the machine number column corresponding to the corresponding gaming machine 10. Thus, monitoring can be strengthened.
In the “remarks” field, when the player is a member, player information such as a membership number of a game card may be displayed together.

  Next, in FIG. 104 (b), the layout arrangement of each gaming machine 10 in each gaming machine 10 for each gaming machine island is displayed, and the illegal setting is performed together with the color-coded display of the operating status etc. for each gaming machine 10. Gaming machines and monitored gaming machines are displayed in different colors in different display modes. In this way, by displaying the illegally set gaming machine and the monitored gaming machine together with their respective positional relations so as to be clearly distinguishable from the other gaming machines 10, employees who are in the vicinity of the unauthorized setting gaming machine or the monitored gaming machine An employee can be alerted by an income or the like, and monitoring in the game store can be further strengthened.

Further, in the member information database managed by the hall computer 150, a history regarding the membership number of the gaming card of the player who played the game with the monitored gaming machine or the unauthorized setting gaming machine (more detailed history may be left). May be recorded, and the entry of the player who owns the game card may be monitored or warned.
Further, face authentication described later may be adopted so that fraud detection by night face authentication is additionally performed, or fraudulent persons may be detected by face authentication during business.

  Next, a modified example of the front configuration of the gaming machine 10 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 and an enlarged view of the operation display device 30 in FIG. 105, and a block diagram showing a control system of the gaming machine 10 in this modified example in FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the number-of-balls display editing process of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the number-of-balls display data setting process of the gaming machine 10 in this modification.

  In the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 105, a ball number display 40 is arranged separately from the operation display device 30. As shown in FIG. 106, the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls held by the player, which is controlled by the payout control device 80 and updated by the gaming machine 10 (the payout control device 80). For example, six 7-segment LEDs are arranged to display a six-digit numerical value (the number of balls).

  The lower panel 11a is provided with a counting switch 311. Further, although the break switch 312, counting switch LED 313, and break switch valid display LED 314 described above are not shown in the drawing, these switches are configured to be displayed on the panel screen 31 of the operation display device 30. Also good. In addition, the replay button 211, the ball lending button 212, and the return button 213 can be displayed on the panel screen 31 separately from those in the card unit 200, and by touching the button display location on this screen, A similar operation is realized.

  Of course, like the above-described gaming machine 10 and card unit 200, these buttons are provided on the card unit 200 instead of the panel screen 31, and by operating these buttons, the payout control of the gaming machine 10 (from the card unit 200) It is also possible to send a signal to the device 80) for lending, replaying, etc.

Next, the number-of-balls display editing process for displaying the number of balls on the number-of-balls display 40 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S521 whether a card unit unconnected error has occurred. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S528, and if not, the process proceeds to step S522. The determination of the card unit unconnected error is made based on, for example, a card unit connection confirmation flag.

When the process proceeds to step S522, it is determined whether an enclosed system switch abnormality error is occurring. If it is occurring, the process proceeds to step S528, and if not, the process proceeds to step S523. The enclosed system switch abnormality error is a switch abnormality with respect to the enclosed system switches (launching ball detection switch 161, foul ball detection switch 162, out ball detection switch 163, and enclosed ball number detection switches 164 and 165). This is performed based on the monitoring result of step S81 in the error monitoring process.
In step S528, display data for displaying a notification of an enclosed system switch abnormality error or a card unit unconnected error is set by the ball number indicator 40, and the process returns.

  When the process proceeds to step S523, it is determined whether the account is being settled (including waiting for withdrawal of the game card). If the settlement is in progress, the process proceeds to step S529, and if not, the process proceeds to step S524. The determination as to whether the payment is being made may be performed in the same manner as step S431 in the break start monitoring process of FIG. 46 described above, for example.

  In step S524, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-balls display timer is not zero. If it is not zero (when time is not up), the process proceeds to step S530, and if it is zero (when time is up). Then, the process proceeds to step S525. The number-of-balls display timer is a timer that is set at the end of settlement in step S422 in the settlement completion monitoring process of FIG. 45 described above.

In step S529, display data (flashing number display blinking data) for blinking the number of balls is set by the number-of-balls display 40, and the process returns.
In step S530, similarly, the number-of-balls display blinking data is set, and in step S531, the number-of-balls display timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”. Next, in step S532, it is determined whether or not the number-of-balls display timer has become “0”. If it is “0”, the process returns. If not, the number of balls to be displayed is determined in step S533. Is cleared to 0, and the process jumps to step S527.
By the processing of these steps S530, S531, S532, and S533, the ball is held until the game card is removed after the return button 213 is pressed and the game card is extracted and the number-of-balls display timer becomes “0”. The number indicator 40 blinks the number of balls held.

On the other hand, if it progresses to step S525, it will determine whether it is during a break, and if it is during a break, it will progress to step S534, and if it is not during a break, it will progress to step S526. The determination as to whether or not there is a break may be performed in the same manner as in step S391 in the checkout start monitoring process of FIG.
In step S534, break display data for displaying that the player is on the ball with the number-of-balls indicator 40 is set, and the process returns.

  In step S526, it is determined whether a game is in progress (the player is seated). If the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S535, and if not in the game, the process proceeds to step S527. Whether or not a game is in progress is determined by determining that the game is in progress if a game card is inserted in the card unit 200, and determining that the game is not in progress if not inserted.

In step S535, the number-of-balls display data setting process is performed, and then the process returns. This is a process for displaying the number of balls held on the ball number display 40 and will be described below.
In step S527, demonstration display data for performing demonstration display is set on the number-of-balls display 40, and the process returns.

  According to this routine, the number of balls held is basically displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 during the game, but when a card unit non-connection error or an encapsulated system switch error occurs, an error display indicating that is displayed. A display indicating that the payment is being performed during the checkout, and a display indicating that the break is being performed during the break are executed on the holding ball number display 40, respectively. And when it is not in any of these states, demo display is executed on the number-of-balls display 40. In the present embodiment, the data setting processing for the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is collectively processed in this routine for all displays other than the number-of-balls display. For this reason, there exists an effect which can simplify a process and can reduce cost.

Next, the number-of-balls display data setting process in step S535 of the number-of-balls display editing process (FIG. 107) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, if the number-of-balls display update timer is not “0” in step S561, the timer is updated (decrement) by “−1”, and in step S562, the number-of-balls display update timer is “ Whether or not “0” is determined. This is because the ball count display update timer is set to an initial value (for example, 300 ms) in step S567, which will be described later, and "-1" is updated (decremented) from the initial value, and the timer is set to "0". It is determined whether or not.

  If the decision result in the step S562 is YES, the process advances to a succeeding step S563 to judge whether or not the number-of-ball display lead counter is equal to the number-of-ball display light counter. This is to determine whether or not the current number of balls has been read from the number-of-balls display number storage area in which the number of balls is stored. If the determination result in step S563 is NO, it is determined that the number of balls held display read counter is not equal to the number of balls held display light counter, and the current number of balls held has not been read out from the number of balls held display number storage area. The process proceeds to step S564.

  Next, in step S564, the number-of-balls display read counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step S565, the current number of updates is updated from the display updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the number-of-balls display lead counter. Load it. Next, in step S566, the number of updated balls loaded in step S565 is added to the number of holding balls for display to be updated to the current number of holding balls for display. That is, “the number of holding balls for display + the number of updates” is updated to the number of holding balls for display this time.

Next, in step S567, the initial value (for example, 300 ms) of the number-of-balls display update timer is saved in the number-of-balls display update timer area. For example, 300 ms is set as the initial value here.
Here, the initial value = 300 m corresponds to an interval for updating the number of balls (an interval of a predetermined period (0.3 seconds)) when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls held by the player.

  This is because the RAM 83 as an internal memory stores the change in the number of balls held by the player, and subtracts the fired ball, adds the number of prize balls, and repeats the addition of the foul ball. The number of balls possessed is updated and stored in real time. On the other hand, the update of the number of balls in the possession number display 40 is updated by the RAM 83 and stored in real time. This is because, unlike the process, control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).

  That is, the payout control device 80 subtracts the number of balls fired from the number of balls held, adds the number of prize balls, and adds a foul ball by processing based on the game program, so that the RAM 83 has a real number of balls held in real time. However, when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls held by the player, the number of balls held is updated by the RAM 83 in real time. Unlike storing, control is performed so that the number of balls held is updated and displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).

Next, the process proceeds to step S568, and display data corresponding to the number of holding balls updated in step S566 is set.
Subsequently, in step S569, the LED display data corresponding to the number of balls for display set in step S568 is saved in the number-of-balls output data area, and then the process returns.
Thereby, the current number of balls (the number of updated balls) is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40.

  On the other hand, if the number-of-balls display update timer is not “0” in step S562, the process jumps to step S568, sequentially executes steps S568 and S569, and returns. Therefore, at this time, the display of the previous number of balls is continued by the number-of-balls display 40.

Returning to step S563, if the determination result in step S563 is YES, the number-of-balls display read counter is equal to the number-of-balls display light counter, and the current number of balls is read from the number-of-balls display number storage area. It is determined that the process has been completed, and the process branches to step S570. In step S570, the current number of possessed balls is updated to the number of possessed balls for display. Then, the process proceeds to step S567, and the processes after step S567 are executed.
In addition, when performing the process of step S570, in order to prevent the display data regarding the number of possessed balls from being shifted from the internal data, when there is no data to be added (the number of retained balls data to be added), it is periodically performed. The process to match the number of balls held inside.

Next, a modified example of the enclosed ball number monitoring process (FIG. 34) by the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
In this modified example, the processes of steps S261 to S263b of the enclosed ball number monitoring process (FIG. 34) described above are omitted.

  That is, when this routine is started, it is first determined in step S2611 whether or not there is a request for confirming the number of encapsulated balls (that is, whether or not the encapsulated ball number confirmation request flag is set). If not, the process from step S2612 is skipped (that is, not executed) and the process returns.

  In step S2612, the enclosed ball number confirmation request flag is cleared, and then in step S2613, it is determined whether or not the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 that detects the minimum number of enclosed balls is turned on. If it is on, the process advances to step S2614. If it is not on, the process advances to step S2618. In addition, when the 1st enclosure bulb | ball detection switch 164 is OFF, you may determine with an error, without checking the 2nd enclosure bulb | ball detection switch 165 of the following description.

  Then, in step S2614, it is determined whether or not the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 that detects the maximum number of enclosed balls is turned on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2615. If it is not on, the process proceeds to step S2617. When the process proceeds to step S2615, both the switches 164 and 165 are both on and an encapsulated ball number excess error flag is set, so an encapsulated ball number excess error flag is set. It transmits to the game control apparatus 54, and returns after that.

  If the process proceeds to step S2617, the number of encapsulated spheres is in a normal range (that is, an appropriate amount). The shortage error flag and the enclosed path error error flag) are cleared, and then the process returns. That is, if the first encapsulated ball detection switch 164 is detected to be on and the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 is off, it is determined as an appropriate amount, and the first encapsulated ball detection switch 164 that detects the minimum number of encapsulated balls is detected. Can be an appropriate amount detection switch for detecting an appropriate amount of enclosed balls.

  On the other hand, if it progresses to step S2618, it will be determined whether the 2nd enclosure bulb | ball detection switch 165 is ON, and if it is ON, it will progress to step S2619, and if it is not ON, it will progress to step S2621. If the process proceeds to step S2619, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 is on even though the first encapsulated ball detection switch 164 is not turned on. For example, a clogged ball is generated in the sensor flow path 77 described above. Therefore, the enclosure path abnormality error flag is set.

Then, in the next step S2620, an enclosed path abnormality error command is transmitted to the game control device 54, and then the process returns.
If the process proceeds to step S2621, the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient (that is, less than the minimum), so an encapsulated ball number insufficient error flag is set, and in the next step S2622, an encapsulated ball number insufficient error command is set. 54. Further, in step S623, an encapsulated ball number shortage error command is transmitted to the card unit 200, and then the process returns. Note that the payout control device 80 may perform some notification.

  It should be noted that neither the monitoring with the number of board balls or the monitoring with the number of encapsulated balls, which will be described below, does not determine that it is completely illegal at one time, and it seems that fraud continues to occur a predetermined number of times. For example, there may be suspicion of fraud. This is because, if the specified number for determining the number of board ball errors of the monitored gaming machine is set to a small number, it is unavoidable that the player may feel uncomfortable if it is unavoidably improper even if it is just clogged. This is to prevent unexpected situations.

Next, a modified example of the above-described board ball number error monitoring process (FIGS. 35 and 36) by the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG.
In this modification, the number of surface balls to be checked by error monitoring is set to only one specified number.

  When this routine is started, it is first determined in step S281 whether or not the value of the ball polishing motor operation timer (that is, the remaining time until the ball polishing motor operation timer expires) is not zero. If the ball polishing motor operation timer has not timed up, the process returns. If it is zero (that is, if the ball polishing motor operation timer has timed out), the process proceeds to step S282.

  If it progresses to step S282, it will be determined whether the number of surface balls is more than a regulation number, if it is more than a regulation number, it will progress to step S283, and if it is not more than a regulation number, it will progress to step S286. Here, the specified number is a value of 1 or more, for example, ten. This is because, when there are generally ten or more board balls, there is a game problem and the flow of game balls is considered to be stagnant to some extent. The prescribed number is not limited to 10, and the optimum value varies depending on the gaming machine 10 and the gaming state.

  In step S283, the board ball number error flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S284. In step S284, it is determined whether the board ball number error flag is the same as that in the previous process. If it is the same as in the previous process (that is, it has already been set in the sequence before the previous time and before it is set in the previous step S283). If it has already been set in step S 285, the process returns to step S 285, and if it is not the same as in the previous process (that is, if it was set from the state cleared in the previous step S 283), the process proceeds to step S 285.

  Then, in step S285, a board surface ball number error command is transmitted to the game control device 54, and then the process returns. Here, step S284 is provided in order to execute step S285 unnecessarily and not to repeatedly transmit the board ball number error command.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S286, the board ball number error flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S287. In step S287, it is determined whether or not the board ball number error flag is the same as in the previous process, and if it is the same as in the previous process (that is, it has already been cleared in the sequence before the previous time and before it is cleared in the previous step S286). If it has already been cleared, the process returns to step S288, and if it is not the same as the previous process (that is, if it has been cleared from the state set in the previous step S286), the process proceeds to step S288.

In step S288, a board surface ball number error cancel command is transmitted to the game control device 54, and then the process returns. Here, step S287 is provided in order to execute step S288 unnecessarily and not to repeatedly transmit the board ball number error cancel command.
The presentation control device 53 that has received the board surface ball number error command from the game control device 54 executes, for example, an error notification “a board surface ball number error has occurred” on the display device 35, the speakers 16a, b, etc. The effect control device 53 that has received the ball number error cancel command is configured to cancel this error notification.

  According to this routine, if the number of board balls is abnormally increased due to ball clogging or the like in the game area 22 or the like, the determination result in step S282 becomes affirmative, and the board ball number error flag is set in step S283 and the board ball A number error occurs. If the ball clogging is resolved and the board ball number returns to normal, the judgment result in step S282 becomes negative, and the board ball number error flag is cleared in step S286, and the board ball number error detection state is set. Canceled. However, due to the presence of step S281, step S282 and subsequent steps are not executed during the above-described ball polishing operation time, and the determination of the board surface ball number error (step S282) is also performed by setting an error flag based on the determination result (step S283). ) Is not executed.

  Note that even if an error occurs in the number of balls on the board, it is not impossible to fire the game ball by itself (FIG. 38 described above). As a result, it is not possible to launch a game ball (that is, a game) due to a simple ball clogging or the like in the game area 22 (when the number of encapsulated balls is normal), thereby avoiding problems such as the player feeling dissatisfied. However, when another error that should not continue the game (for example, an error of insufficient number of encapsulated balls) is generated along with the board ball number error, the game ball cannot be fired (see FIG. 38 described above).

Next, a circulation device 550 (a modification of the circulation device 55 shown in FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG.
In the present circulation device 550, the structures of the portions corresponding to the game ball inlet 71 and the polishing feed flow path 72 of the circulation device 55 are different. In the circulation device 550, parts that are the same type as the circulation device 55 are given the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 111, a game ball inlet 710 corresponding to the game ball inlet 71 is open so as to communicate with the upstream side of the sensor flow channel 77, that is, the side close to the upper outlet 76 of the polishing apparatus 56. The out ball (including the safe ball) and the foul ball guided to the game ball inlet 710 flow down the sensor channel 77 as they are, and then are sent to the ball feeder 79 through the ball feed channel 78.

  A drop port 78a that opens downward is opened at a position before the ball feed device 79 on the downstream side of the ball feed channel 78, and a switching valve 78b that can open and close the drop port 78a is provided. An upstream end of a polishing feed flow path 720 corresponding to the polishing feed flow path 72 communicates with the drop opening 78a with a switching valve 78b interposed therebetween. The polishing feed flow path 720 is inclined downward while the polishing apparatus 56 It extends to the lower inlet 75.

  In such a circulation device 550, the switching valve 78b allows the collected game ball to flow into the launching device 60 (shown in FIG. 3) via the ball feeding device 79 (closed state closing the drop port 78a). And a switching means that can be switched between a state of flowing into the polishing apparatus 56 via the polishing feed flow path 720 (an open state in which the drop port 78a is opened). That is, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), when the switching valve 78b is in a closed state in which the drop port 78a is closed, the game ball is allowed to flow into the launching device 60 through the ball feeding device 79.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), when the switching valve 78b is in the open state in which the drop port 78a is opened, the game ball is allowed to flow into the polishing device 56 through the polishing feed flow path 720.
The switching state (open / closed state) of the switching valve 78b is controlled by switching control means that is one of the functions of the payout control device 80.

  Specifically, for example, with respect to the gaming machine 10 that is a result of the opening of the frame information indicating that the frame opening information is open under the control of the switching control means, the switching valve 78b is closed to allow the game ball to flow into the launching device 60 (FIG. 111). (A)) On the other hand, for the gaming machine 10 which is a result indicating that the frame opening information is not open, the switching valve 78b is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the polishing device 56 (FIG. 111 ( Switch to b)).

  Note that for the gaming machine 10 in which the frame opening information indicates that there is an opening, the switching valve 78b is switched to a closed state (FIG. 111 (a)) in which a game ball flows into the launching device 60, and at a predetermined time. The aim is to detect fraud before opening a store by playing a game by launching it across the board and deliberately generating fraud. In addition, for such games related to the occurrence of fraud, employees do not perform firing operations one by one, but during this period, for example, if many gaming machines 10 have been cheated by using the automatic launch function Even so, fraud can be efficiently generated all at once without spending a long time and many employees before opening the store to perform a launch operation for fraud.

  In addition, for the gaming machine 10 which is a result indicating that the frame opening information is not open, the switching valve 78b is switched to an open state (FIG. 111 (b)) in which a game ball flows into the polishing device 56. Polish the enclosed game ball. By doing so, it is possible to polish the game ball by effectively using the time during which the launch operation for fraud occurs. In addition, since there are usually many cases where there is no fraud, polishing the game balls for a predetermined time before opening the store each time will start the game with the game balls polished when the power is turned on. Can do.

  Regarding such switching control of the circulation device 550, polishing is not performed during the game, and polishing may be performed by operating the switching valve 78b when the power is turned on or at a predetermined timing, or always polishing is performed. You may do it. Further, for example, in the power saving mode, the operation display device 30 and the display device 35, their various lamps, etc. are turned off, and during this time, the setting of the game ball to be polished by switching control of the circulation device 550, You may set so that a game ball may be grind | polished by switching control of the circulation apparatus 550 after predetermined time progress.

  In addition, for the gaming machine 10 that has a high occupancy rate and does not enter a customer waiting state (or a predetermined time does not elapse because a new player plays a game immediately after entering a customer waiting state), for example, a stock ball is prepared. It is also conceivable to set so as to be polished, or a game ball to be used for a game is made to flow into the polishing apparatus 56 side at a predetermined timing and polished gradually. The same applies to the gaming machine 10 that is fraudulent and cannot be polished when the power is turned on.

Next, a modification of the circulation device 55 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG.
The circulation devices 55a and 55b shown in FIG. 112 are added with a structure that does not accept unauthorized gaming balls, and the basic configuration is common to the circulation device 55 shown in FIG. In addition, about the site | part same as the said circulation apparatus 55, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, the game sphere is a sphere made of a non-magnetic material, and the normal size is set, for example, to a diameter of about 11.0 mm. In contrast to such a regular game ball (hereinafter referred to as a regular sphere), there is a non-regular game ball (hereinafter referred to as a small diameter sphere) whose diameter is slightly smaller, and the glass frame 13 and the like are illegally opened and closed. There was a risk of being sealed in the machine. The circulation devices 55a and 55b are provided with communicating portions 57a and 57b at different locations as a structure for not accepting such small-diameter spheres from collection to launch.

  In the circulation device 55 a shown in FIG. 112A, a communication portion 57 a is provided between the upper outlet 76 of the polishing device 56 and the upstream end of the sensor flow channel 77. As shown in the partially enlarged view in FIG. 112 (a), the communication portion 57a is configured to have a gap that can pass without falling with a regular sphere but cannot pass with a small sphere. Has been. The width of the gap may be arbitrarily set depending on the size of the pair of protrusions 570 protruding from both walls. If it is a regular sphere, it crosses the communication part 57a while being supported by the pair of protrusions 570. However, in the case of a small-diameter sphere, it does not get caught by the protrusions 570 and falls down. In addition, it is preferable that the small-diameter sphere dropped from the communication portion 57a is stored in an illegal sphere standby position provided on the side of the polishing device 56.

In the circulation device 55 b shown in FIG. 112 (b), a communication portion 57 b is provided between the downstream end of the polishing feed flow path 72 and the lower inlet 75 of the polishing device 56. The communication portion 57b has the same configuration as the communication portion 57a, but the small-diameter sphere that has dropped from the communication portion 57b prevents the subsequent regular sphere from flowing into the polishing device 56. Thus, since the small sphere falling from the communication portion 57b prevents the game ball from being polished or lifted by the polishing device 56, the game ball cannot be finally fired.
The locations where the communication portions 57a and 57b are provided are not limited to the illustrated locations, and may be provided at any location on the path from the game ball entrance 71 to the ball feeding device 79.

Next, a card reception process related to the card reception process (FIG. 61) of the card unit 200 described above will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG.
This routine is executed at the timing when a player inserts a game card, inserts cash, or performs a lending operation after inserting a card or inserting cash to start a game. It is good to make it.

  For example, in the main process (FIG. 57) of the card unit 200 described above, when the acceptance of a game card is confirmed in the first step S622, this routine may be additionally executed before the card acceptance process in step S631. . In addition, when a lending operation is performed in step S623, this routine may be additionally executed before the lending process in step S632. Furthermore, when cash is received in step S624, this routine may be additionally executed before the issue / payment process in step S633.

  As described above, this routine performs face authentication at the timing when the game is started by the player, such as insertion of a game card (member card, visitor card, etc.) into the card unit 200 or insertion of cash. For example, whether or not a player's face imaged by a camera provided in the card unit 200 is transmitted to the hall computer 150 together with the machine number of the gaming machine 10 corresponding to the card unit 200, and the game can be started based on this information. To decide.

  When this routine is started, first, in step S 6371, a face of a player who starts a game is photographed on the gaming machine 10. In step S 6372, the player's face image associated with the gaming machine 10 (the machine number) is recorded as player information, and in step S 6373, the player information is transmitted to the hall computer 150 (game). If the person is a member, member information (personal information) specified by the member card is also transmitted).

  Then, it progresses to step S6374 and it is determined whether the authentication result from the hall computer 150 (high-order server) was received. Here, in the hall computer 150 that has received the player information, a player corresponding to the transmitted player information has performed an illegal act in the past based on information on a nighttime frame opening information page, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the possibility is considered, and the authentication result is transmitted to the corresponding gaming machine 10.

  If the authentication result is received (YES in step S6374), the flow advances to next step S6375 to determine whether the authentication result is OK. On the other hand, if the authentication result is not received (NO in step S6374), the process is repeated until the authentication result is received, and a standby state is entered. Next, if the authentication result is OK in the determination of step S6375, the process proceeds to step S6378, and after executing card acceptance processing (each processing when each processing described above is a trigger), the process returns to prepare for the start of the game. .

  If the authentication result information is not transmitted from the hall computer 150 for a predetermined time, it may be transmitted again. At this time, control that cannot start the game as a player error, (However, if notification is made with a single transmission error, it may be possible to notify a player unrelated to fraud, so it is desirable to perform retransmission.) ).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6375 that the authentication result is NG, the process proceeds to step S6376 to set notification that the authentication result is NG. In the subsequent step S6377, after transmitting the information that the authentication result is NG to the gaming machine 10, the present process is terminated and the process returns without proceeding to the card accepting process in step S6378 described above.

  In this way, when a player tries to start a game on the gaming machine 10, the player's face is imaged, and based on the information, the game can be started by the hall computer 150 (conventional fraud) Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized gaming in a gaming machine that may have been cheating.

  Next, FIG. 114 shows a display example of data related to the frame opening information on the display display 151 of the hall computer 150 that has received the player information including the face image of the player associated with the gaming machine 10. In this display example, a face image is used as authentication information in addition to each item such as whether or not the night frame is opened, that is, whether or not the inner frame 12 or the glass frame 13 is opened or closed, as the night frame opening information page in association with the date or the serial number Is set to be displayed.

  In addition, as information attached to the face image, * 1 item displays the number of times the night frame is opened for the imaged player, and * 2 item also displays the number of frauds among the above * 1 etc. Good. The data related to the frame opening information is recorded for a plurality of days, and the fraudulent information is transmitted to related stores such as other amusement stores having a chain relationship to share the information. It is good to set as follows.

  In addition, since the person who opens the inner frame 12 at night and mixes illegal balls does not always match the person who actually performs illegal games, the inner frame 12 can be used at night by using the face authentication system described above. It is preferable to record a player who frequently plays a game on the gaming machine 10 that has been released, and also record the occurrence rate of grapes when the player plays a game on the gaming machine 10. By doing so, it becomes possible to centrally monitor a player who has a high possibility of fraud (or may be done in the future) with a surveillance camera, etc., so expect more fraud prevention Can do

According to the present embodiment described above (including modifications), the following effects are obtained.
It is possible to detect that the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 have been opened and closed even when the power is shut off at night, etc., and it is possible to hold the frame opening information that has detected these opening and closing even when the power is shut off. Further, the frame opening information can be surely captured and transmitted. As a result, the functions of the glass frame opening switch 125 and the inner frame opening switch 126 can be fully exhibited, and security can be improved.

  More specifically, even when the power is turned off at night, information about the opening of the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 can be detected and stored. At the start (when the power is turned on or when the store is opened), the user can be surely grasped and notified, so that the game is not started with fraud.

  In addition, when the opening of the glass frame 13 is detected, there is a possibility that not only fraud to the board of the game control device 54 etc. but also fraud such as nail bending in the game area 22 may have been performed. It can be grasped and notified, and the game can be prevented from being started while fraudulent to the gaming machine 10 is performed by confirmation of an employee of the game shop, etc., and the fairness of the game can be impaired. Absent. Furthermore, it is possible to grasp and notify that there is a possibility that fraud has been performed even in a game store whose power is not turned off when the store is closed.

  In addition, since the result of the legitimacy determination by the hall computer 150 and the frame opening information are controlled (transmitted) independently, for example, since the legitimacy determination is OK, it is determined that fraud has not been performed and the frame is released. By not transmitting the information, it is possible to prevent omission of confirmation such that the hanging board cannot be found. Here, the hanging board is a board that is illegally attached between the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 and illegally pays out a prize ball.

  Furthermore, if the glass frame 13 or the like is opened at night, and a non-magnetic material game ball that does not react with a magnet is replaced with a magnetic material game ball that reacts with a magnet, there is a possibility of some fraud. It becomes possible to monitor the gaming machine 10 (having a frame open at night) as a monitoring target gaming machine, and the game can be started without checking all the gaming machines 10 every time.

  Regarding the gaming machine 10 that was open at night, an employee of a gaming store opened the glass frame 13 and the like at power-on to check for fraud, but even if the fraud could not be found visually, After setting as a game machine to be monitored, a predetermined ball number error from the start of the game, that is, an error in the above-mentioned enclosed ball number monitoring process (FIG. 34) or board surface ball number error monitoring process (FIGS. 35 and 36) occurs. Can be set to a short time (the prescribed number of fraud determinations is set to be small in the monitored gaming machine), leading to early detection of fraud.

  Here, the case where fraud cannot be detected visually corresponds to replacing a non-magnetic game ball that does not react with a magnet with a magnetic material game ball that reacts with a magnet. That is, there is a willingness to do fraud. As described above, fraud using the magnet can be detected at an early stage by setting a small prescribed number for determining a predetermined ball number error from the start of the game.

Next, the background of the above-described effect will be described below.
Since no employees are present at night at the game store with the power off, the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 of the gaming machine 10 are illegally opened to replace the board of the game control device 54 or the like, or the game control There is a great possibility that fraud such as attachment of a fraudulent board such as the hanging board is performed between the device 54 and the dispensing control device 80.
There is also a great possibility that fraud such as nail bending in the gaming area 22 is performed by opening the glass frame 13 of the gaming machine 10.

  By the way, it is conceivable that the power will not be turned off for crime prevention even after the game store is closed, but in that case, there is not much meaning just by sending a notification in the game store, even if information on fraud is sent to the outside, Since the power supply of the management device (such as the hall computer 150) on the receiving side is normally turned off, there is no way to store information on the fraud. Therefore, there is a risk of fraud and all-you-can-eat, especially at night game stores.

  In addition, even when a game ball made of a non-magnetic material such as stainless steel is enclosed and played, the glass frame 13 or the like is illegally opened, and the game ball made of a non-magnetic material is pulled out and reacts to the magnet. If it is replaced with a game ball made of magnetic material, fraud will be done if the game is started without being found.

Furthermore, such fraud is difficult to detect visually even when the glass frame 13 is opened, and cannot be reliably detected before the game is started. If the inspection is performed so as to be surely detected, every time when the power is turned on, a magnet is brought close to all the gaming machines 10 to check whether the game ball reacts, or the game is unavoidably started and a malfunction occurs. I had no choice but to wait.
The present embodiment can solve such problems.

The following inventive concept is derived from the configuration of the above-described embodiment (including modifications).
[1] A plurality of gaming machines installed in a game store, a plurality of terminals installed corresponding to each gaming machine, and capable of communicating with each corresponding gaming machine, and communicating with each terminal machine A management system that can be installed in a game store and manages various information of the game store,
The gaming machine includes an open / close member attached to the machine frame so as to be openable / closable, an open / close monitoring unit that monitors an open / closed state of the open / close member, and a monitoring result of the open / close monitoring unit for the terminal and the management device. Including a monitoring result transmission means capable of being transmitted to the outside,
The open / close monitoring means can monitor the open / closed state of the open / close member regardless of the presence or absence of power supply that can be played in the gaming machine,
A monitoring object setting unit capable of setting a gaming machine whose monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring unit is a result indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed as a monitoring target gaming machine based on a predetermined condition. Game system.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 that is a result indicating that the inner frame 12 or the glass frame 13 as the opening / closing member has been opened / closed is likely to have been fraudulent. By setting as “gaming machine”, it is possible to enhance the monitoring of the monitored gaming machine.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[2] The above-mentioned [1], characterized in that it has notification means capable of performing predetermined notification when the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means is a result indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed. ] The game system described in the above.

  Here, the “predetermined notification” is not only a notification of a result indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed, but also a confirmation of whether or not a predetermined condition for setting the monitored gaming machine is satisfied. Such notification may be used. By such notification, the game shop employee heads to the gaming machine 10 in which the glass frame 13 or the like has been opened and closed before starting business, and the game is applied in a state where a magnet is applied to the launching position of the gaming ball of the gaming machine 10. If the ball is fired, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a game ball that reacts to the magnet, so that fraud can be prevented in advance.

  In addition, even in the gaming machine 10 in which the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 are opened and closed, if fraud cannot be easily found, no visible fraud is performed as in [3] below. May be set for the monitored game machine. In addition, for the gaming machine 10 set as the monitoring target gaming machine, for example, a measure such as centralized monitoring with a related camera is possible.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[3] The gaming system according to [1] or [2], wherein the predetermined condition is that no visible fraud is performed in the gaming machine.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[4] The terminal includes storage means capable of storing various information,
[1], [2] or [2], wherein the storage means can store at least the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means and information on fraud when the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means is received. 3].

Furthermore, an inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[5] The gaming machine can play a game by repeatedly using a predetermined number of game media enclosed in the gaming machine,
Fraud determination means capable of determining the presence or absence of fraud in the gaming machine based on the number of gaming media existing in the gaming machine or in the specific area;
Setting means capable of arbitrarily setting a prescribed number of game media as a determination criterion for the presence or absence of fraud,
[1], [2], [3] or [3], wherein the setting means is capable of setting the specified number related to the monitored gaming machine to a value different from gaming machines other than the monitored gaming machine. The gaming system according to [4].

  The excess or deficiency of game balls is managed by the enclosing ball number monitoring process of FIG. 34 and FIG. 109 and the board ball number error monitoring process of FIG. 35, FIG. 36, and FIG. Since there is a high possibility that a ball cue has occurred somewhere in the gaming area 22, etc., the above-mentioned error notification may cause an illegal situation in which an employee faces the monitored gaming machine and is in a ball clogging state. The game balls can be removed and regular game balls can be inserted.

Next, another next inventive concept is derived from the configuration of the above-described embodiment (including the modification).
[11] A plurality of gaming machines installed in the game store, a plurality of terminals installed corresponding to each gaming machine, and capable of communicating with each corresponding gaming machine, and communicating with each terminal machine A management system that can be installed in a game store and manages various information of the game store,
The gaming machine includes an opening / closing member attached to the machine frame so as to be openable / closable, an opening / closing monitoring means for monitoring an opening / closing state of the opening / closing member, and a monitoring result transmission capable of transmitting the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means to the outside. Means, and
The open / close monitoring means can monitor the open / closed state of the open / close member regardless of the presence or absence of power supply that can be played in the gaming machine,
The correspondence relationship between the gaming machine and the terminal installed corresponding to the gaming machine is managed in the management device,
When a game is started in the gaming machine, information related to the correspondence at the start of the game is transmitted to the management device by the terminal.
The management device performs a legitimacy determination as to whether or not the correspondence between the gaming machine and the terminal is valid based on the information related to the correspondence transmitted from the terminal, The determination result is configured to be transmitted to the terminal,
The monitoring result transmission means includes
A gaming system characterized in that the monitoring result by the open / close monitoring means can be transmitted to the terminal regardless of the determination result of the validity determination by the management device.

Here, “at the start of the game”, which is a condition for transmitting information related to the correspondence between the card unit 200 (terminal) and the corresponding gaming machine 10 by the card unit 200 (terminal), is only when the power is turned on. In addition, this includes the time when a game is started in a game store that is opened as it is without being turned off when the store is closed. Note that the information on the correspondence relationship is information at the start of the game.
Furthermore, “when power is turned on” is not limited to when power is supplied to both the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200 (terminal machine), but may be when power is supplied to only one of them. This is in consideration of a case in which a game is started after one of the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200 (terminal) has failed and replaced.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[12] If the monitoring result transmission means cannot transmit the monitoring result by the open / close monitoring means to the terminal within a predetermined time, it notifies that the transmission has not been performed. The game system according to [11].

Furthermore, an inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[13] The management device includes:
[11] The information on the correspondence can be transmitted to an external third party when the correspondence is determined not to be valid in the validity determination. Or the game system as described in [12].

Next, another next inventive concept is derived from the configuration of the above-described embodiment (including the modification).
[21] A plurality of gaming machines installed in the game store, a plurality of terminals installed corresponding to each gaming machine, and capable of communicating with each corresponding gaming machine, and communicating with each terminal machine A management system that can be installed in a game store and manages various information of the game store,
The gaming machine includes an opening / closing member attached to the machine frame so as to be openable / closable, an opening / closing monitoring means for monitoring an opening / closing state of the opening / closing member, and a monitoring result transmission capable of transmitting the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means to the outside. Means, and
The open / close monitoring means can monitor the open / closed state of the open / close member regardless of the presence or absence of power supply that can be played in the gaming machine,
The correspondence relationship between the gaming machine and the terminal installed corresponding to the gaming machine is managed in the management device,
When a game is started in the gaming machine, information related to the correspondence at the start of the game is transmitted to the management device by the terminal.
The management device performs a legitimacy determination as to whether or not the correspondence between the gaming machine and the terminal is valid based on the information related to the correspondence transmitted from the terminal, The determination result is configured to be transmitted to the terminal,
When the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means is a result indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed, it is possible to notify that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed regardless of the determination result of the validity determination. A gaming system characterized by comprising an informing means.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[22] The notification means includes:
When the notification is performed because the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means is a result indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed, the notification is performed until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming system according to [21], which is configured as described above.
Here, the “predetermined condition” refers to, for example, when the employee confirms the opening of a new frame, when the employee operates the RAM clear switch 182, or when a predetermined time elapses, For example, when a predetermined command is received from 200, it is determined by whether or not the fraud notification end condition is satisfied as described above.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[23] A second notification capable of notifying the fact that the monitoring result was not transmitted by the monitoring result transmitting unit when the monitoring result by the opening / closing monitoring unit could not be transmitted to the terminal within a predetermined time. The game system according to [21] or [22], further comprising means.
Here, the “second notification means” may be any other notification means different from the notification means, for example, the display operation device 30 other than the display device 35 determined as the notification means.

Furthermore, an inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[24] The management device includes:
[21] The information on the correspondence can be transmitted to an external third party when the correspondence is determined not to be valid in the validity determination. , [22] or [23].

Next, another next inventive concept is derived from the configuration of the above-described embodiment (including modifications).
[31] A plurality of gaming machines installed in a gaming store, a plurality of terminals installed corresponding to each gaming machine, and capable of communicating with each corresponding gaming machine, and communicating with each terminal machine A management system that can be installed in a game store and manages various information of the game store,
The gaming machine includes an opening / closing member attached to the machine frame so as to be openable / closable, an opening / closing monitoring means for monitoring an opening / closing state of the opening / closing member, and a monitoring result transmission capable of transmitting the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means to the outside. Means, and
The open / close monitoring means can monitor the open / closed state of the open / close member regardless of the presence or absence of power supply that can be played in the gaming machine,
The correspondence relationship between the gaming machine and the terminal installed corresponding to the gaming machine is managed in the management device,
When power is supplied to the gaming machine and the terminal, information related to the correspondence relationship when the power is turned on is transmitted to the management device by the terminal,
The management device performs a legitimacy determination as to whether or not the correspondence between the gaming machine and the terminal is valid based on the information related to the correspondence transmitted from the terminal, The determination result is configured to be transmitted to the terminal,
The monitoring result transmission means includes
Regardless of the judgment result of the legitimacy judgment by the management device, the monitoring result by the open / close monitoring means can be transmitted to the terminal,
The terminal is
Regardless of whether or not the management device has received a correctness determination (whether or not it has been received), the monitoring result transmitted by the monitoring result transmitting means is received, and the received monitoring result is sent to the management device. A gaming system characterized by being capable of transmission.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[32] When the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means is a result indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed, the opening / closing member has been opened / closed regardless of the determination result of the validity determination. The game system according to [31], wherein the game system is notified.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[33] When the monitoring result transmission means cannot transmit the monitoring result by the open / close monitoring means to the terminal within a predetermined time, it notifies that the transmission has not been performed. The game system according to [31] or [32].

Furthermore, an inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[34] The management device includes:
In the validity determination at power-on, when it is determined that the correspondence relationship is not valid, it is possible to transmit information on the correspondence relationship to an external third party. [31] The game system according to [32] or [33].

Next, another embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 115 to 120.
The present embodiment is a gaming system 1 including the unit stocker 230 shown in FIG. 5B, and the card unit 200 verifies the validity of the card unit 200 and the gaming machine 10 when the power is turned on, as in the above-described embodiment. If the collation result is OK, the game can be started. If the collation result is NG, the hall computer 150 makes an inquiry to an external third party, and the card unit 200 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is assumed that the frame opening information from the gaming machine 10 is transmitted via the.

  In the present embodiment, even when the power to the unit stocker 230 is turned on, the verification of the validity of the spare card unit 200 stored in the unit stocker 230 may be performed collectively via the card unit 200 (via the unit stocker 230). ) And the hall computer 150. In the case where the collation result is NG, a duplicate description of the same contents as in the above embodiment, such as a configuration for making an inquiry to an external third party, is omitted.

First, an overall outline of the gaming system 1 including the unit stocker 230 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 115, in the gaming store A, a spare card unit 200 is stored in the unit stocker 230 in addition to the card unit 200 installed for each gaming machine 10, and installed in the gaming machine 10. It is exchanged when the card unit 200 that is being used fails. In the unit stocker 230, each card unit 200 is stored in each installation location in a state where each card unit 200 can be individually identified, and it is set in advance to which installation location in the unit stocker 230 is stored. Being managed.

  That is, when the lower control device 215 in the lower control unit 214 of each card unit 200 stores the card unit 200 in the unit stocker 230, identification for identification such as a stocker address No (number) that identifies each installation location. Register information. Also, in the unit stocker 230, stocker-specific information such as a serial ID that can identify the unit stocker 230 itself from other unit stockers 230 is registered in advance. These pieces of information are managed by the main controller (FIG. 120) in the unit stocker 230, and output to the outside of the hall computer 150 and the like via the external communication controller 231. Each card unit 200 itself may output to the outside.

  In the unit stocker 230, the plurality of stored card units 200 are in a standby state in which each card unit 200 is connected to the hall computer 150 via the external communication control device 231. When the spare card unit 200 in the unit stocker 230 is replaced with a failed card unit 200 and connected to the corresponding gaming machine 10 and restarted, backup or recovery from the gaming machine 10 is performed manually or automatically. Communication for correcting data such as the number of game balls of the player based on such data is performed.

  If the failed card unit 200 is still communicable, the card unit 200 is returned to the unit stocker 230, and the number of game balls and the card ID of the game card are received from the unit stocker 230 together with stocker specific information such as a serial ID. Data such as the number of game balls transmitted to the hall computer 150 and corrected by the new card unit 200 connected to the gaming machine 10 based on the recovery data from the gaming machine 10 is transmitted to the hall computer 150. Then, it may be controlled to check whether or not the two data such as the number of game balls are matched.

In FIG. 115, an example in which there is one amusement store A is shown, but a system may be constructed so as to include two or three or more amusement stores. In the game store A, only one set of unit stockers 230 is shown, but two or more sets may be installed. Further, although only two sets of the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200 are illustrated, in practice, a large number of sets are generally installed. Further, the system configuration is not limited to this mode, and for example, there may be a mode in which a card management device or a ball management device is installed in the game store A.
Further, the same parts as those in FIG. 6 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description is omitted.

Next, a schematic flow of the operation of the gaming system 1 according to another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
Here, FIG. 116 shows the control operation in the installation stage of the unit stocker 230, FIG. 117 shows the control operation in the replacement stage of the unit stocker 230, and FIG. 118 shows the control operation in the replacement stage of the unit stocker 230.

  First, the control operation at the installation stage of the unit stocker 230 will be described with reference to FIG. 116, the verification operation of the card unit 200 at the installation stage is the same as that in the case of the card unit 200 installed corresponding to each gaming machine 10 described above (FIG. 9), and will not be described. Even in the operation stage, if the hall computer 150 has unit information, there is no problem, so the same applies.

In FIG. 116, when the card unit 200 shipped to the amusement store A is stored in the unit stocker 230, the lower control device 215 registers a stocker address No (number) for specifying the installation location of each card unit 200. (Step A141).
Further, after the above-described collating operation of the card unit 200 installed corresponding to each not-shown gaming machine 10 is completed (steps A21 to A28 in FIG. 9), the legitimate card unit 200 that should exist in the gaming store A. In this case, after registering the actual management information of the card unit 200 (step A142), the hall computer 150 transmits the registered actual management information to the main control device 221 of the card unit 200.

  Then, when the main control device 221 receives the actual management information from the hall computer 150, the main control device 221 performs an internal mutual matching process for collating temporary management information already registered with the communication control device 222 (step A143). Thereafter, the communication control device 222 requests the lower control device 215 to transmit the stocker specific information and the stocker address No (specific identification information). Upon receiving this transmission request, the lower control device 215 transmits the stocker specific information and the like to the communication control device 222.

Then, when receiving the stocker specific information transmitted from the lower control device 215, the communication control device 222 registers such information as management information in its own storage area (step A144). Further, the communication control device 222 transmits management information registered in itself to the main control device 221.
Next, the main control device 221 generates information associated with the actual management information stored in the management information such as the stocker specific information received from the communication control device 222 (step A145). Corresponding management information is newly registered in its own storage area (step A146). Further, main controller 221 transmits the registered association management information to hall computer 150.

  When the hall computer 150 receives the association management information transmitted from the main controller 221, it searches for whether or not the association management information is already registered in its own storage area (step A147). If the association management information described above is already registered in the hall computer 150 (YES in step A148), the collation work relating to the unit stocker 230 is completed and the operation stage processing described above is executed. (Step A149). However, since the unit stocker 230 is installed for the first time in the game store A in the installation stage, the association management information described above is not yet registered in the hall computer 150. Therefore, normally, the correspondence management information described above is not yet registered in the hall computer 150 (NO in step A148), and this correspondence management information is sent from the hall computer 150 to the gaming system information management company 96. Sent.

  Subsequently, when the gaming system information management company 96 receives the management information transmitted from the hall computer 150, the management management information 96 is collated with the management information registered in its own storage area. Information collation is performed (step A150). Specifically, the management information of the card unit 200 in the corresponding game store registered in the gaming system information management company 96, the unique information of the unit stocker 230 in the corresponding game store, and the stocker set in the unit stocker 230 Based on the address No (identification information for identification) or the like, it is verified whether or not the information of the unit stocker 230 and the card unit 200 that should exist in the corresponding game store is paired. The verification result of the management information verification is transmitted from the gaming system information management company 96 to the hall computer 150 and from the hall computer 150 to the main controller 221.

  Then, the hall computer 150 determines the collation result (step A151), and if all the management information matches each other and the collation result = OK (YES in step A151), the management information is registered in its own storage area. (Step A154). On the other hand, if any one of the collated information does not match as the collation result (NO in step A151), the hall computer 150 deletes the management information (step A152), and then the collation result = The fact that it was NG is notified, for example, by the display display 151 of the hall computer 150 which is a notification means (step A153).

  Also, in main controller 221 that has received the collation result transmitted from hall computer 150, the collation result is determined (step A155), and if collation result = OK (YES in step A155), main controller 221 transmits a request for a communication key used for encrypted communication to the communication control apparatus 222. The communication control device 222 that has received the communication key request from the main control device 221 transmits the management information received from the main control device 221 by encrypted communication to the lower control device 215. Then, the lower control device 215 registers the received management information as actual management information (step A157).

  On the other hand, when the collation result is NG in the main control device 221 described above (NO in step A155), for example, the notification lamp 204 or the unit stocker 230 (not shown) serving as notification means is provided. The error notification LED (provided corresponding to one card unit 200, it may be easy to recognize which card unit 200 has an error, or the notification lamp 204 of the card unit 200 in which an error has occurred. Is lit, an error notification LED provided in the unit stocker 230 may be lit only) (step A156).

Next, the control operation at the replacement stage of the unit stocker 230 will be described with reference to FIG. 117 is omitted because it is similar to the case of the card unit 200 installed corresponding to each gaming machine 10 (FIG. 9).
In FIG. 117, when the card unit 200 exchanged due to a failure or the like is newly stored in the unit stocker 230, the lower control device 215 sets a stocker address No (number) for specifying the installation location of each card unit 200. Registration is performed (step A161).

  Further, after the above-described collating operation of the card unit 200 installed corresponding to each not-shown gaming machine 10 is completed (steps A21 to A28 in FIG. 9), the legitimate card unit 200 that should exist in the gaming store A. In this case, after registering the actual management information of the card unit 200 (step A162), the hall computer 150 transmits the registered actual management information to the main control device 221 of the card unit 200.

  Then, when the main control device 221 receives the actual management information from the hall computer 150, the main control device 221 performs an internal mutual matching process for collating the temporary management information already registered with the communication control device 222 (step A163). Thereafter, the communication control device 222 requests the lower control device 215 to transmit the stocker specific information and the stocker address No (specific identification information). Upon receiving this transmission request, the lower control device 215 transmits the stocker specific information and the like to the communication control device 222.

Then, when receiving the stocker specific information transmitted from the lower control device 215, the communication control device 222 registers such information as management information in its own storage area (step A164). Further, the communication control device 222 transmits management information registered in itself to the main control device 221.
Next, the main control device 221 generates information associated with the actual management information stored in the management information such as the stocker specific information received from the game area 22 (step A165). The attached management information is newly registered in its own storage area (step A166). Further, main controller 221 transmits the registered association management information to hall computer 150.

  When the hall computer 150 receives the management information transmitted (corresponding to) from the main controller 221, the hall computer 150 searches whether the management information is already registered in its own storage area (step A 167). Here, normally, the management information is not yet registered in the hall computer 150, and this association management information is transmitted from the hall computer 150 to the gaming system information management company 96.

  Subsequently, when the gaming system information management company 96 receives the management information transmitted from the hall computer 150, the management management information 96 is collated with the management information registered in its own storage area. Information collation is performed (step A168). The verification result of the management information verification is transmitted from the gaming system information management company 96 to the hall computer 150 and from the hall computer 150 to the main controller 221.

  Then, the hall computer 150 determines the collation result (step A169), and if all the management information matches each other and the collation result = OK (YES in step A169), the management information is registered in its own storage area. (Step A172). On the other hand, if any one of the collated information does not match as the collation result (NO in step A169), the hall computer 150 deletes the management information (step A170), and then the collation result = The fact that it was NG is notified by, for example, the display display 151 of the hall computer 150 which is a notification means (step A171).

  Also, in main controller 221 that has received the collation result transmitted from hall computer 150, the collation result is determined (step A173), and if collation result = OK (YES in step A173), main controller 221 transmits a request for a communication key used for encrypted communication to the communication control apparatus 222. The communication control device 222 that has received the communication key request from the main control device 221 transmits the management information received from the main control device 221 by encrypted communication to the lower control device 215. Then, the lower control device 215 registers the received management information as actual management information (step A175).

On the other hand, when the collation result is NG in the main controller 221 described above (NO in step A173), this is provided in the notification lamp 204 or the unit stocker 230 (not shown) as a notification means. The error notification LED (provided corresponding to one card unit 200, it may be easy to recognize which card unit 200 has an error, or the notification lamp 204 of the card unit 200 in which an error has occurred. If it is turned on, it is also possible to turn on only one error notification LED provided in the unit stocker 230).
When the card unit 200 is replaced as described above, it can be understood that the card unit 200 has been properly replaced in the hall computer 150.

Next, the control operation at the replacement stage of the unit stocker 230 will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 118, when the card unit 200 exchanged due to a failure or the like is stored in the unit stocker 230, the lower control device 215 registers a stocker address No (number) that identifies the installation location of each card unit 200. (Step A181).
In addition, the hall computer 150 and the main control device 221 perform connection confirmation as to whether or not they can communicate with each other. Then, main controller 221 transmits the unit serial ID registered in advance to hall computer 150 together with information requesting transmission of actual management information (this authentication request).

  When the hall computer 150 receives the authentication request and the unit serial ID transmitted from the main controller 221, the unit serial ID identical to the received unit serial ID is already registered in the hall computer 150. It is searched whether it is included in the management information (step A182).

Since the actual management information of the failed card unit 200 is already registered (YES in step A183), the hall computer 150 verifies that the actual management information of the card unit 200 is already registered. The result is transmitted to the main controller 221.
If the actual management information of the failed card unit 200 has not yet been registered (NO in step A183), the process proceeds to the installation stage described above (FIG. 116).

  Thereafter, when the main control device 221 receives the actual management information from the hall computer 150, the main control device 221 performs an internal mutual matching process for collating the temporary management information already registered with the communication control device 222 (step A184). The main control device 221 and the communication control device 222 start communication with each other, and the main control device 221 requests the communication control device 222 to transmit management information such as the stocker address No. Upon receiving this transmission request, the communication control device 222 similarly requests the lower control device 215 to transmit management information such as the stocker address No. Upon receiving this transmission request, the lower control device 215 transmits management information such as the stocker address No to the communication control device 222.

Then, when receiving the management information such as the stocker address No transmitted from the lower control device 215, the communication control device 222 registers this information as management information in its own storage area (step A186). Further, the communication control device 222 transmits management information registered in itself to the main control device 221.
The main control device 221 registers the management information such as the stocker address No. received from the communication control device 222 in its own storage area after performing the mutual matching process (step A185) (step A187). Further, the main controller 221 transmits management information such as the registered stocker address No. to the hall computer 150.

  When the hall computer 150 receives the management information transmitted from the main controller 221, the hall computer 150 searches whether or not this management information is already registered in its own storage area (step A 188). Here, the card unit 200 itself exists in the amusement store, but since the card unit 200 does not correspond to the stocker address No transmitted as the management information, the management information usually does not exist. (NO in step A189). Therefore, this management information is transmitted from the hall computer 150 to the gaming system information management company 96. If the above-described management information is already registered in the hall computer 150 (YES in step A189), the collation work for the unit stocker 230 is finished and the above-described operation stage processing is executed (step A190).

  Subsequently, the gaming system information management company 96 performs management information collation for collating the management information such as the stocker address No. received from the hall computer 150 with the management information registered in its own storage area (step A191). . In this management information collation, if the collation result in which all the management information matches each other is OK, the collation result is transmitted from the gaming system information management company 96 to the hall computer 150. If the collation result is NG, the management information is deleted and a notification to that effect is given.

  Thereafter, the hall computer 150 registers the management information such as the stocker address No received from the gaming system information management company 96 in its own storage area (step A192), and the verification result of the management information verification = OK information Is transmitted to the main controller 221. Receiving this information, main controller 221 transmits a request for a communication key used for encrypted communication to communication controller 222. The communication control device 222 that has received the communication key request from the main control device 221 creates and registers a communication key (step A193).

Next, the communication control device 222 transmits a communication key to the main control device 221. When main controller 221 receives the communication key transmitted from communication controller 222, main controller 221 registers the communication key (step A194). Thereafter, the main control device 221 and the communication control device 222 start encryption communication using a communication key.
When the card unit 200 is exchanged as described above, the process of the same flow as the exchange of the card unit 200 corresponding to the gaming machine 10 described above is performed, so that the information from both card units 200 is exchanged. By sending and receiving, it is possible to know that the hall computer 150 has been properly exchanged.

  Next, in the gaming system 1 according to another embodiment, the activation process S621 in the main process (FIG. 57) of the card unit 200 different from the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  When this routine is started, a self-diagnosis is first executed in step S6211 to check the mode such as what kind of control stage it is in, and in step S6212, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality. If the determination result in step S6212 is YES and there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to the subsequent step S6213, and it is determined whether or not the hall computer 150 that is the management apparatus (higher server) can communicate with each other. If the determination result of step S6212 is NO, the process jumps to step S6322.

  If the decision result in the step S6213 is YES, the above-described online processing is executed, and the process advances to a step S6214 so that the card unit 200 transmits actual management information to the hall computer 150 (higher server). Send the requested information (this authentication request). Thereafter, as the verification process of the main controller 221 of the card unit 200, the process proceeds to step S6215 to determine whether or not the verification result from the hall computer 150 (higher server) has been received.

  If the collation result is received (YES in step S6215), the process proceeds to the next step S6216 to determine whether or not the collation result is OK. On the other hand, if the collation result is not received (NO in step S6215), the process is repeated until the collation result is received, and a standby state is entered. Step S6216 here corresponds to (A56 to A57) in FIG. 11 described above.

  If the determination result in step S6212 is NO and there is some abnormality in the card unit 200, a flag corresponding to the type of abnormality is set in step S6232, and then the process proceeds to step S6233 to notify that there is an abnormality. For example, notification (display or the like) is made by means of a notification lamp 204 or the like.

Similarly, if the collation result in step S6216 is NO, the flag corresponding to the type of abnormality is set in step S6322, and then the process proceeds to step S6233. Notification (display, etc.) is given by 204 or the like.
If “NO” in the step S6213 or “YES” in the step S6216, the process proceeds to a step S6217 to execute an internal mutual matching process. That is, in the card unit 200, the main control device 221 and the communication control device 222 collate the actual management information registered with each other.

Then, in step S6218, the collation result of the internal mutual collation process is determined. If the collation result = OK, YES in step S6218, the process proceeds to step S6219, and the main control device 221 determines the communication control device 222. A management information transmission request to the gaming machine 10 is instructed.
On the other hand, if collation result = NO, NO is determined in step S6218, the process proceeds to step S6232, the flag corresponding to collation result = NO is set, and then the process proceeds to step S6233 to notify that the collation result = NO. For example, notification (display etc.) is performed by the notification lamp 204 or the like.

Next, in step S6220, it is determined whether or not management information from the gaming machine 10 has been received. If management information has been received (YES in step S6220), the management information is registered in step S6221. At this time, a notification that the management information has been received may be transmitted to the gaming machine 10.
On the other hand, if management information is not received (NO in step S6220), the process is repeated until the management information is received, and a standby state is entered. Step S6221 here corresponds to (A63) in FIG. 11 described above.

Thereafter, when the process proceeds to step S6222, it is determined whether or not the card unit 200 is in an offline state. If the card unit 200 is in an offline state, the management information collating process is performed in step S6223, and then the process proceeds to step S6225.
On the other hand, if it is not in an offline state (that is, if it is in an online state), the management information is transmitted to the hall computer 150 (higher server) in step S6224, and then the process proceeds to step S6225. In this way, whether or not management information is sent to the hall computer 150 differs depending on whether it is offline or online. In the online state, the card unit 200 transmits the management information sent from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 150 for verification.

  In step S6225, it is determined whether or not a stocker address No (identification information for identification) that identifies the installation location of the spare card unit 200 in the unit stocker 230 is already registered. If the stocker address No has already been registered (YES in step S6225), a storage correspondence matching process is performed (step S6226), and then the process returns. On the other hand, if the stocker address No has not been registered (NO in step S6225), the storage correspondence matching process (step S6226) is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6227.

  In step S6227, it is determined whether frame opening information has been received from the gaming machine 10. If frame opening information is received (YES in step S6227), the flow advances to next step S6228 to register frame opening information. On the other hand, if the frame opening information is not received (NO in step S6227), the process is repeated until the frame opening information is received, and a standby state is entered.

  In step S6229, a notification that the frame opening information has been received is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. If it is determined that the frame opening information received by the card unit 200 from the gaming machine 10 is “with frame opening”, a predetermined notification (display or the like) is also made on the card unit 200 side by the error display LED 88, the notification lamp 204, or the like. May be performed.

  Thereafter, in step S6230, it is determined whether or not the card unit 200 is in an offline state. If the card unit 200 is in an offline state (YES in step S6230), then the process returns and if it is not in an offline state (that is, in an online state) In step S6231, the frame opening information is transmitted to the hall computer 150 (higher server), and then the process returns.

  Next, in the gaming system 1 according to another embodiment, characteristic control operations particularly regarding the legitimacy determination in the installation stage will be described based on the processing state transition diagram of FIG. 120, in order to clarify the correspondence between the figure and the explanation, the flow of the operation of the verification route of the unit stocker 230 is indicated by broken-line arrows and G1, G2,... The code G is attached as follows. The operation flow of the verification route of the card unit 200 is indicated by a double line arrow and a symbol H such as H1, H2,. Further, the flow of the operation relating to the verification route of the gaming machine 10 is indicated by a solid line arrow, and a symbol I is attached such as I1, I2,.

First, an operation flow in the verification route of the unit stocker 230 will be described.
When power is supplied to the unit stocker 230, the main controller of the unit stocker 230 and the external communication controller 231 can communicate with each other (G1), and the lower part of the card unit 200 stored in the unit stocker 230. When the control device 215 requests collation work to the main control device of the unit stocker 230 (G2), the main control device sends the stocker-specific information such as serial ID to the lower control device 215. (G3).

  The lower control device 215 transmits the stocker specific information received from the unit stocker 230 to the hall computer 150 (G4), and the hall computer 150 further uses the stocker specific information received from the lower control device 215 as game system information. It transmits to the management company 96 (G5). The gaming system information management company 96 collates the stocker specific information, and if the collation result = OK, for example, transmits the result to the hall computer 150 (G6). Subsequently, the hall computer 150 transmits the collation result (= OK) to the lower control device 215 (G7). If the collation result is NG, the unit stocker 230 that has received the result via the lower control device 215 notifies the fact by the notification lamp 204 or the like, which is a notification means (G8).

Next, an operation flow in the verification route of the card unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.
When the communication control device 222 starts communication between the main control devices 221, the communication control device 222 requests the main control device 221 to perform collation work (H1). Then, main controller 221 transmits stocker specific information such as the serial ID registered in its storage area to hall computer 150 (H2). Furthermore, the hall computer 150 transmits the stocker specific information received from the main control device 221 to the gaming system information management company 96 (H3).

  The gaming system information management company 96 collates the stocker specific information received from the hall computer 150, and if the collation result = OK, for example, transmits the result to the hall computer 150 (H4). Subsequently, the hall computer 150 transmits the collation result (= OK) to the main control device 221 (H5), and the main control device 221 transmits the collation result (= OK) to the communication control device 222. (H6).

When the collation result is NG, the main control device 221 notifies that fact by, for example, the display device 35 or the like (H7).
Similarly, also in the communication control apparatus 222, when the collation result is NG, the fact is notified by the notification lamp 204 etc. which are notification means (H8).

Next, the operation flow in the verification route of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
When communication is started between the card unit 200 and the gaming machine 10, the communication control device 222 requests the gaming control device 54 of the gaming machine 10 to transmit management information (I1), and then the gaming control device 54. Requests the payout control device 80 to transmit management information (I2). Then, the payout control device 80 transmits the management information already stored to the game control device 54 (I3).

  The game control device 54 transmits the management information received from the payout control device 80 to the communication control device 222 of the card unit 200 (I4). The communication control device 222 that has received the management information registers the management information in its own storage area, and then transmits the management information to the main control device 221 (I5). The main control device 221 registers the management information transmitted from the communication control device 222 in its own storage area, and transmits the management information to the hall computer 150 (I6).

  Then, the hall computer 150 transmits the management information received from the main control device 221 to the gaming system information management company 96 (I7). The gaming system information management company 96 collates the management information received from the hall computer 150, and if the collation result = OK, for example, transmits the result to the hall computer 150 (I8). Subsequently, the hall computer 150 transmits the verification result (= OK) to the main control device 221 (I9), and the main control device 221 transmits the verification result (= OK) to the communication control device 222. (I10).

The following inventive concept is derived from the configuration of the another embodiment as described above.
[41] A plurality of gaming machines installed in a gaming store, a plurality of terminals installed corresponding to each gaming machine, and capable of communicating with each corresponding gaming machine, and communicating with each terminal machine A management device that can be installed in the game store and manages various information of the game store, and a storage device that is installed in the game store and stores the spare terminal in the respective installation locations in a state where it can be individually identified. And a gaming system comprising
For each of the terminals, the corresponding gaming machine in the game store is installed correspondingly, and the spare terminal is stored in correspondence with which installation location of the storage device. A setting means that can set whether or not
The correspondence relationship between the gaming machine and the terminal set by the setting means, and the correspondence relationship between the spare terminal and the installation location are managed in the management device,
When power is applied to the storage device, information regarding the correspondence between the spare terminal and the installation location in the storage device at the time of power-on is transmitted to the management device,
The management device performs a validity determination as to whether or not the correspondence relationship between the spare terminal and the installation location is valid based on the transmitted information on the correspondence relationship, and determines the determination result. A gaming system characterized by being configured to transmit.

Here, the “storage device” corresponds to the unit stocker 230.
The “setting unit” is realized by the lower control device 215 in the lower control unit 214 of each card unit 200, for example, but may be realized by other devices. Here, the “setting means” not only sets which storage location of the spare card unit 200 is stored in the unit stocker 230, but also which game machine 10 the card unit 200 corresponds to. It is also set whether it is installed, and may be realized not only with the unit stocker 230 but also with other devices and means.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[42] The management device includes:
[41] The information on the correspondence can be transmitted to an external third party when the correspondence is determined not to be valid in the validity determination. The gaming system described in 1.
The “third party organization” corresponds to the gaming system information management company 96 as described above.

  According to the gaming system of the inventive concept based on the configuration of such another embodiment, it is possible to grasp the exact replacement situation regarding the terminal unit such as the card unit in the gaming store, and to ensure the unauthorized replacement of the terminal unit. Can be prevented.

  The embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included. For example, in the embodiment described above, the gaming machine has been described as the enclosed gaming machine 10, but a normal pachinko machine that actually pays out gaming balls may be used.

  In addition, the game medium is not limited to a game ball, and can be applied to a slot machine that starts a game by inserting medals and pays out medals in accordance with winnings when the game is completed. Here, as the type of slot machine, it is assumed that one game value is given to one medal. In addition to a normal slot machine that rents or pays out medals, the player owns each game / winning occurrence It may be a card-type slot machine that does not pay out medals even when winning in the game process by adding / subtracting / subtracting game value data to be played.

  Further, as another type of slot machine, a medal number data corresponding to a medal lending operation is recorded on one medal and lent out as one medal giving a game value for a plurality of medals. The slot machine may be of a type in which the recorded medal number data is credited and can be played.

Further, although the card unit 200 (terminal machine) is provided separately from the gaming machine 10, all or part of the card unit 200 is built in the gaming machine 10, and at least the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200 are included. You may comprise so that one part may become united.
In the above-described embodiment, the management device is configured as the hall computer 150. However, the management device may be distributed to other devices, or may be provided in other devices.

  In addition, regarding the gaming machine 10 in which the frame opening information is recorded with the opening of the frame and the fraud has not yet been found, the gaming machine 10 is temporarily removed and stored in a warehouse or the like, or re-installed as a second-hand machine. When the destination is moved, it may be configured to notify that the frame of the opening member has been opened in the past or to manage that the gaming machine 10 having the frame opened in the past is installed by the hall computer 150. .

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the information on fraud such as frame opening information = frame opening, monitoring target setting, fraud occurrence setting, etc. is cleared based on a predetermined condition. If the game machine 10 and the card unit 200 are discarded, all information is stored and saved as a history, so that this information (history) will be taken over even if it is re-installed or moved. In addition, the effect of preventing fraud can be achieved.

  In this way, the frame opening information is set so as to remain continuously in the storage areas of the gaming machine 10 and the card unit 200, and the frame opening information is provided to an external third party (for example, the gaming system information management company 96). Send information such as presence and monitoring target settings, and generate new management information, and re-register as, for example, “game machine with open frame” or “card unit with open frame”, “monitoring target setting game machine”, etc. Then, it is preferable to re-register in the hall computer 150.

  When moving the gaming machine 10 as a “used machine”, the opening information is managed by an external third party organization (for example, the gaming system information management company 96, etc.). May be managed by the third party organization, or may be managed by the hall computer 150. When recording the frame opening information, the fraudulent side has fully recognized that the eyes of monitoring are severe, so it is conceivable that fraud will be performed when the fraud is over. In particular, when employees are involved, it may be possible to guide fraud at the point of travel as a second-hand machine. It becomes possible to prevent.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The game system according to the present invention can be applied to a game system in a game store in which a plurality of enclosed game machines that circulate and use game balls enclosed in the machine are installed among game machines, particularly pachinko machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game system 10 ... Game machine 12 ... Inner frame 13 ... Glass frame 30 ... Operation display apparatus 35 ... Display apparatus 54 ... Game control apparatus 55 ... Circulation apparatus 80 ... Discharge control apparatus 88 ... Error display LED
91 ... Game machine manufacturer 92 ... Card unit manufacturer 93 ... Card company 94 ... Chip manufacturer 95 ... Machine machine information management company 96 ... Game system information management company 125 ... Glass frame release switch 126 ... Inner frame release switch 150 ... Hall computer 200 ... Card Unit 215: Lower control device 221: Main control device 222 ... Communication control device 230 ... Unit stocker 231 ... External communication control device

Claims (4)

A plurality of gaming machines installed in a gaming store, installed corresponding to each game machine, respectively the corresponding gaming machine communicate possible plurality of terminals, it is possible signal passing each terminal gaming store A management system that is installed in and manages various information of the game store,
The gaming machine is
It is possible to play a game by repeatedly using a predetermined number of game media enclosed in advance in the gaming machine, the game media is made of a non-magnetic material,
An open / close member attached to the machine frame so as to be openable / closable, an open / close monitoring means for monitoring the open / close state of the open / close member, and a monitoring result of the open / close monitoring means can be transmitted to the outside including the terminal and the management device. Monitoring result transmission means,
The open / close monitoring means can monitor the open / closed state of the open / close member regardless of the presence or absence of power supply that can be played in the gaming machine,
A gaming machine in which the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring means is a result indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed is illegally performed because a gaming medium made of a magnetic material is enclosed in the gaming machine and the viewing is difficult. A gaming system comprising monitoring target setting means that can be set as a monitoring target gaming machine that may be present .   2. The apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising a notification unit capable of performing predetermined notification when the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring unit is a result indicating that the opening / closing member has been opened / closed. Game system. The terminal includes storage means capable of storing various information,
3. The gaming system according to claim 1, wherein the storage unit is capable of storing at least the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring unit and information on fraud when the monitoring result of the opening / closing monitoring unit is received. . And determinable fraud determining means based on the number of game media that exist whether the fraud before Symbol gaming machine in the gaming machine or the specific region,
Setting means capable of arbitrarily setting a prescribed number of game media as a determination criterion for the presence or absence of fraud,
The gaming system according to claim 1, 2 or 3 , wherein the setting means can set the specified number related to the monitored gaming machine to a value different from gaming machines other than the monitored gaming machine. .